Kayalpattinam - Tsunami Evacuation Centre - Tender Conditions

i

GOVERNMENT OF TAMILNADU

TAMILNADU EMPLOYMENT AND TRAINING DEPARTMENT

BID NO 53 / 2011-2012

NATIONAL COMPETITIVE BIDDING

(CIVIL WORKS)

NAME OF WORK: CONSTRUCTION OF MULTIPURPOSE EVACUATION SHELTER FOR 1000 PEOPLE CAPACITY SCHOOL KITCHEN AND ANIMAL SHELTERS INCLUDING ELECTRIFICATION, WATER SUPPLY AND

SEWERAGE AT KAYALPATTINAM VILLAGE IN THOOTHUKUDI DISTRICT

PACKAGE NO.TNPWD.ES/10 /ETRP/02 slice - A PERIOD OF SALE OF BIDDING DOCUMENT

FROM 29.03.2012 TO 08.05.2012

TIME AND DATE OF PRE-BID CONFERENCE

DATE 16.04.2012 TIME 15.00 hours.

LAST DATE AND TIME FOR RECEIPT OF BIDS

DATE 09.05.2012 TIME. 15.00 hours.

*TIME AND DATE OF OPENING OF BIDS DATE 09.05.2012 TIME 15.30 hours.

PLACE OF OPENING OF BIDS Office of the Superintending Engineer, Public Works Department,

Building Construction and Maintenance Circle, Tirunelveli – 627002

OFFICER INVITING BIDS Superintending Engineer PWD Buildings Construction and

Maintenance circle, Tirunelveli – 627002

W-2

Contractor Superintending Engineer, PWD,

Buildings (C&M) Circle, Tirunelveli-

1

2

INVITATION FOR BID

(IFB)

i

GOVERNMENT OF TAMILNADU

TAMILNADU PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT, BUILDING ORGANISATION, BUILDINGS (CONSTRUCTION & MAINTENANCE) CIRCLE, TIRUNELVELI -2.

INVITATIONS FOR BIDS (IFB) NATIONAL COMPETITIVE BIDDING Date: 26.03.2012 Bid No.:53 / 2011-12 1. The Government of India has received a credit from the International Development Association / towards the cost of Emergency Tsunami reconstruction project (ETRP) and intends to apply a part of the funds to cover eligible payments under the contracts for construction of works as detailed below. Bidding is open to all bidders from eligible source countries as defined in the IBRD Guidelines for Procurement. Bidders from India should, however, be registered with the Government of Tamilnadu or other State Governments/Government of India, or State/Central Government Undertakings. Bidders are advised to note the minimum qualification criteria specified in Clause 4 of the Instructions to Bidders to qualify for the award of the contract. 2. The Superintending Engineer, Public works Department, Building Construction and Maintenance Circle, Tirunelveli – 2. invites bids for the construction of work detailed in the table.The bidder may submit bids for any or all of the works . 3. Bidding documents (and additional copies) may be purchased from the Office of the Superintending Engineer, Public Works Department, Construction and Maintenance Circle, Tirunelveli-2 from 29.03.2012 to 08.05.2012, for a non-refundable fee (three sets) as indicated, in the form of Demand Draft on any Scheduled bank payable at THOOTHUKUDI in favour of Executive Engineer, PWD, Buildings Construction and Maintenance division,Thoothukudi in Thoothukudi district Interested bidders may obtain further information at the same address. Bidding documents requested by mail will be

despatched by registered/speed post on payment of an extra amount of Rs.500/- The Superintending Engineer, Public works Department, Construction and Maintenance Circle, Tirunelveli. will not be held responsible for the postal delay if any, in the delivery of the documents or non-receipt of the same. The Bid document is also available on the website namely http://www.tenders.tn.gov.in

and http://www.tntenders.gov.in and could be freely downloaded by the interested bidders. The bidders who have downloaded the bid documents shall be solely responsible for checking these websites for any addendum / amendment issued subsequently to the bid documents and take into consideration the same while preparing and submitting the bids. 4. Bids must be accompanied by security of the amount specified for the work in the table below, drawn in favour of Executive Engineer, Public Works Department, Building Construction Division, Tirunelveli. Bid security will have to be in any one of the forms as specified in the bidding document and shall have to be valid for 45 days beyond the validity of the bid. 5. Bids must be delivered to the Superintending Engineer, Public Works Department, Construction

and Maintenance Circle, Tirunelveli on or before 15.00 Hours on 09.05.2012 and will be opened

on the same day at 15.30 Hours in the presence of the bidders or one of their authorized representatives who wish to attend. If the office happens to be closed on the date of receipt of the bids as specified, the bids will be received and opened on the next working day at the same time and venue.

6. A pre bid meeting will be held on 16.04.2012 at 15.00 hours. at the Office of the

Superintending Engineer, Public Works Department, Buildings Construction and Maintenance Circle, Tirunelveli-2. to clarify the issues and to answer questions on any matter that may be raised at that stage as stated in Clause 9.2 of ‘Instructions to Bidders’ of the bidding document. 7. Other details can be seen in the bidding documents.


Buildings (C&M) Circle,

Tirunelveli

4

TABLE

Package N

o.

Name of Work Approximate value of work

In million

Bid security In million

Cost of document (Rs.)

Period of Completion

1 CONSTRUCTION OF MULTIPURPOSE EVACUATION SHELTER FOR 1000 capacity School ,Kitchen and animal Shelters at KAYALPATTINAM in

Thoothukudi District. TNPWD/ES10/ERTRP/02 SLICE ..A

Rs.

19.40

Rs.

0.194

Rs.1000+ VAT

12 Months

(Including monsoon periods)

Superintending Engineer PWD Buildings Construction and

Maintenance Circle, Tirunelveli - 2.

Seal of office



Tirunelveli

5

SECTION 1: INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS (ITB)



Tirunelveli

6

SECTION. I. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS.

TABLE OF CLAUSES.

A GENERAL Page No.

D. SUBMISSION OF BIDS. Page No.

1 Scope of Bid 7 19 Sealing and Marking of Bids 14

2 Source of Funds. 7 20 Deadline for Submission of Bids 14

3 Eligible Bidders. 7 21 Late Bids 15

4 Qualification of the Bidder. 7 22 Modification and Withdrawal of Bids 15

5 One Bid per Bidder. 10 E BID OPENING AND EVALUATION.

6 Cost of Bidding 10 23 Bid Opening 15

7 Site Visit 10 24 Process to be Confidential 15

B BIDDING DOCUMENTS. 25 Clarification of Bids 16

8 Content of Bidding Documents 26 Examination of Bids and Determination of Responsiveness

16

9 Clarification of Bidding Documents

11 27 Correction of Errors 16

10 Amendment of Bidding Documents

11 28 Currency for Bid Evaluation

C. PREPARATION OF BIDS. 29 Evaluation and Comparison of Bids 17

11 Language of Bid 11 30 Preference for Domestic Bidders

12 Documents Comprising the Bid 12 F. AWARD OF CONTRACT.

13 Bid Prices 12 31 Award Criteria 17

14 Currencies of Bid and Payment 32 Employer’s Right to Accept any Bid and to Reject any or all Bids

17

15 Bid Validity 12 33 Notification of Award

16 Bid Security 13 34 Performance Security

17 Alternative Proposals by Bidders

35 Advance Payment and Security 18

18 Format and Signing of Bid 14 36 Adjudicator

37 Corrupt or Fraudulent Practices 18



Tirunelveli

7

A. General 1. Scope of Bid 1.1 The Superintending Engineer, Public Works Department, Construction and Maintenance Circle, ,

Tirunelveli-2 (referred to as Employer in these documents) invites bids for the construction of works (as defined in these documents and referred to as “the works”) detailed in the table given in IFB. The bidders may submit bids for any or all of the works detailed in the table given in IFB.

1.2 The successful bidder will be expected to complete the works by the intended completion date

specified in the Contract data. 2. Source of Funds 2.1 The Government of India has received a credit from the International Development Association

(hereinafter interchangeably called “the Bank”) towards the cost of Emergency Tsunami Reconstruction Project (ETRP) and intends to apply a part of the funds to cover eligible payments under the contract for the Works. Payments by the Bank will be made only at the request of the borrower and upon approval of the Bank in accordance with the Credit Agreement, and will be subject in all respects to the terms and conditions of that Agreement. Except as the Bank may specifically otherwise agree, no party other than the borrower shall derive any rights from the Credit Agreement or have any rights to the credit proceeds.

2.2 The loan agreement prohibits a withdrawal from the loan account for the purpose of any payment to

persons or entities, or for any import of goods, if such payment or import, to the knowledge of the Bank, is prohibited by a decision of the United Nations Security Council, taken under Chapter VII of the Charter of the United Nations.

3. Eligible Bidders 3.1 This Invitation for Bids is open to all bidders from the eligible countries as defined under the IBRD

Guidelines for Procurement. Any materials, equipment, and services to be used in the performance of the Contract shall have their origin in the eligible source countries.

3.2 All bidders shall provide in Section 2, Forms of Bid and Qualification Information, a statement that

the Bidder is not associated, nor has been associated in the past, directly or indirectly, with the Consultant or any other entity that has prepared the design, specifications, and other documents for the Project or being proposed as Project Manager for the Contract. A firm that has been engaged by the Borrower to provide consulting services for the preparation or supervision of the works, and any of its affiliates, shall not be eligible to bid.

3.3 Government-owned enterprises in the Employer’s country may only participate if they are legally and

financially autonomous, operate under commercial law and are not a dependent agency of the Borrower or Sub-borrower.

3.4 Bidders shall not be under a declaration of ineligibility for corrupt and fraudulent practices issued by

the Bank in accordance with sub-clause 37.1. 4. Qualification of the Bidder 4.1 All bidders shall provide in Section 2, Forms of Bid and Qualification Information, a preliminary

description of the proposed work method and schedule, including drawings and charts, as necessary.

4.2 In the event that Pre-qualification of potential bidders has been undertaken, only bids from pre qualified bidders will be considered for award for Contract. These qualified bidders should submit with their bids any information updating their original prequalification applications or, alternatively, confirm in their bids that the originally submitted prequalification information remains essentially correct as of date of bid submission. The update or confirmation should be provided in Section 2. 4.3 If the Employer has not undertaken prequalification of potential bidders, all bidders shall include the

following information and documents with their bids in Section 2: (a) copies of original documents defining the constitution or legal status, place of registration, and

principal place of business; written power of attorney of the signatory of the Bid to commit the Bidder;



Tirunelveli

8

(b) total monetary value of construction work performed for each of the last five years; I experience in works of a similar nature and size for each of the last five years, and details of

works under way or contractually committed; and clients who may be contacted for further information on those contracts;

(d) major items of construction equipment proposed to carry out the Contract; (e) qualifications and experience of key site management and technical personnel proposed for

the Contract; (f) reports on the financial standing of the Bidder, such as profit and loss statements and

auditor’s reports for the past five years; (g) evidence of adequacy of working capital for this contract (access to line (s) of credit and

availability of other financial resources); (h) authority to seek references from the Bidder’s bankers; (i) information regarding any litigation or arbitration resulting from contracts executed by the

Bidder in the last five years or currently under execution. The information shall include the names of the parties concerned, the disputed amount, cause of litigation, and matter in dispute;

(j) proposals for subcontracting components of the Works which in aggregate add to more than

20 percent of the Bid Price (for each, the qualifications and experience of the identified sub-contractor in the relevant field should be annexed; no vertical splitting of work for sub-contracting is acceptable); and

(k) the proposed methodology and program of construction including Environmental Management

Plan, backed with equipment, materials and manpower planning and deployment, duly supported with broad calculations and quality control / assurance procedures proposed to be adopted, justifying their capability of execution and completion of the work as per technical specifications within the stipulated period of completion as per milestones (for all contracts over Rs.10 M).

4.4 ‘Bids from Joint ventures are not acceptable’. 4.5 A. To qualify for award of the contract, each bidder in its name should have in the last five years

i.e. 2006-07 , 07-08 , 08-09, 09-10, 10-2011 (a) achieved, in at least two years, a minimum annual financial turnover (in all classes of civil

engineering construction works only) of Rs.38.80 millions (Rs.388.00 Lakhs) b) satisfactorily completed [not less than 90% of contract value ] as a prime contractor, (or as

subcontractor duly certified by the employer/main contractor) at least one similar work of

value not less than Rs.17.46 millions (Rs.174.60 Lakhs)

(c) executed in any one year, the following minimum quantities of work:

i Brickwork 448m3

ii RCC of any proportion and PCC 589 m3

(d) The contractor or his identified sub-contractor should possess required valid electrical licence

for executing the building electrification works and should have executed similar electrical

works Totaling Rupees 0.60 million In any one year of the last five years

(e) The contractor or his identified sub-contractor should possess required valid licence for executing the water supply/sanitary engineering works and should have executed similar water

supply/sanitary engineering works Totaling Rupees 0.25 million in any one year of the last five

years.



Tirunelveli

9

“ (@) at 2011- 12*price level. Financial turnover and cost of completed works of previous years

shall be given weight age of 5% per year based on rupee value to bring them to 2011--12

price level”.

4.5 B. Each bidder should further demonstrate:

(a) availability (either owned or leased or by procurement against mobilization advances) of the following key and critical equipment for this work:

Concrete mixer with capacity 0.28 / 0.20 cum with hydraulic hopper, motor driven 2 Nos.

Vibrator with 40mm needle with petrol/kerosene start with 6m hose 2 Nos.

Pump for dewatering with 5 HP or suitable capacity 2 Nos.

Based on the studies, carried out by the Engineer the minimum suggested major equipment

to attain the completion of works in accordance with the prescribed construction schedule are shown in the above list.

The bidders should, however, undertake their own studies and furnish with their bid, a detailed construction planning and methodology supported with layout and necessary drawings and calculations (detailed) as stated in clause 4.3 (k) above to allow the employer to review their proposals. The numbers, types and capacities of each plant/equipment shall be shown in the proposals along with the cycle time for each operation for the given production capacity to match the requirements.

(b) availability for this work of a Project Manager and other personal with not less than five years'

experience in construction of similar civil engineering works and other key personnel with adequate

experience as required; and

Position Name Qualifications Years of

Experience

(General)

Years of Experience in

the proposed position

Project Manager :

Bachelor’s degree with

5 years experience in

construction of similar

Civil Engineering work

– 1 No

1 No.

Site Engineer Civil

a) D.C.E., with 3 years

experience –1 No

1 No

Site Engineer

(Electrical)

a) D.E.E., with 3 years

experience - 1 No

1 No

and

(c) liquid assets and/or availability of credit facilities of not less than Rs. 4.85 millions (Rs.48.50 Lakhs) in the format given in Section 2.

(Certificate from Banks in the format mentioned in Section 2- qualification – information (page 27) for meeting the funds requirements) 4.5 C. To qualify for a package of contracts made up of this and other contracts for which bids are

invited in the IFB, the bidder must demonstrate having experience and resources sufficient to meet the aggregate of the qualifying criteria for the individual contracts.

4.6 Sub-contractors experience and resources shall not be taken into account in determining the

bidder's compliance with the qualifying criteria except to the extent stated in 4.5 (A) (b, d and e) above.

4.7 Bidders who meet the minimum qualification criteria will be qualified only if their available bid

capacity is more than the total bid value. The available bid capacity will be calculated as under:



Tirunelveli

10

Assessed Available Bid capacity = ( A*N*1.5 - B ) Where A = Maximum value of civil engineering works executed in any one year during the last five years

(updated to 2011-12 price level) taking into account the completed as well as works in progress.

N = Number of years prescribed for completion of the works for which bids are invited [12 months

i.e., 1 year].

B = Value, at 2011-12 price level, of existing commitments and on-going works to be completed during the next 1 years (period of completion of the works for which bids are invited)

Note: The statements showing the value of existing commitments and on-going works as well as

the stipulated period of completion remaining for each of the works listed should be countersigned by the Engineer in charge, not below the rank of an Executive Engineer or equivalent.

4.8 Even though the bidders meet the above qualifying criteria, they are subject to be disqualified if they

have: - made misleading or false representations in the forms, statements and attachments

submitted in proof of the qualification requirements; and/or - record of poor performance such as abandoning the works, not properly completing the

contract, inordinate delays in completion, litigation history, or financial failures etc.; and/or - participated in the previous bidding for the same work and had quoted unreasonably high bid

prices and could not furnish rational justification to the employer. 5. One Bid per Bidder 5.1 Each bidder shall submit only one bid for one contract. A bidder who submits or participates in

more than one Bid (other than as a subcontractor or in cases of alternatives that have been permitted or requested) will cause all the proposals with the Bidder’s participation to be disqualified.

6. Cost of Bidding 6.1 The bidder shall bear all costs associated with the preparation and submission of his Bid, and the

Employer will in no case be responsible and liable for those costs. 7. Site visit 7.1 The Bidder, at the Bidder’s own responsibility and risk is encouraged to visit and examine the Site

of Works and its surroundings and obtain all information that may be necessary for preparing the Bid and entering into a contract for construction of the Works. The costs of visiting the Site shall be at the Bidder's own expense.

B. Bidding Documents

8. Content of Bidding Documents 8.1 The set of bidding documents comprises the documents listed in the table below and addenda

issued in accordance with Clause 10: Invitation for Bids Section 1 Instructions to Bidders 2 Forms of Bid and Qualification Information 3 Conditions of Contract 4 Contract Data 5 Specifications 6 Drawings 7 Bills of Quantities 8 Forms of Securities



Tirunelveli

11

8.2 Of the three sets of the bidding documents supplied, two sets should be completed and returned with the bid.

9. Clarification of Bidding Documents 9.1 A prospective bidder requiring any clarification of the bidding documents may notify the Employer

in writing or by cable (hereinafter "cable" includes telex and facsimile) at the Employer's address indicated in the invitation to bid. The Employer will respond to any request for clarification which he received earlier than 15 days prior to the deadline for submission of bids. Copies of the Employer's response will be forwarded to all purchasers of the bidding documents, including a description of the enquiry but without identifying its source.

9.2 Pre-bid meeting 9.2.1 The bidder or his official representative is invited to attend a pre-bid meeting which will take place at Superintending Engineer Chamber, Office of the Superintending Engineer, Public Works

Department, Buildings Construction and Maintenance Circle, Tirunelveli – 2. on 16.04.2012 at 15.00

hours. 9.2.2 The purpose of the meeting will be to clarify issues and to answer questions on any matter that

may be raised at that stage. 9.2.3 The bidder is requested to submit any questions in writing or by cable to reach the Employer not

later than one week before the meeting. 9.2.4 Minutes of the meeting, including the text of the questions raised (without identifying the source of

enquiry) and the responses given will be transmitted without delay to all purchasers of the bidding documents. Any modification of the bidding documents listed in Sub-Clause 8.1 which may become necessary as a result of the pre-bid meeting shall be made by the Employer exclusively through the issue of an Addendum pursuant to Clause 10 and not through the minutes of the pre-bid meeting.

9.2.5 Non-attendance at the pre-bid meeting will not be a cause for disqualification of a bidder. 10. Amendment of Bidding Documents 10.1 Before the deadline for submission of bids, the Employer may modify the bidding documents by

issuing addenda. 10.2 Any addendum thus issued shall be part of the bidding documents and shall be communicated in

writing to all the purchasers of the bidding documents. Prospective bidders shall acknowledge receipt of each addendum in writing to the Employer.

10.3 To give prospective bidders reasonable time in which to take an addendum into account in preparing their bids, the Employer shall extend as necessary the deadline for submission of bids, in accordance with Sub-Clause 20.2 below.

C. Preparation of Bids 11. Language of the Bid 11.1 All documents relating to the bid shall be in the English language. 12. Documents comprising the Bid 12.1 The bid submitted by the bidder shall comprise the following: (a) The Bid (in the format indicated in Section 2). (b) Bid Security; (c) Priced Bill of Quantities; (d) Qualification Information Form and Documents; and any other materials required to be completed and submitted by bidders in accordance with

these instructions. The documents listed under Sections 2, 4 and 7 of Sub-Clause 8.1 shall be filled in without exception.



Tirunelveli

12

12.2 Bidders bidding for this contract together with other contracts stated in the IFB to form a package will so indicate in the bid together with any discounts offered for the award of more than one contract.

13. Bid Prices 13.1 The contract shall be for the whole works as described in Sub-Clause 1.1, based on the priced Bill

Quantities submitted by the Bidder. 13.2 The bidder shall fill in rates and prices and line item total (both in figures and words) for all items

of the Works described in the Bill of Quantities along with total bid price (both in figures and words). Items for which no rate or price is entered by the bidder will not be paid for by the Employer when executed and shall be deemed covered by the other rates and prices in the Bill of Quantities. Corrections, if any, shall be made by crossing out, initialing, dating and rewriting.

13.3 All duties, taxes, and other levies payable by the contractor under the contract, or for any other

cause shall be included in the rates, prices and total Bid Price submitted by the Bidder. Note: “Bidders may like to ascertain availability of excise/custom duty exemption benefits available in

India to the contracts financed under World Bank loan/credits. They are solely responsible for obtaining such benefits which they have considered in their bid and in case of failure to receive such benefits for reasons whatsoever, the employer will not compensate the bidder (contractor). Where the bidder has quoted taking into account such benefits, he must give all information required for issue of certificates in terms of such notifications as per form attached to the Qualification Information in the bid. To the extent the employer determines the quantity indicated therein are reasonable keeping in view the bill of quantities, construction programme and methodology, the certificates will be issued within 60 [sixty] days of signing of contract and no subsequent changes will be permitted. No certificate will be issued for items where no quantity/capacity of equipment is indicated in the statement. The bids which do not conform to the above provisions will be treated as non responsive and rejected. Any delay in procurement of the construction equipment /machinery/goods as a result of the above shall not be a cause for granting any extension of time.”

13.4 The rates and prices quoted by the bidder are subject to adjustment during the performance of the

contract in accordance with the provision of clause 47 of the conditions of contract. 14. Currencies of Bid and Payment 14.1 The unit rates and the prices shall be quoted by the bidder entirely in Indian Rupees. 15. Bid Validity 15.1 Bids shall remain valid for a period not less than ninety days after the deadline date for bid

submission specified in Clause 20. A bid valid for a shorter period shall be rejected by the Employer as non-responsive.

15.2 In exceptional circumstances, prior to expiry of the original time limit, the Employer may request

that the bidders may extend the period of validity for a specified additional period. The request and the bidders' responses shall be made in writing or by cable. A bidder may refuse the request without forfeiting his bid security. A bidder agreeing to the request will not be required or permitted to modify his bid except as provided in 15.3 hereinafter, but will be required to extend the validity of his bid security for a period of the extension, and in compliance with Clause 16 in all respects.

15.3 In the case of contracts in which the Contract Price is fixed (not subject to price adjustment), in the event

that the purchaser requests and the Bidder agrees to an extension of the validity period, the contract price, if

the Bidder is selected for award shall be the bid price corrected as follows :

The price shall be increased by the factor (value of factor B)1 for each week or part of a

week that has elapsed from the expiration of the initial bid validity to the date of issue of

letter of acceptance to the successful Bidder.

15.4 Bid evaluation will be based on the bid prices without taking into consideration the above correction.



Tirunelveli

13

16. Bid Security 16.1 The Bidder shall furnish, as part of his Bid, a Bid security in the amount as shown in column 4 of

the table of IFB for this particular work. This bid security shall be in favour of Executive Engineer, PWD, Buildings Construction and Maintenance division,Thoothukudi in Thoothukudi and may be in one of the following forms:

- a bank guarantee issued by a nationalized / scheduled bank located in India or a reputable

bank located abroad in the form given in Section 8; or - Certified cheque, Bank draft or Letter of Credit in favour of Executive Engineer, PWD,

Buildings Construction and Maintenance division,Thoothukudi inThoothukudi Payable at Thoothukudi K.V.P., N.S.C., pledged in favour of Executive Engineer, PWD, Buildings Construction and Maintenance division,Thoothukudi

16.2 Bank guarantees issued as surety for the bid shall be valid for 45 days beyond the validity of the bid.

16.3 Any bid not accompanied by an acceptable Bid Security and not secured as indicated in Sub-

Clauses 16.1 and 16.2 above shall be rejected by the Employer as non-responsive. 16.4 The Bid Security of unsuccessful bidders will be returned within 28 days of the end of the bid

validity period specified in Sub-Clause 15.1. 16.5 The Bid Security of the successful bidder will be discharged when the bidder has signed the

Agreement and furnished the required Performance Security. 16.6 The Bid Security may be forfeited (a) if the Bidder withdraws the Bid after Bid opening during the period of Bid validity; (b) if the Bidder does not accept the correction of the Bid Price, pursuant to Clause 27; or (c) in the case of a successful Bidder, if the Bidder fails within the specified time limit to (i) sign the Agreement; or (ii) furnish the required Performance Security. 17. Alternative Proposals by Bidders 17.1 Bidders shall submit offers that comply with the requirements of the bidding documents, including

the basic technical design as indicated in the drawing and specifications. Alternatives will not be considered.

18. Format and Signing of Bid 18.1 The Bidder shall prepare one original and one copy of the documents comprising the bid as

described in Clause 12 of these Instructions to Bidders, bound with the volume containing the Form of Bid, and clearly marked "ORIGINAL" and "COPY" as appropriate. In the event of discrepancy between them, the original shall prevail.

18.2 The original and copy of the Bid shall be typed or written in indelible ink and shall be signed by a

person or persons duly authorized to sign on behalf of the Bidder, pursuant to Sub-Clauses 4.3. All pages of the bid where entries or amendments have been made shall be initialed by the person or persons signing the bid.

18.3 The Bid shall contain no alterations or additions, except those to comply with instructions issued

by the Employer, or as necessary to correct errors made by the bidder, in which case such corrections shall be initialed by the person or persons signing the bid.

18.4 The Bidder shall furnish information as described in the Form of Bid on commissions or gratuities,

if any, paid or to be paid to agents relating to this Bid, and to contract execution if the Bidder is awarded the contract.

D. Submission of Bids



Tirunelveli

14

19. Sealing and Marking of Bids 19.1 The Bidder shall seal the original and copy of the Bid in separate envelopes, duly marking the

envelopes as "ORIGINAL" and "COPY". These envelopes (called as inner envelopes) shall then be put inside one outer envelope.

19.2 The inner and outer envelopes shall (a) be addressed to the Employer at the following address: The Superintending Engineer, Public works department, Buildings Construction and Maintenance Circle, , Chennai-5. (b) bear the following identification:

Bid for CONSTRUCTION OF MULTIPURPOSE EVACUATION SHELTER FOR 1000

capacity School Kitchen and animal Shelters at KAYALPATTINAM in Thoothukudi District.

- Bid Reference No. TNPWD/ES10/ERTRP/02 SLICE ..A - DO NOT OPEN BEFORE 09.05.2012, 15.30 Hours 19.3 In addition to the identification required in Sub-Clause 19.2, the inner envelopes shall indicate the

name and address of the bidder to enable the bid to be returned unopened in case it is declared late, pursuant to Clause 21.

19.4 If the outer envelope is not sealed and marked as above, the Employer will assume no

responsibility for the misplacement or premature opening of the bid. 20. Deadline for Submission of the Bids

20.1 Bids must be received by the Employer at the address specified above not later than 15.00

Hours on 09.05.2012 .In the event of the specified date for the submission of bids declared a holiday for the Employer, the Bids will be received up to the appointed time on the next working day.

20.2 The Employer may extend the deadline for submission of bids by issuing an amendment in

accordance with Clause 10, in which case all rights and obligations of the Employer and the bidders previously subject to the original deadline will then be subject to the new deadline.

21. Late Bids 21.1 Any Bid received by the Employer after the deadline prescribed in Clause 20 will be returned

unopened to the bidder. 22. Modification and Withdrawal of Bids 22.1 Bidders may modify or withdraw their bids by giving notice in writing before the deadline

prescribed in Clause 20. 22.2 Each Bidder's modification or withdrawal notice shall be prepared, sealed, marked, and delivered

in accordance with Clause 18 and 19, with the outer and inner envelopes additionally marked "MODIFICATION" or "WITHDRAWAL", as appropriate.

22.3 No bid may be modified after the deadline for submission of Bids. 22.4 Withdrawal or modification of a Bid between the deadline for submission of bids and the expiration

of the original period of bid validity specified in Clause 15.1 above or as extended pursuant to Clause 15.2 may result in the forfeiture of the Bid security pursuant to Clause 16.

22.5 Bidders may offer discounts to, or modify the prices of their Bids only by submitting Bid

modifications in accordance with this clause, or included in the original Bid submission. E. Bid Opening and Evaluation



Tirunelveli

15

23. Bid Opening 23.1 The Employer will open all the Bids received (except those received late), including modifications

made pursuant to Clause 22, in the presence of the Bidders or their representatives who choose to attend at 15.30 hours on the date and the place specified in Clause 20. In the event of the specified date of Bid opening being declared a holiday for the Employer, the Bids will be opened at the appointed time and location on the next working day.

23.2 Envelopes marked "WITHDRAWAL" shall be opened and read out first. Bids for which an

acceptable notice of withdrawal has been submitted pursuant to Clause 22 shall not be opened. Subsequently all envelopes marked “Modification” shall be opened and the submissions therein read out in appropriate detail.

23.3 The Bidders' names, the Bid prices, the total amount of each Bid and of any alternative Bid (if

alternatives have been requested or permitted), any discounts, Bid modifications and withdrawals, the presence or absence of Bid security, and such other details as the Employer may consider appropriate, will be announced by the Employer at the opening. No bid shall be rejected at bid opening except for the late bids pursuant to Clause 21. Bids [and modifications] sent pursuant to Clause 22 that are not opened and read out at bid opening will not be considered for further evaluation regardless of the circumstances. Late and withdrawn bids will be returned un-opened to bidders.

23.4 The Employer shall prepare minutes of the Bid opening, including the information disclosed to

those present in accordance with Sub-Clause 23.3. 24. Process to Be Confidential 24.1 Information relating to the examination, clarification, evaluation, and comparison of Bids and

recommendations for the award of a contract shall not be disclosed to Bidders or any other persons not officially concerned with such process until the award to the successful Bidder has been announced. Any effort by a Bidder to influence the Employer's processing of Bids or award decisions may result in the rejection of his Bid.

25. Clarification of Bids 25.1 To assist in the examination, evaluation, and comparison of Bids, the Employer may, at his

discretion, ask any Bidder for clarification of his Bid, including breakdowns of the unit rates. The request for clarification and the response shall be in writing or by cable, but no change in the price or substance of the Bid shall be sought, offered, or permitted except as required to confirm the correction of arithmetic errors discovered by the Employer in the evaluation of the Bids in accordance with Clause 27.

25.2 Subject to sub-clause 25.1, no Bidder shall contact the Employer on any matter relating to its bid

from the time of the bid opening to the time the contract is awarded. If the Bidder wishes to bring additional information to the notice of the Employer, it should do so in writing.

25.3 Any effort by the Bidder to influence the Employer in the Employer's bid evaluation, bid

comparison or contract award decisions may result in the rejection of the Bidders’ bid. 26. Examination of Bids and Determination of Responsiveness 26.1 Prior to the detailed evaluation of Bids, the Employer will determine whether each Bid (a) meets

the eligibility criteria defined in Clause 3; (b) has been properly signed; (c) is accompanied by the required securities and; (d) is substantially responsive to the requirements of the Bidding documents.

26.2 A substantially responsive Bid is one which conforms to all the terms, conditions, and specifications of the Bidding documents, without material deviation or reservation. A material deviation or reservation is one (a) which affects in any substantial way the scope, quality, or performance of the Works; (b) which limits in any substantial way, inconsistent with the Bidding documents, the Employer's rights or the Bidder's obligations under the Contract; or (c) whose rectification would affect unfairly the competitive position of other Bidders presenting substantially responsive Bids.



Tirunelveli

16

26.3 If a Bid is not substantially responsive, it will be rejected by the Employer, and may not subsequently be made responsive by correction or withdrawal of the non-conforming deviation or reservation.

27. Correction of Errors 27.1 Bids determined to be substantially responsive will be checked by the Employer for any arithmetic

errors. Errors will be corrected by the Employer as follows: (a) where there is a discrepancy between the rates in figures and in words, the rate in words

will govern; and (b) where there is a discrepancy between the unit and the line item total resulting from

multiplying the unit rate by the quantity, the unit rate as quoted will govern. 27.2 The amount stated in the Bid will be adjusted by the Employer in accordance with the above

procedure for the correction of errors and, with the concurrence of the Bidder, shall be considered as binding upon the Bidder. If the Bidder does not accept the corrected amount the Bid will be rejected, and the Bid security may be forfeited in accordance with Sub-Clause 16.6 (b).

28. Deleted 29. Evaluation and Comparison of Bids 29.1 The Employer will evaluate and compare only the Bids determined to be substantially responsive

in accordance with Clause 26. 29.2 In evaluating the Bids, the Employer will determine for each Bid the evaluated Bid Price by

adjusting the Bid Price as follows: (a) making any correction for errors pursuant to Clause 27; or (b) making an appropriate adjustments for any other acceptable variations, deviations; and (c) making appropriate adjustments to reflect discounts or other price modifications offered in

accordance with Sub Clause 22.5. 29.3 The Employer reserves the right to accept or reject any variation, deviation, or alternative offer.

Variations, deviations, and alternative offers and other factors which are in excess of the requirements of the Bidding documents or otherwise result in unsolicited benefits for the Employer shall not be taken into account in Bid evaluation.

29.4 The estimated effect of the price adjustment conditions under Clause 47 of the Conditions of Contract, during the period of implementation of the Contract, will not be taken into account in Bid evaluation.

29.5 If the Bid of the successful Bidder is seriously unbalanced in relation to the Engineer's estimate of

the cost of work to be performed under the contract, the Employer may require the Bidder to produce detailed price analyses for any or all items of the Bill of Quantities, to demonstrate the internal consistency of those prices with the construction methods and schedule proposed. After evaluation of the price analyses, the Employer may require that the amount of the performance security set forth in Clause 34 be increased at the expense of the successful Bidder to a level sufficient to protect the Employer against financial loss in the event of default of the successful Bidder under the Contract.

30. Deleted



Tirunelveli

17

F. Award of Contract 31. Award Criteria 31.1 Subject to Clause 32, the Employer will award the Contract to the Bidder whose Bid has been

determined to be substantially responsive to the Bidding documents and who has offered the lowest evaluated Bid Price, provided that such Bidder has been determined to be (a) eligible in accordance with the provisions of Clause 3, and (b) qualified in accordance with the provisions of Clause 4.

31.2 If, pursuant to Clause 12.2 this contract is being let along with other contracts, the lowest

evaluated Bid Price will be determined when evaluating this contract in conjunction with other contracts to be awarded concurrently, taking into account any discounts offered by the bidders for the award of more than one contract.

32. Employer's Right to Accept any Bid and to Reject any or all Bids 32.1 Notwithstanding Clause 31, the Employer reserves the right to accept or reject any Bid, and to

cancel the Bidding process and reject all Bids, at any time prior to the award of Contract, without thereby incurring any liability to the affected Bidder or Bidders or any obligation to inform the affected Bidder or Bidders of the grounds for the Employer's action.

33. Notification of Award and Signing of Agreement 33.1 The Bidder whose Bid has been accepted will be notified of the award by the Employer prior to

expiration of the Bid validity period by cable, telex or facsimile confirmed by registered letter. This letter (hereinafter and in the Conditions of Contract called the "Letter of Acceptance") will state the sum that the Employer will pay the Contractor in consideration of the execution, completion, and maintenance of the Works by the Contractor as prescribed by the Contract (hereinafter and in the Contract called the "Contract Price").

33.2 The notification of award will constitute the formation of the Contract, subject only to the furnishing of

a performance security in accordance with the provisions of Clause 34. 33.3 The Agreement will incorporate all agreements between the Employer and the successful Bidder. It

will be signed by the Employer and kept ready for signature of the successful bidder in the office of employer within 28 days following the notification of award along with the Letter of Acceptance. Within 21 days of receipt, the successful Bidder will sign the Agreement and deliver it to the Employer.

33.4 Upon the furnishing by the successful Bidder of the Performance Security, the Employer will promptly

notify the other Bidders that their Bids have been unsuccessful. 34. Performance Security 34.1 Within 21 days of receipt of the Letter of Acceptance, the successful Bidder shall deliver to the

Employer a Performance Security in any of the forms given below for an amount equivalent to 5% of the Contract price plus additional security for unbalanced Bids in accordance with Clause 29.5 of ITB and Clause 52 of Conditions of Contract:

- a bank guarantee in the form given in Section 8; or - Certified cheque/Bank draft, in favour of Executive Engineer, PWD, Buildings Construction

and Maintenance division, Thoothukudi in Thoothukudi payable at Thoothukudi K.V.P, N.S.C., pledged in favour of Executive Engineer, PWD, Buildings Construction and Maintenance division,Thoothukudi in Thoothukudi District

34.2 If the performance security is provided by the successful Bidder in the form of a Bank Guarantee, it

shall be issued either (a) at the Bidder's option, by a Nationalized/Scheduled Indian bank or (b) by a foreign bank located in India and acceptable to the Employer or (c) by a foreign bank through a correspondent Bank in India [scheduled or nationalized].

34.3 Failure of the successful bidder to comply with the requirements of sub-clause 34.1 shall constitute a

breach of contract, cause for annulment of the award, forfeiture of the bid security, and any such other remedy the Employer may take under the contract, and the Employer may resort to awarding the contract to the next ranked bidder.



Tirunelveli

18

35 Advance Payment and Security 35.1 The Employer will provide an Advance Payment on the Contract Price as stipulated in the Conditions

of Contract, subject to maximum amount, as stated in the Contract Data. 36. Adjudicator 36.1 The Employer proposes that Thiru Er.S.Ramakrishnan.,B.E., MIE., Retd Superintending Engineer,

[name of proposed Adjudicator] be appointed as Adjudicator under the Contract, at a daily fee of Rs.3000.plus reimbursable expenses. If the Bidder disagrees with this proposal, the Bidder should so state in the Bid. If in the Letter of Acceptance, the Employer has not agreed on the appointment of the Adjudicator, the Adjudicator shall be appointed by Chairman, The Institution of Engineers (India) (TN State Centre), chepauk, , Chennai – 600 005. at the request of either party.

37. Corrupt or Fraudulent Practices 37.1 The Bank requires that Borrowers (including beneficiaries of Bank loans), as well as Bidders,

Suppliers and Contractors and their Sub Contractor under Bank-financed contracts, observe the highest standard of ethics during the procurement and execution of such contracts. In pursuit of this policy, the Bank:

(a) defines, for the purposes of this provision, the terms set forth below as follows:

(i) “corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting, directly or indirectly, of anything of value to influence improperly the actions of another party;

(ii) “fraudulent practice” is any act or omission, including a misrepresentation, that knowingly or recklessly misleads, or attempts to mislead, a party to obtain a financial or other benefit or to avoid an obligation;

(iii) “collusive practice” is an arrangement between two or more parties designed to achieve an improper purpose, including to influence improperly the actions of another party;

(iv) “coercive practice” is impairing or harming or threatening to impair or harm, directly or indirectly, any party or the property of the party to influence improperly the actions of a party;

(v) “obstructive practice” is

(aa) deliberately destroying, falsifying, altering or concealing of evidence material to the investigation or making false statements to investigators in order to materially impede a Bank investigation into allegations of a corrupt, fraudulent, coercive or collusive practice: and/or threatening, harassing or intimidating any party to prevent it from disclosing its knowledge of matters relevant to the investigation or from pursuing the investigation, or

(bb) acts intended to materially impede the exercise of the Bank’s inspection and audit rights provided for under sub – clause 37.1(e) below,

(b) will reject a proposal for award if it determines that the Bidder recommended for award has, directly or through an agent, engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive or coercive or obstructive practices in competing for the contract in question;

(c) will cancel the portion of the loan allocated to a contract if it determines at any time that representatives of the Borrower or of a beneficiary of the loan engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive or coercive practices during the procurement or the execution of that contract, without the Borrower having taken timely and appropriate action satisfactory to the Bank to remedy the situation;

(d) will sanction a firm or individual, including declaring them ineligible, either indefinitely or for a stated period of time, to be awarded a Bank-financed contract if it at any time determines that they have, directly or through an agent, engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, coercive or obstructive practices in competing for, or in executing, a Bank-financed contract; and



Tirunelveli

19

(e) will have the right to require that a provision be included in Bidding documents and in contracts financed by a Bank Loan, requiring Bidders, suppliers, contractors and consultants to permit the Bank to inspect their accounts and records and other documents relating to the Bid submission and contract performance and to have them audited by auditors appointed by the Bank.

37.2 Furthermore, Bidders shall be aware of the provision stated in sub-clause 23.2 and 59.2 of the Conditions of Contract.



Tirunelveli

20

SECTION 2: FORMS OF BID, QUALIFICATION INFORMATION AND LETTER OF ACCEPTANCE Table of Forms: - CONTRACTOR’S BID - QUALIFICATION INFORMATION - LETTER OF ACCEPTANCE - NOTICE TO PROCEED WITH THE WORK - AGREEMENT FORM



Tirunelveli

21

Contractor's Bid

Description of the Works: CONSTRUCTION OF MULTIPURPOSE EVACUATION SHELTER FOR

To : The Superintending Engineer, Address : Public works department,

Building Construction and Maintenance Circle, Tirunelveli. GENTLEMEN, Having examined the bidding documents including addendum, we offer to execute the Works described above in accordance with the Conditions of Contract, Specifications, Drawings and Bill of Quantities accompanying this Bid for the Contract Price of _________ [in figures] (__________________________________________________) [in letters].

1

The advance Payment required is: Rupees ________________. We accept the appointment of ________________________ as the Adjudicator. (OR) We do not accept the appointment of ___________________ as the Adjudicator and propose instead that _______________________ be appointed as Adjudicator whose daily fees and biographical data are attached. This Bid and your written acceptance of it shall constitute a binding contract between us. We understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest or any Bid you receive. We hereby certify that we have taken steps to ensure that no person acting for us or on our behalf will engage in bribery. We also undertake that, in competing for (and, if the award is made to us, in executing) the above contract, we will strictly observe the laws against fraud and corruption in force in India namely “Prevention of Corruption Act 1988”. Commissions or gratuities, if any, paid or to be paid by us to agents relating to this Bid, and to contract execution if we are awarded the contract, are listed below : Name and address of agent Amount Purpose of Commission or gratuity ______________________ ________ ____________________________ ______________________ ________ ____________________________ ______________________ ________ ____________________________ (if none, state “none”)

3 To be filled in by the Bidder, together with his particulars and date of submission at the bottom of the Form of Bid. .



Tirunelveli

22

Qualification Information The information to be filled in by the Bidder in the following pages will be used for purposes of post-qualification as provided for in Clause 4 of the Instructions to Bidders. This information will not be incorporated in the Contract. 1. For Individual Bidders 1.1 Constitution or legal status of Bidder [Attach copy] Place of registration: _______________________________ Principal place of business: _______________________________ Power of attorney of signatory of Bid [Attach] 1.2 Total value of Civil Engineering construction work executed and payments received in the last five years2006-2007___________________

2007-2008 _____________________β (in Rs. Million)

2008-2009 _____________________β (in Rs. Million)

2009-2010 _____________________β (in Rs. Million)

2010-2011 _____________________β (in Rs. Million) 1.3.1 Work performed as prime contractor (in the same name) on works of a similar nature over the

last five years. ** __________________________________________________________________________________ Project Name

Name of the Employer*

Descrip-tion of work

Contract No.

Value of contract (Rs. Million)

Date of issue of work order

Stipulated period of completion

Actual date of completion*

Remarks explaining reasons for delay and work completed

___________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ 1.3.2 Quantities of work executed as prime contractor (in the same name and style) in the last five

years: **

Quantity of work performed.

Year

Nam

e o

f

work

Nam

e o

f

em

plo

ye

r

Brickw

ork

.

Ste

el

fabri

ca

tion

.

Cente

rin

g.

RC

C

Rem

ark

s

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2006-2007 2007-2008 2008-2009 2009-2010 2010-2011

*Attach certificate(s) from the Engineer(s)-in-Charge @The item of work for which data is requested should tally with that specified in ITB clause 4.5A(c). ** immediately preceding the financial year in which bids are received.

β Attach certificate from Chartered Accountant. 1.4 Information on Bid Capacity (works for which bids have been submitted and works which are yet to

be completed) as on the date of this bid. (A) Existing commitments and on-going works:



Tirunelveli

23

___________________________________________________________________________________ Description Place Contract No. Name Value of Stipulated Value of works* Anticipated of and and Date and Contract period of remaining to be date of Work State Address (Rs. million) completion completed completion of Employer (Rs. million) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) ___________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ (B) Works for which bids already submitted: ___________________________________________________________________________________ Description Place Name and Estimated Stipulated Date when Remarks of and Address of value of works period of decision is if any Work State Employer (Rs. million) completion expected (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

* Attach certificate(s) from the Engineer(s)-in-Charge. 1.5 The following items of Contractor's Equipment are essential for carrying out the Works. The Bidder

should list all the information requested below. Refer also to Sub Clause 4.3 (d) of the Instructions to Bidders.

Item of equipment Requirement Availability proposal Remarks (From whom to be purchased)

No./Capacity Owned/leased/to be procured

No./ Capacity

Age./ Condition.

Concrete mixer with capacity 0.28 / 0.20 cum with hydraulic hopper, motor driven

2 No.

Vibrator with 40mm needle with petrol/kerosene start with 6m hose

2 No.

Pump for dewatering with 5 HP or suitable capacity

2 Nos

. 1.6 Qualifications and experience of key personnel proposed for administration and execution of the

Contract. Attach biographical data. Refer also to Sub Clause 4.3 (e) and 4.5 (B) (b) of instructions to Bidders and Sub Clause 9.1 of the Conditions of Contract.

______________________________________________________________________________ Years of Years of experience in Position Name Qualifications experience the proposed (general) Position Project Manager Site Engineer (Civil) Site Engineer (Elect) ______________________________________________________________________________ 1.7 Proposed subcontracts and firms involved. [Refer ITB Clause 4.3 (j)] ______________________________________________________________________________ Sections Value of Sub-contractor Experience in of the works Sub-contract (name and address) similar work ______________________________________________________________________________ 1.8 Financial reports for the last five years: balance sheets, profit and loss statements, auditors' reports

(in case of companies/corporation), etc. List them below and attach copies.



Tirunelveli

24

1.9 Evidence of access to financial resources to meet the qualification requirements: cash in hand, lines of credit, etc. List them below and attach copies of support documents [sample format attached].

1.10. Name, address, and telephone, telex, and fax numbers of the Bidders' bankers who may provide

references if contacted by the Employer. 1.11 Information on litigation history in which the Bidder is involved. ______________________________________________________________________________ Other party(ies) Employer Cause of dispute Amount involved Remarks showing Present status ______________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ 1.12 Statement of compliance under the requirements of Sub Clause 3.2 of the instructions to Bidders. ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ 1.13 Proposed work method and schedule. The Bidder should attach descriptions, drawings and charts as

necessary to comply with the requirements of the Bidding documents. [Refer ITB Clause 4.1 and 4.3 (k)].

2. Joint Ventures - Deleted 3. Additional Requirements 3.1 Bidders should provide any additional information required to fulfill the requirements of Clause 4 of

the Instructions to the Bidders, if applicable.



Tirunelveli

25

___________________________________________________________________________________

SAMPLE FORMAT FOR EVIDENCE OF ACCESS TO OR AVAILABILITY OF CREDIT FACILITIES –* CLAUSE 4.5 [B] [c] OF ITB

BANK CERTIFICATE

This is to certify that M/s. …………………………… is a reputed company with a good financial standing. If the contract for the work, namely …………………………………………………………. [funded by the World Bank] is awarded to the above firm, we shall be able to provide overdraft/credit facilities to the extent of Rs. …………… to meet their working capital requirements for executing the above contract. __ Sd. __

Name of Bank

Senior Bank Manager

Address of the Bank

___________________________________________________________________________________



Tirunelveli

26

Form ………. Tamilnadu Employment and Training Department

(Declaration regarding customs/excise duty exemption for materials/

construction equipment bought for the work) (Bidder’s Name and Address) From To: The Superintending Engineer, Public works Department., Construction and Maintenance Circle, Tirunelveli -2.. Dear Sir:

Re: [Name of Work] ………………………… - Certificate for Import/Procurement of Goods/Construction Equipment

1. We confirm that we are solely responsible for obtaining customs/excise duty waivers which we have

considered in our bid and in case of failure to receive such waivers for reasons whatsoever, the Employer will not compensate us.

2. We are furnishing below the information required by the Employer for issue of the necessary

certificates in terms of the Government of India Central Excise Notification No. 108/95 and Customs Notification No. 85/99.

3. The goods/construction equipment for which certificates are required are as under:

Items Make/ Brand Name

Capacity [where applicable]

Quantity Value State whether it will be procured locally or imported [if so from which country]

Remarks regarding justification for the quantity and their usage in works

Goods

[a]

[b] Others

Construction Equipment

[a]

[b]

[c]

[d]

4. We agree that no modification to the above list is permitted after bids are opened. 5. We agree that the certificate will be issued only to the extent considered reasonable by the

Employer for the work, based on the Bill of Quantities and the construction programme and methodology as furnished by us along with the bid.

6. We confirm that the above goods will be exclusively used for the construction of the above work and

construction equipment will not be sold or otherwise disposed of in any manner for a period of five years from the date of acquisition.

Date: ___________________ (Signature) ____________________ Place: __________________ (Printed Name) _________________ (Designation) __________________ (Common Seal) ________________ This certificate will be issued within 60 days of signing of contract and no subsequent changes will be permitted.



Tirunelveli

27

Letter of Acceptance (letterhead paper of the Employer) ________________________[date] To: _________________________________________________________________________[name

and address of the Contractor] Dear Sirs, This is to notify you that your Bid dated ____________ for execution of the ________________________ ___________________________________________________________ [name of the contract and identification number, as given in the Instructions to Bidders] for the Contract Price of Rupees ——————————— ____________________________________ (_____________) [amount in words and figures], as corrected and modified in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders

1 is hereby accepted by

our Agency. We accept/do not accept that __________________________ be appointed as the Adjudicator

2.

We note that as per bid, you do not intend to subcontract any component of work. [OR] We note that as per bid, you propose to employ M/s. .......................................... as sub-contractor for executing …......................................... [Delete whichever is not applicable] You are hereby requested to furnish Performance Security, plus additional security for unbalanced bids in terms of ITB clause 29.5, in the form detailed in Para 34.1 of ITB for an amount of Rs.————— within 21 days of the receipt of this letter of acceptance valid upto 28 days from the date of expiry of Defects Liability Period i.e. up to ........... and sign the contract, failing which action as stated in Para 34.3 of ITB will be taken. We have reviewed the construction methodology submitted by you along with the bid in response to ITB Clause 4.3[k] and our comments are given in the attachment. You are requested to submit a revised Program including environmental management plan as per Clause 27 of General Conditions of Contract within 14 days of receipt of this letter. We here by confirm that this Bid complies with the Eligibility, Bid Validity and Bid Security required by the Bidding Documents. Yours faithfully, Authorized Signature Name and Title of Signatory Name of Bidder Address 1 Delete "corrected and" or "and modified" if only one of these actions applies. Delete "as corrected

and modified in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders" if corrections or modifications have not been effected.

2 To be used only if the Contractor disagrees in his Bid with the Adjudicator proposed by the Employer

in the "Instructions to Bidders."



Tirunelveli

28

Issue of Notice to proceed with the work (letterhead of the Employer) ————— (date) To —————————————— (Name and Address of the Contractor) —————————————— —————————————— Dear Sirs:

Pursuant to your furnishing the requisite security as stipulated in ITB clause 34.1 and signing of the

contract agreement for the construction of —————— @ a Bid Price of Rs.——————, you are

hereby instructed to proceed with the execution of the said works in accordance with the contract

documents.

Yours faithfully,

(Signature, name and title

of signatory authorized to sign on behalf of Employer)



Tirunelveli

29

Agreement Form

Agreement

This agreement, made the ___________________ day of ______________19_______, between the

Superintending Engineer, PWD, Buildings Construction and Maintenance circle, Chepauk, Chennai-5

[name and address of Employer]

(hereinafter called “the Employer)” of the one part and

______________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________[name and address of

contractor] (hereinafter called “the Contractor” ) of the other part.

Whereas the Employer is desirous that the Contractor execute CONSTRUCTION OF

MULTIPURPOSE EVACUATION SHELTER FOR

name and identification number of Contract] (hereinafter called “the Works”) and the Employer has accepted the Bid by the Contractor for the execution and completion of such Works and the remedying of any defects therein, at a contract price of Rs.................................................................................

NOW THIS AGREEMENT WITNESSETH as follows: 1. In this Agreement, words and expression shall have the same meanings as are respectively assigned

to them in the Conditions of Contract hereinafter referred to, and they shall be deemed to form and be read and construed as part of this Agreement.

2. In consideration of the payments to be made by the Employer to the Contractor as hereinafter

mentioned, the Contractor hereby covenants with the Employer to execute and complete the Works and remedy any defects therein in conformity in all aspects with the provisions of the Contract.

3. The Employer hereby covenants to pay the Contractor in consideration of the execution and

completion of the Works and the remedying the defects wherein the Contract Price or such other sum as may become payable under the provisions of the Contract at the times and in the manner prescribed by the Contract.

4. The following documents shall be deemed to form and be read and construed as part of this

Agreement, viz.: i) Letter of Acceptance; ii) Notice to proceed with the works; iii) Contractor’s Bid; iv) Contract Data; v) Conditions of contract (including Special Conditions of Contract); vi) Specifications; vii) Drawings; viii) Bill of Quantities; and ix) Any other document listed in the Contract Data as forming part of the contract.



Tirunelveli

30

In witness whereof the parties thereto have caused this Agreement to be executed the day and year first before written. The Common Seal of ____________________________________________________________ was hereunto affixed in the presence of: Signed, Sealed and Delivered by the said _________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________________________________ in the presence of: Binding Signature of Employer _________________________________________________ ___ Binding Signature of Contractor _____________________________________________________ We hereby confirm that this Bid complies with the Eligibility, bid Validity and Bid Security required by the Bidding documents; Yours faithfully, Authorized Signature: Name & Title of Signatory: Name of Bidder: Address:



Tirunelveli

31

SECTION 3: CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT



Tirunelveli

32

Conditions of Contract

Table of Contents

A. General Page No.

C. Quality Control Page No.

1 Definitions 33 33 Identifying Defects 40

2 Interpretation 34 34 Tests 40

3 Language and Law 35 35 Correction of Defects 40

4 Engineer's Decisions 35 36 Uncorrected Defects 40

5 Delegation 35 D. Cost Control

6 Communications 35 37 Bill of Quantities 40

7 Subcontracting 35 38 Changes in the Quantities 40

8 Other Contractors 35 39 Variations 40

9 Personnel 40 Payments for Variations 41

10 Employer’s and Contractor's Risks 36 41 Cash Flow Forecasts 41

11 Employer's Risks 36 42 Payment Certificates 41

12 Contractor’s Risks 36 43 Payments 42

13 Insurance 36 44 Compensation Events 42

14 Site Investigation Reports 37 45 Tax 43

15 Queries about the Contract Data 37 46 Currencies 43

16 Contractor to Construct the Works 37 47 Price Adjustments 43

17 The Works to Be Completed by the Intended Completion Date

37 48 Retention 44

18 Approval by the Engineer 49 Liquidated Damages 44

19 Safety 37 50 Bonus 44

20 Discoveries 37 51 Advance Payment 44

21 Possession of the Site 37 52 Securities 45

22 Access to the Site 38 53 Dayworks 45

23 Instructions 38 54 Cost of Repairs 45

24 Disputes 38 E. Finishing the Contract

25 Procedure for Disputes 38 55 Completion 45

26 Replacement of Adjudicator 38 56 Taking Over 45

B. Time Control 57 Final Account 45

27 Program 38 58 Operating and Maintenance Manuals 45

28 Extension of the Intended Completion Date

59 Termination 45

29 Acceleration 39 60 Payment upon Termination 46

30 Delays Ordered by the Engineer 39 61 Property 47

31 Management Meetings 39 62 Release from Performance 47

32 Early Warning 39 63 Suspension of World Bank Loan or Credit.

47

64 Fraud and Corruption. 47

F. Special Conditions of Contract 48

Conditions of Contract



Tirunelveli

33

A. General 1. Definitions 1.1 Terms which are defined in the Contract Data are not also defined in the Conditions of

Contract but keep their defined meanings. Capital initials are used to identify defined terms. The Adjudicator is the person appointed jointly by the Employer and the Contractor to resolve

disputes in the first instance, as provided for in Clauses 24 and 25. The name of the Adjudicator is defined in the Contract Data.

Bill of Quantities means the priced and completed Bill of Quantities forming part of the Bid. Compensation Events are those defined in Clause 44 hereunder. The Completion Date is the date of completion of the Works as certified by the Engineer in

accordance with Sub Clause 55.1. The Contract is the contract between the Employer and the Contractor to execute, complete

and maintain the Works. It consists of the documents listed in Clause 2.3 below. The Contract Data defines the documents and other information which comprise the

Contract. The Contractor is a person or corporate body whose Bid to carry out the Works has been

accepted by the Employer. The Contractor's Bid is the completed Bidding document submitted by the Contractor to the

Employer. The Contract Price is the price stated in the Letter of Acceptance and thereafter as adjusted

in accordance with the provisions of the Contract. Days are calendar days; months are calendar months. A Defect is any part of the Works not completed in accordance with the Contract. The Defects Liability Period is the period named in the Contract Data and calculated from the

Completion Date. The Employer is the party who will employ the Contractor to carry out the Works. The Engineer is the person named in the Contract Data (or any other competent person

appointed and notified to the contractor to act in replacement of the Engineer) who is responsible for supervising the execution of the works and administering the Contract.

Equipment is the Contractor's machinery and vehicles brought temporarily to the Site to

construct the Works. The Initial Contract Price is the Contract Price listed in the Employer's Letter of Acceptance. The Intended Completion Date is the date on which it is intended that the Contractor shall

complete the Works. The Intended Completion Date is specified in the Contract Data. The Intended Completion Date may be revised only by the Engineer by issuing an extension of time.

Materials are all supplies, including consumables, used by the contractor for incorporation in

the Works. Plant is any integral part of the Works which is to have a mechanical, electrical, electronic or

chemical or biological function. The Site is the area defined as such in the Contract Data. Site Investigation Reports are those which were included in the Bidding documents and are

factual interpretative reports about the surface and sub-surface conditions at the site.



Tirunelveli

34

Specification means the Specification of the Works included in the Contract and any modification or addition made or approved by the Engineer.

The Start Date is given in the Contract Data. It is the date when the Contractor shall

commence execution of the works. It does not necessarily coincide with any of the Site Possession Dates.

A Subcontractor is a person or corporate body who has a Contract with the Contractor to

carry out a part of the work in the Contract which includes work on the Site. Temporary Works are works designed, constructed, installed, and removed by the Contractor

which are needed for construction or installation of the Works. A Variation is an instruction given by the Engineer which varies the Works. The Works are what the Contract requires the Contractor to construct, install, and turn over

to the Employer, as defined in the Contract Data. 2. Interpretation 2.1 In interpreting these Conditions of Contract, singular also means plural, male also means

female or neuter, and the other way around. Headings have no significance. Words have their normal meaning under the language of the Contract unless specifically defined. The Engineer will provide instructions clarifying queries about the Conditions of Contract.

2.2 If sectional completion is specified in the Contract Data, references in the Conditions of

Contract to the Works, the Completion Date, and the Intended Completion Date apply to any Section of the Works (other than references to the Completion Date and Intended Completion date for the whole of the Works).

2.3 The documents forming the Contract shall be interpreted in the following order of priority: (1) Agreement (2) Letter of Acceptance, notice to proceed with the works (3) Contractor’s Bid (4) Contract Data (5) Conditions of Contract including Special Conditions of Contract (6) Specifications (7) Drawings (8) Bill of Quantities and (9) any other document listed in the Contract Data as forming part of the Contract. 3. Language and Law 3.1 The language of the Contract and the law governing the Contract are stated in the Contract

Data. 4. Engineer's Decisions 4.1 Except where otherwise specifically stated, the Engineer will decide contractual matters

between the Employer and the Contractor in the role representing the Employer. 5. Delegation 5.1 The Engineer may delegate any of his duties and responsibilities to other people except to

the Adjudicator after notifying the Contractor and may cancel any delegation after notifying the Contractor.



Tirunelveli

35

6. Communications 6.1 Communications between parties which are referred to in the conditions are effective only

when in writing. A notice shall be effective only when it is delivered (in terms of Indian Contract Act).

7. Subcontracting 7.1 The Contractor may subcontract with the approval of the Engineer but may not assign the

Contract without the approval of the Employer in writing. Subcontracting does not alter the Contractor's obligations.

8. Other Contractors 8.1 The Contractor shall cooperate and share the Site with other contractors, public authorities,

utilities, and the Employer between the dates given in the Schedule of Other Contractors. The Contractor shall as referred to in the Contract Data, also provide facilities and services for them as described in the Schedule. The employer may modify the schedule of other contractors and shall notify the contractor of any such modification.

9. Personnel 9.1 The Contractor shall employ the key personnel named in the Schedule of Key Personnel as

referred to in the Contract Data to carry out the functions stated in the Schedule or other personnel approved by the Engineer. The Engineer will approve any proposed replacement of key personnel only if their qualifications, abilities, and relevant experience are substantially equal to or better than those of the personnel listed in the Schedule.

9.2 If the Engineer asks the Contractor to remove a person who is a member of the Contractor’s

staff or his work force stating the reasons the Contractor shall ensure that the person leaves the Site within seven days and has no further connection with the work in the Contract.

10. Employer’s and Contractor's Risks 10.1 The Employer carries the risks which this Contract states are Employer’s risks, and the

Contractor carries the risks which this Contract states are Contractor’s risks. 11. Employer's Risks 11.1 The Employer is responsible for the excepted risks which are (a) in so far as they directly

affect the execution of the Works in the Employer’s country, the risks of war, hostilities, invasion, act of foreign enemies, rebellion, revolution, insurrection or military or usurped power, civil war, riot commotion or disorder (unless restricted to the Contractor’s employees), and contamination from any nuclear fuel or nuclear waste or radioactive toxic explosive, or (b) a cause due solely to the design of the Works, other than the Contractor’s design.

12. Contractor’s Risks 12.1 All risks of loss of or damage to physical property and of personal injury and death which

arise during and in consequence of the performance of the Contract other than the excepted risks are the responsibility of the Contractor.

13. Insurance 13.1 The Contractor shall provide, in the joint names of the Employer and the Contractor,

insurance cover from the Start Date to the end of the Defects Liability Period, in the amounts and deductibles stated in the Contract Data for the following events which are due to the Contractor’s risks:

(a) loss of or damage to the Works, Plant and Materials; (b) loss of or damage to Equipment; (c) loss of or damage of property (except the Works, Plant, Materials and Equipment) in

connection with the Contract; and (d) personal injury or death.



Tirunelveli

36

13.2 Policies and certificates for insurance shall be delivered by the Contractor to the Engineer for

the Engineer’s approval before the Start Date. All such insurance shall provide for compensation to be payable in the types and proportions of currencies required to rectify the loss or damage incurred.

13.3 If the Contractor does not provide any of the policies and certificates required, the Employer

may effect the insurance which the Contractor should have provided and recover the premiums the Employer has paid from payments otherwise due to the Contractor or, if no payment is due, the payment of the premiums shall be a debt due.

13.4 Alterations to the terms of an insurance shall not be made without the approval of the

Engineer. 13.5 Both parties shall comply with any conditions of the insurance policies. 14. Site Investigation Reports 14.1 The Contractor, in preparing the Bid, shall rely on any site Investigation Reports referred to in

the Contract Data, supplemented by any information available to the Bidder. 15. Queries about the Contract Data 15.1 The Engineer will clarify queries on the Contract Data. 16. Contractor to Construct the Works 16.1 The Contractor shall construct and install the Works in accordance with the Specification and

Drawings, and as per instructions of Engineer. 17. The Works to Be Completed by the Intended Completion Date 17.1 The Contractor may commence execution of the Works on the Start Date and shall carry out

the Works in accordance with the program submitted by the Contractor, as updated with the approval of the Engineer, and complete them by the Intended Completion Date.

18. Approval by the Engineer 18.1 The Contractor shall submit Specifications and Drawings showing the proposed Temporary

Works to the Engineer, who is to approve them if they comply with the Specifications and Drawings.

18.2 The Contractor shall be responsible for design of Temporary Works. 18.3 The Engineer's approval shall not alter the Contractor's responsibility for design of the

Temporary Works. 18.4 The Contractor shall obtain approval of third parties to the design of the Temporary Works

where required. 18.5 All Drawings prepared by the Contractor for the execution of the temporary or permanent

Works, are subject to prior approval by the Engineer before their use. 19. Safety 19.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of all activities on the Site.



Tirunelveli

37

20. Discoveries 20.1 Anything of historical or other interest or of significant value unexpectedly discovered on the

Site is the property of the Employer. The Contractor is to notify the Engineer of such discoveries and carry out the Engineer's instructions for dealing with them.

21. Possession of the Site 21.1 The Employer shall give possession of all parts of the Site to the Contractor. If possession of

a part is not given by the date stated in the Contract Data the Employer is deemed to have delayed the start of the relevant activities and this will be Compensation Event.

22. Access to the Site 22.1 The Contractor shall allow the Engineer and any person authorized by the Engineer access to

the Site, to any place where work in connection with the Contract is being carried out or is intended to be carried out and to any place where materials or plant are being manufactured / fabricated / assembled for the works.

23. Instructions 23.1 The Contractor shall carry out all instructions of the Engineer which comply with the

applicable laws where the Site is located. 23.2 The Contractor shall permit the bank to inspect the Contractor’s accounts and records

relating to the performance of the Contractor and to have them audited by auditors appointed by the Bank, if so required by the Bank.

24. Disputes 24.1 If the Contractor believes that a decision taken by the Engineer was either outside the

authority given to the Engineer by the Contract or that the decision was wrongly taken, the decision shall be referred to the Adjudicator within 14 days of the notification of the Engineer's decision.

25. Procedure for Disputes 25.1 The adjudicator should be in position before “notice to proceed with work” is issued to the

contractor and an agreement should be signed with the adjudicator jointly by Employer / Contractor in the form attached next to Section 8 s – Forms of Securities.

25.2 The Adjudicator shall give a decision in writing within 28 days of receipt of a notification of a

dispute. 25.3 The Adjudicator shall be paid daily at the rate specified in the Contract Data together with

reimbursable expenses of the types specified in the Contract Data and the cost shall be divided equally between the Employer and the Contractor, whatever decision is reached by the Adjudicator. Either party may refer a decision of the Adjudicator to an Arbitrator within 28 days of the Adjudicator's written decision. If neither party refers the dispute to arbitration within the above 28 days, the Adjudicator's decision will be final and binding.

25.4 The arbitration shall be conducted in accordance with the arbitration procedure published by

the institution named and in the place specified in the Special Conditions of Contract. The Arbitration shall give a decision in writing within 120 days of start of the

proceedings except otherwise agreed to by the Parties. The Arbitrators shall entertain only those issue which have been earlier referred to the Adjudicator and either partly is dissatisfied with the decision given by the Adjudicator.



Tirunelveli

38

26. Replacement of Adjudicator 26.1 Should the Adjudicator resign or die, or should the Employer and the Contractor agree that

the Adjudicator is not fulfilling his functions in accordance with the provisions of the Contract, a new Adjudicator will be jointly appointed by the Employer and the Contractor. In case of disagreement between the Employer and the Contractor, within 30 days, the Adjudicator shall be designated by the Appointing Authority designated in the Contract Data at the request of either party, within 14 days of receipt of such request.

B. Time Control 27. Program 27.1 Within the time stated in the Contract Data the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for

approval a Program including Environmental Management Plan showing the general methods, arrangements, order, and timing for all the activities in the Works along with monthly cash flow forecast.

27.2 An update of the Program shall be a program showing the actual progress achieved on each

activity and the effect of the progress achieved on the timing of the remaining work including any changes to the sequence of the activities.

27.3 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, for approval, an updated Program at intervals

no longer than the period stated in the Contract Data. If the Contractor does not submit an updated Program within this period, the Engineer may withhold the amount stated in the Contract Data from the next payment certificate and continue to withhold this amount until the next payment after the date on which the overdue Program has been submitted.

27.4 The Engineer's approval of the Program shall not alter the Contractor's obligations. The

Contractor may revise the Program and submit it to the Engineer again at any time. A revised Program is to show the effect of Variations and Compensation Events.

28. Extension of the Intended Completion Date 28.1 The Engineer shall extend the Intended Completion Date if a Compensation Event occurs or

a Variation is issued which makes it impossible for Completion to be achieved by the Intended Completion Date without the Contractor taking steps to accelerate the remaining work and which would cause the Contractor to incur additional cost.

28.2 The Engineer shall decide whether and by how much to extend the Intended Completion Date

within 21 days of the Contractor asking the Engineer for a decision upon the effect of a Compensation Event or Variation and submitting full supporting information. If the Contractor has failed to give early warning of a delay or has failed to cooperate in dealing with a delay, the delay by this failure shall not be considered in assessing the new Intended Completion Date.

29. Deleted 30. Delays Ordered by the Engineer 30.1 The Engineer may instruct the Contractor to delay the start or progress of any activity within the

Works. 31. Management Meetings 31.1 Either the Engineer or the Contractor may require the other to attend a management meeting

which will be held at the Engineer’s Office. The business of a management meeting shall be to review progress of construction and the plans for construction of remaining work and to deal with matters raised in accordance with the early warning procedure.

31.2 The Engineer shall record the business of management meetings and is to provide copies of his

record to those attending the meeting and to the Employer. The responsibility of the parties for actions to be taken is to be decided by the Engineer either at the management meeting or after the management meeting and stated in writing to all who attended the meeting.



Tirunelveli

39

32. Early Warning 32.1 The Contractor is to warn the Engineer at the earliest opportunity of specific likely future events or

circumstances that may adversely affect the quality of the work, increase the Contract Price or delay the execution of works. The Engineer may require the Contractor to provide an estimate of the expected effect of the future event or circumstance on the Contract Price and Completion Date. The estimate is to be provided by the Contractor as soon as reasonably possible.

32.2 The Contractor shall cooperate with the Engineer in making and considering proposals for how the effect of such an event or circumstance can be avoided or reduced by anyone involved in the work and in carrying out any resulting instruction of the Engineer.

C. Quality Control 33. Identifying Defects

33.1 The Engineer shall check the Contractor's work and notify the Contractor of any Defects that are found. Specifying a time limit by which it should be corrected. Such checking shall not affect the Contractor's responsibilities. The Engineer may instruct the Contractor to search for a Defect and to uncover and test any work that the Engineer considers may have a Defect.

33.2 The contractor shall permit the Employer’s Technical auditor to check the contractor’s work

and notify the Engineer and Contractor of any defects that are found. Such a check shall not affect the Contractor’s or the Engineer’s responsibility as defined in the Contract Agreement.

34. Tests

34.1 If the Engineer instructs the Contractor to carry out a test not specified in the Specification to check whether any work has a Defect and the test shows that it does, the Contractor shall pay for the test and any samples. If there is no Defect the test shall be a Compensation Event.

35. Correction of Defects

35.1 The Engineer shall give notice to the Contractor of any Defects Specifying a time limit by which it should be corrected, before the end of the Defects Liability Period, which begins at Completion and is defined in the Contract Data. The Defects Liability Period shall be extended for as long as Defects remain to be corrected.

35.2 Every time notice of a Defect is given, the Contractor shall correct the notified Defect within

the length of time specified by the Engineer’s notice. 36. Uncorrected Defects 36.1 If the Contractor has not corrected a Defect within the time specified in the Engineer’s notice,

the Engineer will assess the cost of having the Defect corrected, and the Contractor will pay this amount.

Note: 1. Where in certain cases, the technical specifications provide for acceptance of works within

specified tolerance limits at reduced rates, Engineer will certify payments to Contractor accordingly. 2. Where the failure to correct a particular defect within the specified time is considered as a

fundamental breach of contract, a notice should be given to the contractor as stated in GCC 59.2 (2) D. Cost Control 37. Bill of Quantities 37.1 The Bill of Quantities shall contain items for the construction, installation, testing, and

commissioning work to be done by the contractor.

37.2 The Bill of Quantities is used to calculate the Contract Price. The Contractor is paid for the quantity of the work done at the rate in the Bill of Quantities for each item.



Tirunelveli

40

38. Changes in the Quantities 38.1 If the final quantity of the work done differs from the quantity in the Bill of Quantities for the

particular item by more than 25 percent, provided the change exceeds 1% of Initial Contract Price, the Engineer shall adjust the rate to allow for the change.

38.2 The Engineer shall not adjust rates from changes in quantities if thereby the Initial Contract Price is exceeded by more than 15 percent, except with the Prior approval of the Employer.

38.3 If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a detailed cost breakdown of any rate in the Bill of Quantities.

39. Variations 39.1 All Variations shall be included in updated Programs produced by the Contractor. 40. Payments for Variations 40.1 The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a quotation (with breakdown of unit rates) for

carrying out the Variation when requested to do so by the Engineer. The Engineer shall assess the quotation, which shall be given within seven days of the request or within any longer period stated by the Engineer and before the Variation is ordered.

40.2 If the work in the Variation corresponds with an item description in the Bill of Quantities and if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the quantity of work above the limit stated in Sub Clause 38.1 or the timing of its execution do not cause the cost per unit of quantity to change, the rate in the bill of Quantities shall be used to calculate the value of the Variation. If the cost per unit of quantity changes, or if the nature or timing of the work in the Variation does not correspond with items in the Bill of Quantities, the quotation by the Contractor shall be in form of new rates for the relevant items of work.

40.3 If the Contractor's quotation is unreasonable (or if the contractor fails to provide the Engineer with a quotation within a reasonable time specified by the engineer in accordance with Clause 40.1), the Engineer may order the Variation and make a change to the Contract Price which shall be based on Engineer’s own forecast of the effects of the Variation on the Contractor's costs.

40.4 If the Engineer decides that the urgency of varying the work would prevent a quotation being given and considered without delaying the work, no quotation shall be given and the Variation shall be treated as a Compensation Event.

40.5 The Contractor shall not be entitled to additional payment for costs that could have been avoided by giving early warning.

41. Cash flow forecasts 41.1 When the Program is updated, the contractor is to provide the Engineer with an updated

cash flow forecast. 42. Payment Certificates 42.1 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer monthly statements of the estimated value of the

work completed less the cumulative amount certified previously alongwith details of measurement of the quantity of works executed in a tabulated form as approved by the Engineer.

42.2 The Engineer shall check the details given in the Contractor's monthly statement and within

14 days certify the amounts to be paid to the Contractor after taking into account any credit or debit for the month in question in respect of materials for the works in the relevant amounts and under conditions set forth in sub-clause 51(3) of the Contract Data (Secured Advance).

42.3 The value of work executed shall be determined by the Engineer after due check

measurement of the quantities claimed as executed by the contractor. 42.4 The value of work executed shall comprise the value of the quantities of the items in the Bill

of Quantities completed..



Tirunelveli

41

42.5 The value of work executed shall include the valuation of Variations and Compensation Events.

42.6 The Engineer may exclude any item certified in a previous certificate or reduce the proportion

of any item previously certified in any certificate in the light of later information. 43. Payments 43.1 Payments shall be adjusted for deductions for advance payments, retention, other recoveries

in terms of the contract and taxes, at source, as applicable under the law. The Employer shall pay the Contractor the amounts certified by the Engineer within 28 days of the date of each certificate. If the Employer makes a late payment, the Contractor shall be paid interest on the late payment in the next payment. Interest shall be calculated from the date by which the payment should have been made up to the date when the late payment is made at 8% per annum.

43.2 If an amount certified is increased in a later certificate or as a result of an award by the

Adjudicator or an Arbitrator, the Contractor shall be paid interest upon the delayed payment as set out in this clause. Interest shall be calculated from the date upon which the increased amount would have been certified in the absence of dispute.

43.3 Items of the Works for which no rate or price has been entered in will not be paid for by the

Employer and shall be deemed covered by other rates and prices in the Contract. 44. Compensation Events 44.1 The following are Compensation Events unless they are caused by the Contractor: (a) The Employer does not give access to a part of the Site by the Site Possession Date

stated in the Contract Data. (b) The Employer modifies the schedule of other contractors in a way which affects the

work of the contractor under the contract. (c) The Engineer orders a delay or does not issue drawings, specifications or instructions

required for execution of works on time. (d) The Engineer instructs the Contractor to uncover or to carry out additional tests upon

work which is then found to have no Defects. (e) The Engineer unreasonably does not approve for a subcontract to be let. (f) Ground conditions are substantially more adverse than could reasonably have been

assumed before issuance of Letter of Acceptance from the information issued to Bidders (including the Site Investigation Reports), from information available publicly and from a visual inspection of the Site.

(g) The Engineer gives an instruction for dealing with an unforeseen condition, caused by

the Employer, or additional work required for safety or other reasons. (h) Other contractors, public authorities, utilities or the Employer does not work within the

dates and other constraints stated in the Contract, and they cause delay or extra cost to the Contractor.

(i) The advance payment is delayed. (j) The effect on the Contractor of any of the Employer’s Risks. (k) The Engineer unreasonably delays issuing a Certificate of Completion. (l) Other Compensation Events listed in the Contract Data or mentioned in the Contract. 44.2 If a Compensation Event would cause additional cost or would prevent the work being

completed before the Intended Completion Date, the Contract Price shall be increased and/or the Intended Completion Date is extended. The Engineer shall decide whether and by how much the Contract Price shall be increased and whether and by how much the Intended Completion Date shall be extended.

44.3 As soon as information demonstrating the effect of each Compensation Event upon the

Contractor's forecast cost has been provided by the Contractor, it is to be assessed by the



Tirunelveli

42

Engineer and the Contract Price shall be adjusted accordingly. If the Contractor's forecast is deemed unreasonable, the Engineer shall adjust the Contract Price based on Engineer’s own forecast. The Engineer will assume that the Contractor will react competently and promptly to the event.

44.4 The Contractor shall not be entitled to compensation to the extent that the Employer's

interests are adversely affected by the Contractor not having given early warning or not having cooperated with the Engineer.

45. Tax 45.1 The rates quoted by the Contractor shall be deemed to be inclusive of the sales and other

taxes that the Contractor will have to pay for the performance of this Contract. The Employer will perform such duties in regard to the deduction of such taxes at source as per applicable law.

46. Currencies 46.1 All payments shall be made in Indian Rupees. 47. Price Adjustment 47.1 Contract price shall be adjusted for increase or decrease in rates and price of labour,

materials, fuels and lubricants in accordance with the following principles and procedures and as per formula given in the contract data:

(a) The price adjustment shall apply for the work done from the start date given in the

contract data up to end of the initial intended completion date or extensions granted by the Engineer and shall not apply to the work carried out beyond the stipulated time for reasons attributable to the contractor.

(b) The price adjustment shall be determined during each quarter from the formula given

in the contract data. (c) Following expressions and meanings are assigned to the work done during each

quarter: R = Total value of work done during the quarter. It would include the amount of

secured advance for materials paid for (if any) during the quarter, less the amount of the secured advance recovered, during the quarter. It will exclude value for works executed under variations for which price adjustment will be worked separately based on the terms mutually agreed.

47.2 To the extent that full compensation for any rise or fall in costs to the contractor is not

covered by the provisions of this or other clauses in the contract, the unit rates and prices included in the contract shall be deemed to include amounts to cover the contingency of such other rise or fall in costs.

48. Retention 48.1 The Employer shall retain from each payment due to the Contractor the proportion stated in

the Contract Data until Completion of the whole of the Works. 48.2 On Completion of the whole of the Works half the total amount retained is repaid to the

Contractor and half when the Defects Liability Period has passed and the Engineer has certified that all Defects notified by the Engineer to the Contractor before the end of this period have been corrected.

48.3 On completion of the whole works, the contractor may substitute retention money (balance

half) with an “on demand” Bank guarantee.



Tirunelveli

43

49. Liquidated Damages 49.1 The Contractor shall pay liquidated damages to the Employer at the rate per day stated in the

Contract Data for each day that the Completion Date is later than the Intended Completion Date (for the whole of the works or the milestone as stated in the contract data). The total amount of liquidated damages shall not exceed the amount defined in the Contract Data. The Employer may deduct liquidated damages from payments due to the Contractor. Payment of liquidated damages does not affect the Contractor's liabilities.

49.2 If the Intended Completion Date is extended after liquidated damages have been paid, the

Engineer shall correct any overpayment of liquidated damages by the Contractor by adjusting the next payment certificate. The Contractor shall be paid interest on the over payment calculated from the date of payment to the date of repayment at the rates specified in Sub Clause 43.1.

50. Deleted 51. Advance Payment 51.1 The Employer shall make advance payment to the Contractor of the amounts stated in the

Contract Data by the date stated in the Contract Data, against provision by the Contractor of an Unconditional Bank Guarantee in a form and by a bank acceptable to the Employer in amounts and currencies equal to the advance payment. The guarantee shall remain effective until the advance payment has been repaid, but the amount of the guarantee shall be progressively reduced by the amounts repaid by the Contractor. Interest will not be charged on the advance payment.

51.2 The Contractor is to use the advance payment only to pay for Equipment, Plant and

Mobilization expenses required specifically for execution of the Works. The Contractor shall demonstrate that advance payment has been used in this way by supplying copies of invoices or other documents to the Engineer.

51.3 The advance payment shall be repaid by deducting proportionate amounts from payments

otherwise due to the Contractor, following the schedule of completed percentages of the Works on a payment basis. No account shall be taken of the advance (mobilization and equipment only) payment or its repayment in assessing valuations of work done, Variations, price adjustments, Compensation Events, or Liquidated Damages.

51.4 Secured Advance: The Engineer shall make advance payment in respect of materials intended for but not yet

incorporated in the Works in accordance with conditions stipulated in the Contract Data. 52. Securities 52.1 The Performance Security shall be provided to the Employer no later than the date specified in the

Letter of Acceptance and shall be issued in an amount and form and by a bank or surety acceptable to the Employer, and denominated in Indian Rupees. The Performance Security shall be valid until a date 28 days from the date of expiry of Defects Liability Period and the additional security for unbalanced bids shall be valid until a date 28 days from the date of issue of the certificate of completion.

53. Deleted 54. Cost of Repairs 54.1 Loss or damage to the Works or Materials to be incorporated in the Works between the Start Date

and the end of the Defects Correction periods shall be remedied by the Contractor at the Contractor's cost if the loss or damage arises from the Contractor's acts or omissions.



Tirunelveli

44

E. Finishing the Contract 55. Completion 55.1 The Contractor shall request the Engineer to issue a Certificate of Completion of the Works

and the Engineer will do so upon deciding that the Work is completed. 56. Taking Over 56.1 The Employer shall take over the Site and the Works within seven days of the Engineer

issuing a certificate of Completion. 57. Final Account 57.1 The Contractor shall supply to the Engineer a detailed account of the total amount that the

Contractor considers payable under the Contract before the end of the Defects Liability Period. The Engineer shall issue a Defect Liability Certificate and certify any final payment that is due to the Contractor within 56 days of receiving the Contractor's account if it is correct and complete. If it is not, the Engineer shall issue within 56 days a schedule that states the scope of the corrections or additions that are necessary. If the Final Account is still unsatisfactory after it has been resubmitted, the Engineer shall decide on the amount payable to the Contractor and issue a payment certificate, within 56 days of receiving the Contractor’s revised account.

58. Operating and Maintenance Manuals 58.1 If “as built” Drawings and/or operating and maintenance manuals are required, the Contractor

shall supply them by the dates stated in the Contract Data. 58.2 If the Contractor does not supply the Drawings and/or manuals by the dates stated in the

Contract Data, or they do not receive the Engineer’s approval, the Engineer shall withhold the amount stated in the Contract Data from payments due to the Contractor.

59. Termination 59.1 The Employer or the Contractor may terminate the Contract if the other party causes a

fundamental breach of the Contract. 59.2 Fundamental breaches of Contract include, but shall not be limited to the following: (a) the Contractor stops work for 28 days when no stoppage of work is shown on the

current program and the stoppage has not been authorized by the Engineer; (b) the Engineer instructs the Contractor to delay the progress of the Works and the

instruction is not withdrawn within 28 days; (c) the Employer or the Contractor is made bankrupt or goes into liquidation other than for

a reconstruction or amalgamation; (d) a payment certified by the Engineer is not paid by the Employer to the Contractor within

56 days of the date of the Engineer's certificate; (e) the Engineer gives Notice that failure to correct a particular Defect is a fundamental

breach of Contract and the Contractor fails to correct it within a reasonable period of time determined by the Engineer;

(f) the Contractor does not maintain a security which is required; (g) the Contractor has delayed the completion of works by the number of days for which

the maximum amount of liquidated damages can be paid as defined in the Contract data; and

(h) if the Contractor, in the judgment of the Employer has engaged in fraud and corruption,

as defined in GCC Clause 64, in competing for or in executing the Contract.



Tirunelveli

45

59.3 When either party to the Contract gives notice of a breach of contract to the Engineer for a cause other than those listed under Sub Clause 59.2 above, the Engineer shall decide whether the breach is fundamental or not.

59.4 Notwithstanding the above, the Employer may terminate the Contract for convenience. 59.5 If the Contract is terminated the Contractor shall stop work immediately, make the Site safe

and secure and leave the Site as soon as reasonably possible. 60. Payment upon Termination 60.1 If the Contract is terminated because of a fundamental breach of Contract by the Contractor,

the Engineer shall issue a certificate for the value of the work done less advance payments received up to the date of the issue of the certificate, less other recoveries due in terms of the contract, less taxes due

to be deducted at source as per applicable law and less the percentage to apply to the work

not completed as indicated in the Contract Data. Additional Liquidated Damages shall not apply . If the total amount due to the Employer exceeds any payment due to the Contractor the difference shall be a debt payable to the Employer.

60.2 If the Contract is terminated at the Employer's convenience or because of a fundamental

breach of Contract by the Employer, the Engineer shall issue a certificate for the value of the work done, the reasonable cost of removal of Equipment, repatriation of the Contractor's personnel employed solely on the Works, and the Contractor's costs of protecting and securing the Works and less advance payments received up to the date of the certificate, less other recoveries due in terms of the contract and less taxes due to be deducted at source as per applicable law.

61. Property 61.1 All materials on the Site, Plant, Equipment, Temporary Works and Works are deemed to be

the property of the Employer, if the Contract is terminated because of a Contractor’s default. 62. Release from Performance 62.1 If the Contract is frustrated by the outbreak of war or by any other event entirely outside the

control of either the Employer or the Contractor the Engineer shall certify that the Contract has been frustrated. The Contractor shall make the Site safe and stop work as quickly as possible after receiving this certificate and shall be paid for all work carried out before receiving it and for any work carried out afterwards to which commitment was made.

63. Suspension of World Bank Loan or Credit 63.1 In the event that the World Bank suspends the Loan or Credit to the Employer, from which

part of the payments to the Contractor are being made: (a) The Employer is obligated to notify the Contractor of such suspension within 7 days of

having received the World Bank’s suspension notice. (b) If the Contractor has not received sums due to it upon the expiration of the 28 days for

payment provided for in Sub-Clause 43.1, the Contractor may immediately issue a 14-day termination notice.



Tirunelveli

46

64. Corrupt or Fraudulent Practices

64.1 The Bank requires that Borrowers (including beneficiaries of Bank loans), as well as bidders, suppliers and contractors and their subcontractors under Bank-financed contracts, observe the highest standard of ethics during the procurement and execution of such contracts. In pursuance of this policy, the Bank:

(a) defines, for the purposes of this provision, the terms set forth below as follows:

(i) “corrupt practice” is the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting, directly or indirectly, of anything of value to influence improperly the actions of another party;

(ii) “fraudulent practice” is any at or omission, including a misrepresentation that knowingly or recklessly misleads, or attempts to mislead, a party to obtain a financial or other benefit or to avoid an obligation;

(iii) “collusive practice” is an arrangement between two or more parties designed to achieve an improper purpose, including to influence improperly the actions of another party;

(iv) “coercive practice” is impairing or harming or threatening to impair or harm, directly or indirectly, any party or the property of the party to influence improperly the actions of a party;

(v) “obstructive practice” is

(aa) deliberately destroying, falsifying, altering or concealing of evidence material to the investigation or making false statements to investigators in order to materially impede a Bank investigation into allegations of a corrupt, fraudulent, coercive or collusive practice: and/or threatening, harassing or intimidating any party to prevent it from disclosing its knowledge of matters relevant to the investigation or from pursuing the investigation, or

(cc) acts intended to materially impede the exercise of the Bank’s inspection and audit rights provided for under sub – clause 37.1(e) below,

(b) will reject a proposal for award if it determines that the Bidder recommended for award has, directly or through an agent, engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive or coercive or obstructive practices in competing for the contract in question;

(c) will cancel the portion of the loan allocated to a contract if it determines at any time that representatives of the Borrower or of a beneficiary of the loan engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive or coercive practices during the procurement or the execution of that contract, without the Borrower having taken timely and appropriate action satisfactory to the Bank to remedy the situation;

(d) will sanction a firm or individual, including declaring them ineligible, either indefinitely or for a stated period of time, to be awarded a Bank-financed contract if it at any time determines that they have, directly or through an agent, engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, coercive or obstructive practices in competing for, or in executing, a Bank-financed contract; and

(e) will have the right to require that a provision be included in Bidding documents and in contracts financed by a Bank Loan, requiring Bidders, suppliers, contractors and consultants to permit the Bank to inspect their accounts and records and other documents relating to the Bid submission and contract performance and to have them audited by auditors appointed by the Bank.



Tirunelveli

47

F. Special Conditions of Contract 1. LABOUR : The Contractor shall, unless otherwise provided in the Contract, make his own arrangements for the

engagement of all staff and labour, local or other, and for their payment, housing, feeding and transport.

The Contractor shall, if required by the Engineer, deliver to the Engineer a return in detail, in such form and at such intervals as the Engineer may prescribe, showing the staff and the numbers of the several classes of labour from time to time employed by the Contractor on the Site and such other information as the Engineer may require.

2. COMPLIANCE WITH LABOUR REGULATIONS : During continuance of the contract, the Contractor and his sub contractors shall abide at all times by

all existing labour enactments and rules made thereunder, regulations, notifications and bye laws of the State or Central Government or local authority and any other labour law (including rules), regulations, bye laws that may be passed or notification that may be issued under any labour law in future either by the State or the Central Government or the local authority. Salient features of some of the major labour laws that are applicable to construction industry are given below. The Contractor shall keep the Employer indemnified in case any action is taken against the Employer by the competent authority on account of contravention of any of the provisions of any Act or rules made thereunder, regulations or notifications including amendments. If the Employer is caused to pay or reimburse, such amounts as may be necessary to cause or observe, or for non-observance of the provisions stipulated in the notifications/bye laws/Acts/Rules/regulations including amendments, if any, on the part of the Contractor, the Engineer/Employer shall have the right to deduct any money due to the Contractor including his amount of performance security. The Employer/Engineer shall also have right to recover from the Contractor any sum required or estimated to be required for making good the loss or damage suffered by the Employer.

The employees of the Contractor and the Sub-Contractor in no case shall be treated as the

employees of the Employer at any point of time.

SALIENT FEATURES OF SOME MAJOR LABOUR LAWS APPLICABLE TO ESTABLISHMENTS ENGAGED IN BUILDING AND OTHER CONSTRUCTION WORK

(The law as current on the date of bid opening will apply) a) Workmen Compensation Act 1923: The Act provides for compensation in case of injury by accident

arising out of and during the course of employment. b) Payment of Gratuity Act 1972: Gratuity is payable to an employee under the Act on satisfaction of

certain conditions on separation if an employee has completed 5 years service or more or on death the rate of 15 days wages for every completed year of service. The Act is applicable to all establishments employing 10 or more employees.

c) Employees P.F. and Miscellaneous Provision Act 1952 (since amended): The Act Provides for

monthly contributions by the employer plus workers @ 10% or 8.33%. The benefits payable under the Act are :

(i) Pension or family pension on retirement or death, as the case may be. (ii) Deposit linked insurance on the death in harness of the worker. (iii) payment of P.F. accumulation on retirement/death etc. d) Maternity Benefit Act 1951: The Act provides for leave and some other benefits to women

employees in case of confinement or miscarriage etc. e) Contract Labour (Regulation and Abolition) Act 1970: The Act provides for certain welfare

measures to be provided by the Contractor to contract labour and in case the Contractor fails to provide, the same are required to be provided, by the Principal Employer by Law. The Principal Employer is required to take Certificate of Registration and the Contractor is required to take license from the designated Officer. The Act is applicable to the establishments or Contractor of Principal Employer if they employ 20 or more contract labour.



Tirunelveli

48

f) Minimum Wages Act 1948: The Employer is supposed to pay not less than the Minimum Wages

fixed by appropriate Government as per provisions of the Act if the employment is a scheduled employment. Construction of Buildings, Roads, Runways are scheduled employments.

g) Payment of Wages Act 1936: It lays down as to by what date the wages are to be paid, when it will be paid and what deductions can be made from the wages of the workers.

h) Equal Remuneration Act 1979: The Act provides for payment of equal wages for work of equal

nature to Male and Female workers and for not making discrimination against Female employees in the matters of transfers, training and promotions etc.

i) Payment of Bonus Act 1965: The Act is applicable to all establishments employing 20 or more

employees. The Act provides for payments of annual bonus subject to a minimum of 8.33% of wages and maximum of 20% of wages to employees drawing Rs.3500/-per month or less. The bonus to be paid to employees getting Rs.2500/- per month or above up to Rs.3500/- per month shall be worked out by taking wages as Rs.2500/-per month only. The Act does not apply to certain establishments. The newly set-up establishments are exempted for five years in certain circumstances. Some of the State Governments have reduced the employment size from 20 to 10 for the purpose of applicability of this Act.

j) Industrial Disputes Act 1947: The Act lays down the machinery and procedure for resolution of

Industrial disputes, in what situations a strike or lock-out becomes illegal and what are the requirements for laying off or retrenching the employees or closing down the establishment.

k) Industrial Employment (Standing Orders) Act 1946: It is applicable to all establishments employing

100 or more workmen (employment size reduced by some of the States and Central Government to 50). The Act provides for laying down rules governing the conditions of employment by the Employer on matters provided in the Act and get the same certified by the designated Authority.

l) Trade Unions Act 1926: The Act lays down the procedure for registration of trade unions of workmen and employers. The Trade Unions registered under the Act have been given certain immunities from civil and criminal liabilities.

m) Child Labour (Prohibition and Regulation) Act 1986: The Act prohibits employment of children below 14 years of age in certain occupations and processes and provides for regulation of employment of children in all other occupations and processes. Employment of Child Labour is prohibited in Building and Construction Industry.

n) Inter-State Migrant workmen’s (Regulation of Employment and Conditions of Service) Act 1979: The

Act is applicable to an establishment which employs 5 or more inter-state migrant workmen through an intermediary (who has recruited workmen in one state for employment in the establishment situated in another state). The Inter-State migrant workmen, in an establishment to which this Act becomes applicable, are required to be provided certain facilities such as housing, medical aid, travelling expenses from home up to the establishment and back, etc.

o) The Building and Other Construction workers (Regulation of Employment and Conditions of Service)

Act 1996 and the Cess Act of 1996: All the establishments who carry on any building or other construction work and employs 10 or more workers are covered under this Act. All such establishments are required to pay cess at the rate not exceeding 2% of the cost of construction as may be modified by the Government. The Employer of the establishment is required to provide safety measures at the Building or construction work and other welfare measures, such as Canteens, First-Aid facilities, Ambulance, Housing accommodations for workers near the work place etc. The Employer to whom the Act applies has to obtain a registration certificate from the Registering Officer appointed by the Government.

p) Factories Act 1948: The Act lays down the procedure for approval at plans before setting up a factory, health and safety provisions, welfare provisions, working hours, annual earned leave and rendering information regarding accidents or dangerous occurrences to designated authorities. It is applicable to premises employing 10 persons or more with aid of power or 20 or more persons without the aid of power engaged in manufacturing process.

3. SUB-CONTRACTING (GCC Clause 7) Please add the following as Clause 7.2:

The contractor shall not be required to obtain any consent from the employer for:

a) the sub-contracting of any part of the Works for which the Sub-contractor is named in the

contract;



Tirunelveli

49

b) the provision of labour; and

c) the purchase of materials which are in accordance with the standards specified in the

Contract.

Beyond this if the contractor proposes sub-contracting any part of the work during execution of

works, because of some unforeseen circumstances to enable him to complete the work as per

terms of the contract, the Engineer will consider the following before according approval:

- The contractor shall not sub-contract the whole of the Works.

- The contractor shall not sub-contract any part of the Work without prior consent of the

Engineer. Any such consent shall not relieve the contractor from any liability or obligations

under the contract and he shall be responsible for the acts, defaults and neglects of any sub-

contractor, his agents or workmen as fully as if they were the acts, defaults or neglects of the

contractor, his agents or workmen.

- The Engineer should satisfy whether (a) the circumstances warrant such sub-contracting; and

(b) the sub-contractors so proposed for the Work possess the experience, qualifications and

equipment necessary for the job proposed to be entrusted to them in proportion to the

quantum of work to be sub-contracted.

- If payments are proposed to be made directly to that sub-contractor, this should be subject to

specific authorization by the prime contractor so that this arrangement does not alter the contractor's liability or obligations under the contract.

4. ARBITRATION (GCC Clause 25.3) The procedure for arbitration will be as follows : 25.3 (a) In case of Dispute or difference arising between the Employer and a domestic contractor

relating to any matter arising out of or connected with this agreement, such disputes or difference shall be settled in accordance with the Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996. The arbitral tribunal shall consist of 3 arbitrators one each to be appointed by the Employer and the Contractor. The third Arbitrator shall be chosen by the two Arbitrators so appointed by the Parties and shall act as Presiding arbitrator. In case of failure of the two arbitrators appointed by the parties to reach upon a consensus within a period of 30 days from the appointment of the arbitrator appointed subsequently, the Presiding Arbitrator shall be appointed by the * The Chairman of the Institution of Engineers, Tamilnadu State Centre, Chepauk, Chennai 600005.

_____________________________________________

(Note: 1. All bidders are expected to indicate clearly in the bid, if they proposed sub-contracting elements of the

works amounting to more than 20 percent of the Bid Price. For each such proposal the qualification and the

experience of the identified sub-contractor in the relevant field should be furnished along with the bid to enable

the employer to satisfy himself about their qualifications before agreeing for such sub-contracting and include it in

the contract. In view of the above, normally no additional sub-contracting should arise during execution of the

contract. 2. However, [a] sub contracting for certain specialized elements of the work is not unusual and acceptable for carrying out the works more effectively; but vertical splitting of the works for subcontracting is not acceptable. [b] In any case, proposal for sub-contracting in addition to what was specified in bid and stated in contract agreement will not be acceptable if the value of such additional sub-contracting exceeds 25% of value of work which was to be executed by Contractor without sub-contracting. 3. Assignment of the contract may be acceptable only under exceptional circumstances such as insolvencies/liquidation or merger of companies etc. (b) In the case of dispute with a Foreign contractor the dispute shall be settled in accordance

with provisions of UNCITRAL Arbitration Rules. The Arbitral Tribunal shall consist of three Arbitrators one each to be appointed by the Employer and the Contractor. The third Arbitrator shall be chosen by the two Arbitrators so appointed by the Parties, and shall act a presiding arbitrator. In case of failure

of the two arbitrators appointed by the parties to reach upon a consensus within a period of 30 days from the appointment of the arbitrator appointed subsequently, the Presiding arbitrator shall be appointed by the * by The Chairman Institution of Engineers, Tamil Nadu State Centre, Chennai

(c) If one of the parties fails to appoint its arbitrator in pursuance of sub-clause (a) and (b) above

within 30 days after receipt of the notice of the appointment of its arbitrator by the other party, then the President of the Institution of Engineers (India) both in cases of the Foreign



Tirunelveli

50

Contractor as well as Indian Contractor, shall appoint the arbitrator. A certified copy of the order of the Chairman of the Institution of Engineers (India), Tamil Nadu State Centre, Chennai making such an appointment shall be furnished to each of the parties.

(d) Arbitration proceedings shall be held at TIRUNELVELI, Tamilnadu, and the language of the

arbitration proceedings and that of all documents and communications between the parties shall be English.

(e) The decision of the majority of arbitrators shall be final and binding upon both parties. The

cost and expenses of Arbitration proceedings will be paid as determined by the arbitral tribunal. However, the expenses incurred by each party in connection with the preparation, presentation, etc. of its proceedings as also the fees and expenses paid to the arbitrator appointed by such party or on its behalf shall be borne by each party itself.

(f) Where the value of the contract is Rs.50 millions and below, the disputes or differences

arising shall be referred to the Sole Arbitrator. The Sole Arbitrator should be appointed by agreement between the parties; failing such agreement, by the appointing authority, namely the

*Indian Council of Arbitration/President of the Institution of Engineers (India)/The

International Centre for Alternative Disputes Resolution (India). (g) Performance under the contract shall continue during the arbitration proceedings and

payments due to the contractor by the owners shall not be withheld, unless they are the subject matter of the arbitration proceedings.

5. PROTECTION OF ENVIRONMENT:

SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR ENVIRONMENTAL MITIGATION PLAN

Sl.No Environmental Impact Mitigation Measures

(i) Degradation of land at a) Productive agricultural land should not be used as

the Borrow areas borrow areas

b) On completion the site slopes of the borrow pits

should be well graded and should not be steeper that 1:3.

c) To the extent feasible, existing ponds and water

bodies should be used for borrow materials, by

deepening the water bodies. Embankment protection

works should be also undertaken to improve the utility of

water bodies for local population.

d) Wherever feasible the borrow pits should be restored

for productive use by the owner as fishponds

(ii) Air pollution due to a) Vehicles transporting construction materials prone to

emissions from fugitive dust emissions should be covered.

construction machinery b) Trucks carrying sand should be provided with tarpaulin

and movement of vehicles. sheets to cover the bed and sides of the trucks.

c) Idling of delivery trucks or other equipment should not

be permitted during loading and unloading

d) All construction vehicles should comply with air

emission standards and be maintained properly.

(iii) Pedestrian safety and a) Identification of alternate access roads to the site to



Tirunelveli

51

improvement of haul roads facilitate one-way movement of traffic or reduction of

due to movement of traffic density on any particular road.

construction vehicles b) Improvement of road surface to standards adequate to

withstand movement of heavy construction vehicles

c) Installing appropriate signage and deploying flagmen

during peak traffic period to regulate the movement of

traffic

d) Provision of warning signals and speed moderators at

sensitive and crucial areas along the internal road.

e) Development of pedestrian side walk as per the

standards.

(iv) Noise pollution due to a) Alternative access routes to the site should be

operation of construction identified to avoid concentration of noise level in any

machinery at the site and single road.

movement of heavy b) Construction contracts should specify that the

vehicles along the access construction equipment should meet the noise and air

roads. emission levels as per EPA Rules, 1986.

c) Generator sets should be provided with noise shields

around them.

d) Vehicles used for transportation of construction material

should be well maintained.

e) The workers operating high noise machinery, or

operating near it should be provided with ear plugs.

f) Restriction on traffic movement to day light hours (6 a.m

to 7 p.m) to avoid sleep disturbance to residents.

(v) Impact on community water a) No community water resources should be tapped for

resources (quantity) construction water requirement without permission of

village Panchayat.

b) No feeder channels to village water ponds should be

diverted or blocked during construction.

c) While sinking the tube well for meeting

construction/workers requirement the contractor should

ensure that the water resources of near by farm land are

not adversely affected.

d) Water holding capacity of any of village pond/tank

partially acquired due to project should be augmented by

equivalent amount by deepening the water body.

(vi) Impact on community a) All waste water discharges from construction site will be

water resources (quality) received in septic tanks in adequate capacity of soak pits

b) Oil handing and storage area will be surfaced and

provided with catch pit to intercept any accidental

spillages.



Tirunelveli

52

(vii) Impact on Micro Climate a) On-site planting of shading trees to counter the effects

of heat island cretate as a result of development.

b) Planting of about 2000 number of trees, of species like

Poongamia Glabra, Morinda Gtinctoria, Azadirachta

indica, Thespesia Populnae, Enferolobum Samana etc

along the roads and on the designated open spaces to

ensure the improvement of micro-climatic conditions of the

project site.

(viii) Storm Water Drainage a) Provision of adequate surface drains for the storm

and Improvement of water drainage on the site during the construction and

Water Resource operational phase.

b) Improvement of Natural drainage Canals running on the

North side of the site by de silting and stabilizing the walls

of the canals.

c) Integration of the proposed drains with the existing

natural drains surrounding the site to provide eastward

flow for the on site and off site surface runoffs towards the

Buckingham Canal.

d) Provision for Rain water harvesting and storage of

surface runoffs and roof top water and measures to use

Them during dry months through the construction of a pond

in the area reserved for CRZ and connecting them with the

proposed open wells distributed in the project site.

(ix) Sanitation and healthcare at a) The contractor shall install adequate lavatories and

workers camp Baths at the construction camp to cater to the

requirements of the workers.

b) The contractor shall build septic tanks with adequate

capacity at the workers colony and at construction yard.

c) All organic waste guaranteed at construction yard and

worker camp should be composted in compost trench.

d) Quarterly health check-ups of construction workers

should be organized at workers colony.

e) Adequate provision of water supply and fuel for cooking

should be made at workers colony.

f) the living space at workers camp should meet the norms

and Indian Labour Law.

g) Provision of AIDs awareness to construction workers

and to near by population.

Add the following as GCC Clause 16.2:



Tirunelveli

53

The contractor shall take all reasonable steps to protect the environment on and off the Site and to

avoid damage or nuisance to persons or to property of the public or others resulting from pollution, noise or other causes arising as a consequence of his methods of operation.

During continuance of the contract, the contractor and his sub-contractors shall abide at all times by

all existing enactments on environmental protection and rules made thereunder, regulations, notifications and bye-laws of the State or Central Government, or local authorities and any other law, bye-law, regulations that may be passed or notification that may be issued in this respect in future by the State or Central Government or the local authority.

Salient features of some of the major laws that are applicable are given below : The Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974, This provides for the prevention and

control of water pollution and the maintaining and restoring of wholesomeness of water. 'Pollution' means such contamination of water or such alteration of the physical, chemical or biological properties of water or such discharge of any sewage or trade effluent or of any other liquid, gaseous or solid substance into water (whether

directly or indirectly) as may, or is likely to, create a nuisance or render such water harmful or injurious to public health or safety, or to domestic, commercial, industrial, agricultural or other legitimate uses, or to the life and health of animals or plants or of aquatic organisms.

The Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981, This provides for prevention, control and abatement of air pollution. 'Air Pollution' means the presence in the atmosphere of any 'air pollutant', which means any solid, liquid or gaseous substance (including noise) present in the atmosphere in such concentration as may be or tend to be injurious to human beings or other living creatures or plants or property or environment.

The Environment (Protection) Act, 1986, This provides for the protection and improvement of

environment and for matters connected therewith, and the prevention of hazards to human beings, other living creatures, plants and property. 'Environment' includes water, air and land and the inter-relationship which exists among and between water, air and land, and human beings, other living creatures, plants, micro-organism and property.

The Public Liability Insurance Act, 1991, This provides for public liability insurance for the purpose of

providing immediate relief to the persons affected by accident occurring while handling hazardous substances and for matters connected herewith or incidental thereto. Hazardous substance means any substance or preparation which is defined as hazardous substance under the Environment (Protection) Act 1986, and exceeding such quantity as may be specified by notification by the Central Government.

6. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES: Sub-clause 49.1: Please substitute the last sentence with the following: “Time is the essence of the contract and payment or deduction of liquidated damages shall not

relieve the contractor from his obligation to complete the work as per agreed construction program and milestones or from any other of the contractor’s obligations and liabilities under the contract.”



Tirunelveli

54

SECTION 4: CONTRACT DATA



Tirunelveli

55

Contract Data

Items marked "N/A" do not apply in this Contract.

The following documents are also part of the Contract: Clause Reference

· The Schedule of Operating and Maintenance Manuals [58]

· The Schedule of Other Contractors [8]

· The Schedule of Key Personnel [9]

· The Methodology and Program of Construction & Environmental Management Plan [27]

· The Schedule of Key and Critical equipment to be deployed [27]

on the work as per agreed program of construction

· Site Investigation reports [14

The Borrower is Government of Tamil Nadu through Government of India [1.1]

The World Bank means International Development Association (IDA), [1.1]

and loan refers to an IDA Credit

The above insertions should correspond to the information provided in the Invitation of Bids.

The Employer is

Name: The Superintending Engineer, PWD

Buildings (Construction & Maintenance) Circle,

Tirunelveli – 2. (1.1)

Address: Public Works Department Compound

Buildings (Construction & Maintenance) Circle,

Tirunelveli-2.

Name of authorized Representative: Deputy Superintending Engineer

O/o The Superintending Engineer, PWD,

Building (C&M) Circle,

Tirunelveli-2.

The Engineer is (1.1)

Name: Executive Engineer, PWD

Buildings Construction Maintenance Division,Thoothukudi

(1.1)

Address: Public Works Department,

Buildings Construction Maintenance Division,Thoothukudi

Name of Authorized Representative: Assistant Executive Engineer

*Name : Public Works Department,

Buildings Construction Maintenance Sub Division

(1.1) *Address : Public Works Department,

Buildings Construction Maintenance Sub Division



Tirunelveli

56

The Adjudicator appointed jointly by the Employer and Contractor is:

*Name :

(1.1)

*Address :

(*to be filled in after the Adjudicator has been appointed)

The name and identification number of the Contract isb

PACKAGE NO.TNPWD.ES/10 /ETRP/02 slice - A

____________________________________________________________________________________________

[insert name and number as indicated in the Invitation for Bids (or Prequalification, if any]. [1.1]

The Works consist of CONSTRUCTION OF MULTIPURPOSE EVACUATION SHELTER FOR

1000 capacity School ,Kitchen and sanimal Shelters at KAYALPATTINAM in Thoothukudi District. (1.1)

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________

_____[brief summary, including relationship to other contracts under the Project].

The Start Date shall be the date of issue of notice to proceed with the work. (1.1)

The Intended Completion Date for the whole

of the Works is 12 months with the following milestones: [17, 28]

Milestone Physical work to be completed

Period from the date of issue

of notice to proceed with

the work

Milestone 1 i.e Up to Basement 20 % .3 Three months

Milestone 2 i.e Ground floor roof laid 20 % 5 five months

Milestone 3 i.e First floor roof laid 20 % 7 Seven months

Milestone 4 i.e Second floor roof laid 20 % 9 Nine months

Milestone 5 i.e

Completion of the

work in all respects

All finishing works including

Plastering, fixing Doors and

windows, Water supply, sanitary ,

electrification, tiles

20 % .12 Twelve months

The following documents also form part of the Contract: [2.3] _________________Nil_______________________________ The Contractor shall submit a revised Program for the Works (in such form and detail as the engineer shall reasonably prescribe) within 15 days of delivery of the Letter of Acceptance. [27] [This program should be in adequate detail and generally conform to the program submitted alongwith bid in response to ITB Clause 4.3 (k). Deviations if any from that should be clearly explained and should be satisfactory to the Engineer]



Tirunelveli

57

The Site Possession Dates shall be one week from the date of issue of notice to proceed with the work The Site is located at KAYALPATTINAM Village at Thoothokudi District [1] I

and is defined in drawings nos. A . / Drg. No.

The Defects Liability Period is 365 days from the date of certification of completion of works. (where sectional

completion certificate is issued this will apply from those dates for those sections). [35]

Insurance requirements are as under: [13]

Minimum Cover

for Insurance

Maximum deductible

for Insurance

(i) Works and Plant and

Materials

Rs19.40 miollion

Rs19400

(ii) Loss or damage to

Equipment

Rs.9,70,000/- Rs.9,700/-

(iii) Other Property

Nil Nil

(iv) Personal injury or death

insurance:

a) for other people;

Rs.500000

per person

Rs.500

per person / annum

b) for Contractor’s

Employees

In accordance with the statutory requirements

applicable to India

The following events shall also be Compensation Events: [44]

1. ____________________________________________________

2. ____________________________________________________

3. ____________________________________________________

4. ____________________________________________________

The period between Program updates shall be __45 days. [27]

The amount to be withheld for late submission of an updated

Program shall be 20,000 [27]

The language of the Contract documents is English [3]

The law which applies to the Contract is the laws of Union of India [3]

The currency of the Contract is Indian Rupees. [46]

Fees and types of reimbursable expenses to be paid to the Adjudicator 3000 per day [25]

(Rupees Three thousand only) + Reimbursable expenses

Appointing Authority for the Adjudicator Chairman, Institution of Engineers (India) Tamilnadu centre,Chepauk,

Chennai-5. [26]



Tirunelveli

58

The formula(e) for adjustment of prices are: [47]

R = Value of work as defined in Clause 47.1 of Conditions of Contract.

Adjustment for labour component

(i) Price adjustment for increase or decrease in the cost due to labour shall be paid in accordance with the

following formula:

VL = 0.85 x Pl/100 x R x (Li - Lo)/Lo

VL = increase or decrease in the cost of work during the quarter under consideration due to changes in

rates for local labour.

Lo = the average consumer price index for industrial workers for ————— centre for the quarter

preceding the date of opening of Bids as published by Labour Bureau, Ministry of Labour,

Government of India.

Li = The average consumer price index for industrial workers for ————— centre for the quarter

under consideration as published by Labour Bureau, Ministry of Labour, Government of India.

Pl = Percentage of labour component of the work.

Adjustment for cement component

(ii) Price adjustment for increase or decrease in the cost of cement procured by the contractor shall be paid

in accordance with the following formula.

Vc = 0.85 x Pc/100 x R x (Ci - Co)/Co

Vc = Increase or decrease in the cost of work during the quarter under consideration due to changes in

the rates for cement

Co = The all India average wholesale price index for cement for the quarter preceding the date of

opening of Bids as published by the Ministry of Industrial Development, Government of India,

New Delhi

Ci = The all India average wholesale price index for cement for the quarter under consideration as

published by Ministry of Industrial Development, Government of India, New Delhi

Pc = Percentage of cement component of the work

Adjustment for steel component

(iii) Price adjustment for increase or decrease in the cost of steel procured by the Contractor shall be paid in

accordance with the following formula:

Vs = 0.85 x Ps/100 x R x (Si - So)/So

Vs = Increase or decrease in the cost of work during the quarter under consideration due to changes in

the rates for steel

So = The all India average wholesale price index for steel (Bars and Rods) for the quarter preceding

the date of opening of Bids as published by the Ministry of Industrial Development,

Government of India, New Delhi

Si = The all India average wholesale price index for steel (Bars and Rods) for the quarter under

consideration as published by Ministry of Industrial Development, New Delhi

Ps = Percentage of steel component of the work

Note: For the application of this clause, index of Bars and Rods has been chosen to represent steel

group.



Tirunelveli

59

Adjustment of POL (fuel and lubricant) component

(iv) Price adjustment for increase or decrease in cost POL (fuel and lubricant) shall be paid in accordance

with the following formula:

Vf = 0.85 x Pf/100 x R x (Fi - Fo)/Fo

Vf = Increase or decrease in the cost of work during the quarter under consideration due to changes in

rates for fuel and lubricants.

Fo = The average official retail price of High Speed Diesel (HSD) at the existing consumer pumps of

IOC at ———— on the day thirty days prior to the date of opening of Bids.

Fi = The average official retail price of HSD at the existing consumer pumps of IOC at —————

for the 15th day of the middle calendar month of the quarter under consideration.

Pf = Percentage of fuel and lubricants component of the work.

Note: For the application of this clause, the price of High Speed Diesel oil has been chosen to

represent fuel and lubricants group.

Adjustment for Plant and Machinery Spares component

(v) Price adjustment for increase or decrease in the cost of plant and machinery spares procured by the

Contractor shall be paid in accordance with the following formula:

Vp = 0.85 x Pp/100 x R x (Pi - Po)/Po

Vp = Increase or decrease in the cost of work during the quarter under consideration due to changes in

the rates for plant and machinery spares

Po = The all India average wholesale price index for heavy machinery and parts for the quarter

preceding the date of opening of Bids as published by the Ministry of Industrial Development,

Government of India, New Delhi

Pi = The all India average wholesale price index for heavy machinery and parts for the quarter under

consideration as published by Ministry of Industrial Development, New Delhi

Pp = Percentage of plant and machinery spares component of the work

Note: For the application of this clause, index of Heavy Machinery and Parts has been chosen to

represent the Plant and Machinery Spares group.

Adjustment of Local materials

(vi) Price adjustment for increase or decrease in cost of local materials other than cement, steel, bitumen

and POL procured by the contractor shall be paid in accordance with the following formula:

Vm = 0.85 x Pm/100 x R x (Mi - Mo)/Mo

Vm = Increase or decrease in the cost of work during the quarter under consideration due to changes in

rates for local materials other than cement, steel, bitumen and POL.

Mo = The all India average wholesale price index (all commodities) for the quarter preceding the date

of opening of Bids, as published by the Ministry of Industrial Development, Government of

India, New Delhi.

Mi = The all India average wholesale price index (all commodities) for the quarter under

consideration as published by Ministry of Industrial Development, Government of India, New

Delhi.



Tirunelveli

60

Pm = Percentage of local material component (other than cement, steel, bitumen and POL) of the

work.

The following percentages will govern the price adjustment for the entire contract:

1. Labour - Pl ——30 %

2. Cement - Pc —— 12%

3. Steel - Ps —— 22%

4. POL - Pf —— 0.50%

5. Plant & Machinery Spares - PP —— 1.50%

6. Local materials - Pm —— 34.00%

Total 100%

The proportion of payments retained (retention money) shall be 6% from each bill

subject to a maximum of 5% of final contract price [48]

The liquidated damages for the whole of the works are

Rs. 9700 (amount) per day and that for the milestone are as under : [49]

For milestone 1 Rs. 1940 /- per day

For milestone 2 Rs . 1940 /- per day

For milestone 3 Rs. 1940 /-per day

For milestone 4 Rs. 1940 /-per day

For milestone 5 Rs.1940 -per day

The maximum amount of liquidated damages for the whole of the works [49]

is ten percent of final contract price.

The amounts of the advance payment are: [51]

Nature of Advance Amount (Rs.) Conditions to be fulfilled

1. Mobilization 5% of the Contract price On submission of un-conditional Bank Guarantee.

(to be drawn before end of 20% of Contract period)

2. Equipment

(This advance is not

applicable for

equipment already

owned or hired/

leased by the

contractor.)

90% for new and 50% of depreciated

value for old equipment. Total

amount will be subject to a maxi-

mum of 5%/ of the Contract price.

(* Choose one and delete others)

After equipment is brought to site as per agreed

construction program (provided the Engineer is

satisfied that the equipment is required for

performance of the contract) and on submission of

unconditional Bank Guarantee for amount of advance.

(The advance payment will be paid to the Contractor no later than 15 days after fulfillment of the above conditions).

Repayment of advance payment for mobilization and equipment: [51]

The advance shall be repaid with percentage deductions from the interim payments certified

by the Engineer under the Contract. Deductions shall commence in the next Interim

Payment Certificate following that in which the total of all such payments to the Contractor

has reached not less than 15 percent of the Contract Price or 2 months from the date of

payment of first installment of advance, whichever period concludes earlier, and shall be

made at the rate of _10 @ percent of the amounts of all Interim Payment Certificates until

such time as the advance has been repaid, always provided that the advance shall be

completely repaid prior to the expiry of the original time for completion.

The Securities shall be for the following minimum amounts equivalent as a percentage of [52]

the Contract Price:

Performance Security for 5 per cent of contract price plus Rs. ..................... as additional

security for unbalanced bids [in terms of ITB Clause 29.5].



Tirunelveli

61

The standard form of Performance Security acceptable to the Employer shall be an unconditional

Bank Guarantee of the type as presented in Section 8 of the Bidding Documents.

*The date by which operating and maintenance manuals are required is within 28 days of issue [58]

of certificate of completion of whole or section of the work, as the case may be.

*The date by which “as-built” drawings (in scale …) in 2 sets are required is within

28 days of issue of certificate of completion of whole or section of the work, as the case may be. [58]

The amount to be withheld for failing to supply “as built” drawings and/or operating and [58]

maintenance manuals *by the date required is Rs.

The following events shall also be fundamental breach of contract: [59.2]

1. The Contractor has contravened Sub-clause 7 of GCC read with SCC and Clause 9.0

of GCC

2. The contractor does not adhere to the agreed construction program and agreed

environmental management plan (Clause 27 of GCC) and also fails to take satisfactory

remedial action as per agreements reached in the management meetings (Clause 31)

for a period of 30 days.

3. The contractor fails to carry out of the instructions of Engineer within a reasonable

time determined by the Engineer in accordance with GCC Clause 16.1 and 23.1.

The percentage to apply to the value of the work not completed representing the Employer's [60]

additional cost for completing the Works shall be 20 percent.



Tirunelveli

62

SECTION. 5

SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS

1. Civil 63 to 142 2. Electrical 143 to 186



Tirunelveli

63

SECTION -1

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

The term Indian Standard Specifications herein after referred to as IS means the relevant Indian

Standard Specifications with all Amendments pulished upto the date of submission of tenders. A

Statement of relevant IS applicable to this context, is enclosed.

LIST OF INDIAN STANDARDS

Sl.N

o. Short Title I.S. Number

TNBP

Number

I.

Cement

1. Specifications for ordinary and Low heat Portland Cement

2. Specification for Portland Pozzolana Cement

269-1976

1489-1976

10

10 A

II.

AGGREGATES 1. Specification for coarse and fine Aggregate from natural

source for concrete

2. Specification for sand and Masonry Mortars

3. Method of Tests for aggegates for concrete

383-1970

2116-1980

2386-1963

(Part I to VII)

5 & 7

7

7

III.

BUILDING STONES

1. Method of test for Determination of strength properties

of natural building stones.

Part - I Compressive Strength

Part - II Transverse Strength Part - III Tensile Strength

Part - IV Shear Strength

2. Method of Measurement of buildings and civil engineering

works

3. Specification for fly-ash for use as Pozzolana and

admixure

4. Method of Measurement of building and Civil Engineering

Works Part – XII plastering and pointing

1121-1974

(Part I to IV)

1200-1976

(Part – IV)

3812-1981

(Part I)

1200-1976

(Part – XII)

35



Tirunelveli

64

Sl.N


TNBP

Number

IV.

CONCRETE 1. Method of Measurement of building and Civil engineer

works Part-II concrete works

2. CONCRETE WORKS

Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete

3. Specification for Precast concrete coping blocks

4. Method of test for strength of concrete

5. Code of practice for laying in situ cement concrete lining

on canals

6. Specification for Admixtures for Concrete

7. Method of Test for Autoclaved celluar concrete products

8. Method of sampling and analysis of concrete

9. Specification for Batch type Concree mixers

10. General requirements for concrete Vibrators – immersion

type

11. Specification for Concrete Vibrating tables

12. Method of Test for permeability or cement mortar and concrete

13. Specifications for flyash for use as Pozzolana as

admixture for conrete

14. Specification for Portable swing weigh batch for concrete

(Single and double bucket type)

15. Code of practice for installation of joints in concrete

pavements

1200-1974

(Part II)

456-1978

5751-1969

516-1959

3873-1978

9103-1979

6441-1972

1973

(Part I to IX)

1199-1976

1791-1968

2505-1980

2514-1963

3085-1965

3812-1966

(Part II)

2722-1964

6509-1972

28,30

28,30

28,30

28,30

V.

EARTH WORK

1. Method of Measurement of building and Civil Engineer

Works Part-I Earth work

2. Safty code for piling and other deep foundations

3. Code of practice for Design, Installation, observation and

maintenance of uplift pressure pipes for Hydraulic structures on permeable foundation

4. Safety code for excavation works

5. Method of test for soils Part II Determination of water

content

6. Method of test for soils Determination of moisture

content Dry density relation using light compaction

7. Method of test for soils Determination of Dry density of

soils in place by sand replacement method

1200-1974

(Part I)

5121-1969

6532-1972

3764-1966

2720-1973

(Part II)

2720-1980

(Part VII)

2720-1975

(Part XXVIII)

20, A, B,

C, 23, 24, 25

19, 26



Tirunelveli

65

Sl.N


TNBP

Number

8. Method of test for soils Determination of dry density of

soils in place by the core cutter method

9. Safety code for blasting and related drilling operations

2720-1975 (Part XXIX)

1981-1967

VI.

OTHER SUBJECTS 1. Safety code for scaffolds and Ladders Part I Scaffolds

2. Safety code for scaffolds and ladders Part II Ladders

3. Recommendations on stacking and storage of

construction materials at site

3696-1966

(Part I)

3696-1966

(Part II)

4082-1977

In addition to the Indian Standard Specifications, the specifications prescribed in Tamil Nadu Building Practice (TNBP) shall also be followed, where IS specification are not available.



Tirunelveli

66

SECTION - 2

SITE OF WORK

2.1 Clearing and Grubbing

2.1.1 Clearing and leveling Site

The portion of the right-of-way where required for constructing the work under these

specifications shall be cleared of all trees, bushes, rubbish and other objectionable

matter. Trees designated by the Engineer-in-charge shall not be cut and shall be

protected fro injury. Such cleared material shall be disposed of, as provided in sub-

paragraph 'c' below or removed from the site of work before the date of completion of

the contract as approved by the Engineer-in-charge. The clearing operation shall be in

accordance with clauses 4.1, 4.1.1, 4.2 and 4.3 of I.S. 4701-1982 Indian code of

practice for earth work in canals. Surface boulders either loose or partly embedded in

the ground will have to be removed and stacked as directed.

b. Grubbing

The area described or shown on the relevant site plan shall be cleared of all

obstructions, loose stones, non-required materials and rubbish of all kinds. All

brushwood shall be cleared and the roots grubbed up. No trees shall be cut down and

removed without the instructions of the Enginee-in-charge. Those which are cut down

shall.be grubbed up. The same remarks apply to jungle clearance. Trees to be

preserved will be designated by the Engineer-in-charge. Those which are cut down

shall be grubbed up. The same remarks apply to ungle clearance. Trees to be

preserved will be designated by the Engineer-in-charge.

The products of the clearing shall be stacked in such place and manner as may be

ordered by the Engineer-in-charge and the ground shall be left in a perfectly clean

condition; all products of the clearing shall be the property of Government and shall be

disposed of as the Engineer-in-charge may direct.

All holes or hollows, whether originally existing or produced by digging up roots shall

be carefully filled up with earth, well rammed to the design density and levelled off, as

may be directed.

C. Disposal of Cleared and Grubbed Material

The disposal of cleared and grubbed material shall be in accordance with clause 4.1.1

of I.S. 4701-1982 code of practice for earth work on canals. All waste materials to be

burnt shall be piled neatly and when in suitable condition shall be burnt completely to

ashes. Piling of waste material for burning shall be done at such a location and in such

a manner as would not cause any fire risk. Necessary precautions shall be taken to

prevent spreading of fire to areas beyond the limits of cleared site. Suitable materials

and equipment for prevention and suppression of fire shall be kept available at all

times.

The material to be disposed of may be buried for which Para 1.2 and 2 of specification

16 of TNBP shall apply.



Tirunelveli

67

2.1.2 Payment

For the clearance of scrub jungle, light jungle, heavy jungle with or without uprooting

etc.,payment will be made as provided for in the tender documents. The contractor

shall include the cost of clearing of site and grubbing in the prices bid in the bill of

quantities of the contract for the relevant finished item of work for which clearing and

grubbing as mentioned in the above para are required unless otherwise it is given as a

seperate item in the contract. No payment towards removal of small stones and

boulders of size less than 0.01 cubic metre will be made, and the rate quoted for

excavation will be considered to include this item. However, payment will be made for

the removal of surface boulders of sizes greater than 0.01 cubic metre but less than 3

cubic metres, either loose or partly embedded in the ground, at the rate quoted in bill

of quantities for the actual quantity to removed, based on stack measurement

applicable for the relevant strata classification after deducting 40% towards voids.

Benching will be paid as separate item, per 1 (one) running metre of bench at the rate

provided for in the tender documents.

2.2.1 Setting out of the work

Monsoon Damages

Damages due to rain or flood shall have to be made good by the contractor till the work is

handed over to the department. The responsibility for desilting and making good the damages

due to rain or flood rests with the contractor. No extra cost is payable for such operations and

the contractor shall, therefore, have to take all necessary precautions to protect the work

done during the construction period.

Removal of Silt and Water

Accumulated silt and water in the structures for the works partly done by the Contractor in

this or previous seasons should be removed and no extra payment will be made, for such

removal of silt and water. The unit rate of excavatioun is deemed to include cost for removal

of such silt and water.



Tirunelveli

68

SECTION – 3

3.1 Excavation

3.1.1 Classification of Excavation

Except as otherwise provided in these specifications material excavated will be measured in

excavation to the lines shown on the drawings or as provided in these specifications and all materials

as required to be excavated will be paid for at the applicable price bid in the schedule for excavation.

No additional allowance above the price bid in the schedule will be made on account of any of the

material being wet. Bidders and the contractors must assume all responsibility for deducing and

concluding as to the nature of the materials to be excavated and the difficulties of making and

maintaining the required excavation. The Government does not represent that the excavation can be

performed and maintained at the paylines described in these specifications as shown on the drawings.

3.2 Excavation for Structures

a. General

Excavation for the foundation of structures shall be to the elevation shown on the drawer or as

directed by the Engineer-in-Charge. In so far as practicable the material removed in excavation for

structures shall be used for backfill and embankments.

b. Foundations for Structures

All trenches in soil other than rock or hard compact soil more than 1.5m deep, into which men

enter shall be securely shored and strutted and timbered.

All trenches in soil soft or fissured rock or hard soil exceeding 2 m in depth, into which men

enter shall be securely shored and tirnbered.

Notwithstanding anything said above, it shall be understood that the need for shoring shall

receive careful and frequent consideration even in trenches of less than 1.5 or 2m in depth (as the

case may be). When there is doubt as to the safety of the work without shoring, no further,

excavation or other work shall be continuted until adequate shoring is provided.

Where the sides of trenches are sloped but not to within 1.5m of the bottom the vertical sides

shall be shored and the shoring shall extend at least 30 cm above the vertical sides. When open

spaced sheathing is used, a toe board shall be provided to prevent material rolling down the slope and

failing into the part of the trench with vertical walls.

Shoring and timbering shall be carried along with the opening of the trench but when

conditions permit protection work, such as sheet piling may be done before the excavation

commences.

All loose stones, projecting clumps of earth, pockets of unsuitable material which might come

down on the workers in the trench or any condition which is a hazard, shall be either removed or the

excavated sides adequately braced and the trench suitably guarded. On steps slopes workmen shall

not be permitted to work one above the other.



Tirunelveli

69

The contractor shall prepare the foundations at structure sites by methods which will provide

firm foundation for the structures. The bottom and side slopes of common excavation upon or against

which the structure is to be placed shall be finished to the prescribed dimensions and the surfaces so

prepared shall be moistened and tamped with suitable tools to form firm foundation upon or against

which to place the structure. The contractor shall prepare the foundation for the structures as shown

on respective drawings. The natural foundation material beneath the required excavation shall be

moistened if required and compacted in place.

If the Engineer-in-Charge considers it necessary to consolidate the foundation strata by

grouting cement slurry, the drilling and grouting or any other foundation treatment shall be done by

the contractor as directed by the Engineer-in- Charge and the payment will be as per the general

contract document in respect of extra items.

Densities of the compacted foundation materials and the testing thereof shall be in accordance

with paragraph 3.1.2.

Separate payment will not be made to the contractor for moistening and compacting the

foundation of structures. The contractor shall include cost thereof in the prices bid per cubic metre of

the item of the bill of quantities for preparation of foundations.

When unsuitable material is encountered in the foundation for structure the Engineer-in-

Charge will direct additional excavation to remove the unsuitable material. The additional excavation

shall be refilled as follows. In excavation in soils, the over excavation shall be filled in by selected

bedding material and compacted. In excavation in rock it shall be filled by cement concrete 1:5:10

(One cement, five sand and ten aggregate of maximum size 40mm by volume). No separate payment

for excavation backfill will be made as per clause 3.2.2(a).

c. Extra Excavation and Over Excavation

Should remains of old building, be met with the material shall be removed with wedges and

levers. Blasting will not be allowed, without the permission in writing of the Engineer-in-Charge.

If bad ground or loose soil is met with. the contractor, will be responsible for reporting the to

the Engineer-in-Charge who will issue such orders as may be necessary. For extra, concrete and

masonry arising from bad ground, the contractors shall be paid treating this as additional quantity as

per the contract data of contract documents.

All excavated earth, which is unfit or surplus to requirements for filling in, shall be spread as

instructed by the Engineer-in-Charge at the contractor's expense.

If at any points in common excavation the foundation material is excavated beyond the lines

requried to receive the structure or if at any point in common excavation the natural foundation

material is disturbed or loosened during the excavation process, it shall be compacted in places or

where directed, it shall be removed and replaced as follows. In excavation in soil and in rock it shall be

filled by cement concrete 1:5:10 (one cement five sand and ten aggregate of 40 mm size by volume).

Any excess excavation or over excavation performed by the contractor for any purpose or reason

except for additional excavation as may be prescribed by the Engineer-in-Charge and whether or not

due to the fault of the contractor shall be at the expense of the contractor. Filling for such excess

excavation or over excavation shall be at the expense of the contractor.



Tirunelveli

70

d. Measurernent for Payment

Excavation for structures will be measured for payment, for box cutting with vertical sides, of

foundation dimensions. The contractor will have to make his own arrangements for shoring, strutting

provision of adequate slopes for the sides to prevent slips etc. and no separate charge will be paid for

any incidental charges arising either during excavation of foundation or construction of the structure.

The quantity for payment of excavation in soils and rock will be arrived at by taking prelevels

and finished levels of respective strata. Block leveis will be taken at one metre or closer intervals. The

levels will be plotted on a graph sheet and average levels arrived at for purpose of determining the

quantity of excavation. The contractor's signature in token or his acceptance has to be recorded in the

cross section sheets. Final payment will be based on levels only. The contractor shall expose the

surface of the strata for the inspection of Engineer-in-Charge for taking levels whenever the

classification in strata gets changed.

e. Payment

Payment for excavation for structures will be made at the unit price per cubic metre bid

therefor in the bill of quantities for excavation for structures shall include the cost of all labour and

materials for coffer dam and other temporary construction, of all pumping and dewatering, of all other

work necessary to maintain the excavation in good order during construction, of removing such

temproary construction where required shall include the cost of disposal of the excavated material

except that required overhaul will be paid for.



Tirunelveli

71

SECTION – 4

MATERIALS

Section 4.1 Materials

4.1.1 Stone for Masonry

a. General

The stones used for stone masnory shall conform to the relevant specification of clause 4.1 of

I.S. 1597 (part-1) 1967 and I.S. 1123-1975 code of practice for construction of stone masnory

part-1 Rubble stone Masonary.

Stone Masonary Using Granite

The stone of the required quality shall be obtained from the quarries specified in tile lead chart

appended to the bill of quantities. The common types of natural stones which are generally

used are Granite and other igneous rocks, and shall be sound, free from defects like decay,

cavities, cracks, flaws, sand, holes, soft seams, veins, patches of soft or loose materials or any

other deleterious materials like Iron Oxide, organic impurities etc. They should be free from

rounded, worn or weathered surface or skin or coating which prevents the adherence of

mortar. All stones used shall be clean of uniform colour and texture, strong, hard and durable.

The stone shall be supplied from the specified quarry and stall have abrasion value of 45%

and specific gravity of about 2.6.

The crushing strengths of the stones shall be determined in accordance with I.S.1121-1974.

(part 1 to a ) The strength shall be as detailed below in Table 4(A).

Table - 4 (A)

Sl.No. Types of stone Minimum Crushing strengh

1.

Granite

1000 Kgs./Sq.m

The percentage of water absorption by the stones when immersed in water for 24 hours shall

not exceed 5% of their dry as determined in accordance with I.s. 1124-1974.

Samples of the stones collected from the the stackes by the contractor will be tested for the

standards specified above and other relevant Indian Standards and stone stacks not

conforming to the standards will be rejected and their cost shall be borned by the contractor.

The contractor shall obtain these stones form the approved portions of the approved quarries

only.

Cost

The cost of collecting the stones for masonery will not be paid separately and their cost

including the cost of quarrying, transporting, stacking, royalties charges shall be included in

the unit price per cubic metre bid therefore in the relevant item on the bill of quantities.

4.1.2 Sand For Masonry

General



Tirunelveli

72

The term sand is used to designate fine aggregate with maximum size of particle 43.75 mm.

The sand shall be of course category conforming to the Indian Standard Specifications IS-

2116-1980. 'Sand for masonry mortars' as revised from time to time.

Where sand from different sources are being used at one xer at the same time, these shall be

blended to ensure uniform grading in successive batches.

Variations in the grading of sand being obtained from the same source shall be controlled by

means of the fineness modulus test.

The following control limits shall be used.

Controlled to limits of plus and minus 0.25 of running average of ten consecutive test samples.

For natural sand, fineness modulus shall be greater than 2.30 and less than 3.10.

For manufactured sand,the specifications should be the same as in relevant section under

specificationss for concrete.

Quality of sand

The sand shall consist of natural sand, crushed stone or crushed gravel sand, or a combination

of any of these.

The sand shall be hard, durable, clean and free from adherence coatings and organic matter

and shall not contain more than permissible limit of clay balls or pelletts as specified further

below.

The sand shall not contain any harmful impurities, such as iron pyrites, alkalis, salts, coal,

mica shale or similar laminated or other materials in such form or in such quantities as to

affect adversely the hardening, the strength, the durability or the appearance of the mortar

applied or to attack ary reinforcement used in the masonry work. Unless found satisfactory, as

a result of further tests as may be specified by the Engineer in charge of the work, or unless

evidence of such performance is offered which is satisfactory to him, the maximum quantities

of clay, fine slit, fine dust and organic impurities in the sand shall not exceed the following,

limits.

a. Clay, fine silt and fine dust Not more than 5 per cent by weight.

(determined in accordance

with Appendix C of I.S.383-1963 and also

I.S.2386 (part 11) 1963.

b. Organic impurities Below that indicated by

(Determined in accordance comparison with the standard

with I.S.2386 (Part 11) solution

specified in specified 6.2.2 of I.S.2386 (Part 11) 1963. in 1963.

Sand shall generally conform to specifications given in paragraph 6.3.6 except that the sand

for mortar shall conform to the grading of sand given in clause 4 of I.S.2116-1980 as detailed

below, in Table 4(B).

Table 3 (B)



Tirunelveli

73

Grading of sand for use in Masonry Mortars

I.S. Sieve Designation Percentage passing by Mass

4.75 mm 100 2.36 mm 90 to 100

1.18 mm 70 to 100

600 micron 40 to 100 300 micron 5 to 70

150 micron 0 to 15

A sand whose grading falls out-side the specified limits due to excess or deficiency or course

or fine particles may be processed to comply with the standard by screening through suitably

sized sieves and/or blending with required quantities of suitable sized sand particles.

If the sand brought to site is not clean, it must be washed clean in water. Fine dirt sand, or

sea sand, or sand containing saline impurities shall on no account be used.

b. Cost

The cost of sand for masonry will not be measured and paid separately and the cost of sand

including the cost of stripping and transporting and storing and royalty charges shall be

included in the unit price per cubic metre bid therefar in the relevant item of work in the bill of

quantities for which this sand is required.

4.1.3 Cement

The contractor has to make his own arrangement for procurement of cement of required

specefications. The specifications and conditions specified for supply of cement are given in

paragraph 6.3.3 shall be applicable here also.

Ordinary portland cement conforming to I.S.269-1989 shall be used for Masonry work.

Portland pozzolana cement conforming to I.S.1489-1991 may also be used for masonry work,

in the event of non-availability of ordinary portland cement with the approval of Engineer-in-

charge.

4.1.4 Water

The speciications and conditions specified for procuring water in paragraph 6.3.5 shall be

applicable here also.

4.2 Mortar

4.2.1 Preparation of Mortar

Unless otherwise specified the cement rnprtar used in masonry works shall be cement mortar

mix 1:4 (one cement four sand by volume). Mixing shall be done thoroughly preferably in a

mechanical mixer. In such case, the cement and sand in the specified proportion shall be

mixed dry thoroughly in the mixer operated manually or by power. Water shall be added

gradually and wet mixing continued atleast for 2 minutes. Water should not be more than that

required for bringing the mortar to the required working consistency of 90 to 130 millimeters

as required in clause 9.1.1 of I.S. 22501-19891. The mix shall be clean and free from injurious

kind of soil, acid, alkali, organic matter or deleterious substances.

4.2.2 Time of use of Cement Mortar



Tirunelveli

74

Cement mortar shall be used as soon as possible after mixing before it has begun to set,

within 30 minutes after the water is added to the -dry mixture. Mortar unused for more than

30 minutes should not be used and shall be removed from the site or work. The cost of such

wasted mortar shall be borne by contractor. The use of retempered mortar will not be

permitted to be used for the masonry.

4.2.3 Tests of Mortar

Mortar test cubes shall be cast for the mortar used on the work and shall be tested in

accordance with Appendix-A of I.S. 2250-1965 code of practice for preparation and use of

Masonry mortars. Such cubes shall develop a compressive strength of atleast 50 Kgs.Sq.cm

for cement mortar mix, 1:5 and 75 kgs./Sq cm for mortar mix 1:4.

Mortar not conforming to the specifications will be ejected and the cost of such wasted mortar

shall be borne by the contractor.

4.2.4 Measurement and Payment

Cement mortar will not be measured and paid separately and its cost including cost of

materials, mixing, transporting and placing shall be included in the unit price per cubic metre

bid herefar in the bill of quantities of the contract for the relevant finished item of work for

which cement mortar mix mentoined in the above paragraph is required.

4.3 Stone Masonry

4.3.1 General

Stone masonry in General shall conform to the requirements of I.S. 1597 code of practice for

construction of stone masonry (Part-1)1967 and IS 1127-1970 for rubble stone masonry,

part-II 1967 Ashar Masonry. I.S. 1129-1972 specification for dressing natural building stones.

In the absence of further definition cut stone masonry shall be executed with a fine dressing

for the face. By fine tooled dressing or fine dressing is meant the finest surface which can be

given to a stone with a chisel and without rubbing.

Mortar

Should the mortar perish i.e., become dry, white or powder through neglect of watering, the

work shall be pulled down and rebuilt at the contractor's expense or should the contractor fail

to cure the work to the satisfaction of the officer in charge of the work, the latter may get the

work done at the risk and cost of the contractor.

All masonry shall be washed clean on completion and all stains due to lime or other materials

shall be removed from the face.

Moving Stone after it has been placed upon the Mortar Bed

If it is necessary to move a stone after it has been placed on the mortar bed, it should be

lifted clear and reset. Attempt must never be made to slide it over stone already laid. Care

must be taken not to distrub joints already laid when handling or moving stone.

Bed Plates



Tirunelveli

75

Bed plates shall be laid in all cases under the ends of beams, girders, roof trusses, etc. The

bed plates shall be of sizes specified or ordered by the Engineer-in-charge. In all important

cases cut stone or reinforced concrete blocks will be used and the size and quantity detailed

and included under the relevant item of work. In all other cases where cut stone or reinforced

concrete bed plates are not demanded, the contractor shall supply large stone of size and

dressing as ordered by the Engineer-in-charge and he will not be paid any extra rate above

the contract rate for the wall masonry for such bed plates.

4.3.2 Size of Stone

The length of the stones shall not exceed three times the height nor shall the stones be than

twice as long as height plus one joint. No stones shall be less in breadth than the base shall

not be greater than 3/4th thickness of the wall nor less than 20 centimetres.

4.3.3 Dressing of the Stone for coursed rubble masonry

The stones to be used for the faces of the masonry shall be hammer dressed. A hammer

dressed stone also known as hammed faced stone shall have no short and irregular corners

and shall have a comparatively even surface so as to fit well in the masonry. Unless otherwise

specified the bushing on the face shall not be more than 40 millimetres on the exposed face.

Other stone surfaces like rock faced stone surface, or punched stone surface, or closed pitched

stone surface, are to be brought out in dressing as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.

4.3.4 Laying of stones for Random Rubble Masonry

The Masonry shall be laid tolines, levels, curves, shapes shown in the drawings.

Stones in the hearting shall be laid on their broadest face.

Stratified stones must be laid on their natural beds. All bed joints shall be normal to the line of

pressure upon them.

In battered walls, the beds of the stones and the planes of course should be at right angles to

the batter.

The Courses of Random rubbles the Masonry shall ordinarily be predetermined. Where there is

to be variation in the depth of courses, larger stones shall be placed in the lower the thickness

of course decreasing gradually towards the top of the wall. The variation in depth of courses

shall be adopted after the approval of the Engineer-in-charge.

The stones shall thoroughly be wetted before placing in position in the masonry and before

covering with mortar to prevent absorption of water from mortar. The bed which is to receive

the stones shall be cleaned, wetted and covered with a layer of fresh mortar to a smaller

length so that stones can be laid before the mortar has set. All stones shall be bedded full in

mortar and the vertical joints filled with mortar. The stones so set in the mortar should be

settled carefully in place with a wooden mallet immedietly on placement and solidly bedded in

mortar before it has set. Clean chips and spatis shall be wedged into the mortar joints

wherever necessary. Such wedging should not disturb face stones. No dry or hollow space

shall be left anywhere in the masonry and each stone shall have all the embedded faces



Tirunelveli

76

completely covered with mortar. Pouring of water to the mortar laid on the joints and stones is

prohibited.

Face work and hearting shall be brought up evenly but the top or each course shall not be

leveled up by use of flat chips. The face stores shall be as described in para 4.3.5.

In case of any stone already set in mortar is distributed, or the joints broken the stone shall

be taken out without disturbing the adjoining stones and joints, the mortar thoroughly cleaned

from the joints and the stone reset in fresh mortar. Attempts shall never be made to shade

one stone over another already laid.

Shaping and dressing shall be done before the stone is laid in the work. No dressing and

hammering which will loosen the masonry will be permitted after it is once placed.

The face stones shall be squared on all joints with beds horizontal and unless otherwise

ordered by the Engineer-in-charge they shall be set in regular courses of uniform thickness

from bottom to top throughout. No face stone shall be less than 200 millimeters for 450mm

thick walls and 250 mm for 600 mm thick walls. More than half the quantity of stones shall

each have a volume of more than l/70 cubic metre 1150 cubic metre and 1135 cubic metre

being used in for walls of 400 mm,450 mm and 600 mm thickness respectively. The bed and

vertical joints of the stone shall be hammer dressed square with the face for a width ofnot less

than 75 mm and 40 mm onwards from the face respectively. Bushing shall not project more

than 40 mm in faces.

Unless otherwise ordered by Engineer-in-charge the height of each course shall be the height

of the stone used in the course. Stones of different depths should not be used. Height of each

course shall not exceed breadth at face nor thickness inwards.

The face stone shall be laid alternately in headers and stretchers, so as to break joints by

atleast 75 mm. Headers shall project atleast 100 mm beyond the stretchers. The joints should

not exceed l2 mm in thickness.

In walls upto a width of 600 mm bond stones running through the wall shall be provided at

intervals of 1.8 mts clear in every course. For walls thicker than 600 mm a line of headers

each header over lapping the other by 150 mm or more shall be provided from front to back

at 1.8 mts. intervals in every course. Care shall be taken not to place the bond stones of

successive courses over each other. The positions of bond stones shall be marked with paint

on both the faces for identification and verification.

All connected masonry in a structure shall be carried up neatly at one uniform level throughout

but when breaks are unavoidable, the masonry shall be raked in sufficiently long steps for

facilitating joining of old and new work. The stepping of the raking shall not be more than 45

degrees with the horizontal.

For masonry hearting, all stones, chips, spails etc, shall be washed clean with water before

use to ensure a good bond between the stone and the mortar. The interior of the masonry

shall be filled in with good flat bedded stones set as close as possible and well covered with

mortar. Chips and spails of stone should be covered with mortar around, should be wedged in



Tirunelveli

77

the mortar joints wherever necessary,such that there are no hollow spaces, any where in the

masonry joints nor the mortar joints are thicker than specified.

4.3.5 Dressing of stones for Random Rubble Masonry

The face stone shall be hammer dressed in the face, sides and the beds to enable it to come

into close proximity with the neighbouring stone. The bushing in the faces shall not project

more than 40 mm on an exposed face and 12 mm on a face to be plastered. Stones with

round surface shall not be used in construction.

4.3.6. Laying of Stones for Random Rubble Masonry

The laying of stones for Random Rubble Masonry is same as described in paragraph 4.3.4.

expect that the stones to be used for face shall be stones as described in paragraph 4.3.5.

4.4.Curing

All masonry surfaces shall be treated as specified to prevent loss of moisture from mortar until

the required curing period is elapsed or until prior to placement of other masonry or concrete

or backfill against surfaces. The contractor shall make his own arrangements to procure and

convey water for curing.

All masonry built with cement Mortar shall be kept watered continuously for a minimum period

of two weeks from the date of construction. Watering shall be done carefully so as not to wash

out the mortar, joints or disturb the masonry in any manner.

If the contractor fails to do curing to the satisfaction of the officer in charge of the work, the

latter will either make arrangement to our the masonry at the risk and cost of the contractor

or order the masonry to be pulled down. The masonry so pulled down should be rebuilt by the

contractor at his own cost.

4.5 Measurement And Payment

a. Measurement

The measurement for coursed rubble Masonry shall be to the lines shown in the drawings, 10

millimetre thickness from face will be measured as coursed Rubble Masonry in cement mortar

mix 1:4 and the balance thickness for the wall will be measured as Random Rubble Masonry in

cement mortar 1:4.



Tirunelveli

78

b. Payment

Payment for coursed rubbled masonry in cement mortar mix 1:4 shall be made at the unit

prices bid therefor in the bill of quantities which unit price shall inclose cost with conveyance

of all natterials, dressing charges, cost of mixing mortar, laying the masonry and curing and

all incidental charges therefore required for satisfactory construction of the coursed Rubble

Masonry.

Payment for Random Rubble Masonry in cement mortar mix 1:4 shall be made at the unit

price bid therefor in the bill of quantities which unit price shall includes cost and conveyance of

materials, dressing charges, cost of mixing mortar, laying the masonry and curing and all

incidental charges therefor required for sarisfactory construction of the Random Rubble

Masonry.

c. Dismantling The Masonry and Concrete in Cement Mortar of The Damaged

Structures or Structure to be Rehabilitated

Structures defined in the schedule for rehabilitation shall be dismantled down to groung level

or bottom of foundation or the posts iron works etc. which are specified in the schedule item.

All materials obtained for dismantling shall be the property of the Government. The Stone

obtained during dismantling, shall be separated out and stacked or stored, properly as

directed by the Engineer-in-charge and should be accounted for.

Special care shall be taken that the materials are not damaged in the process of dismantling.

The value of materials broken or damaged, shall be recovered from the contractor. When

dismantling is done for a portion of the structure remaining part of the sturcture should not be

damaged. If damaged, the dismantling and reconstruction will be done at the cost of the

contractor.

All seviceable materials shall be removed and stacked or disposed off as specified.

For dismantling of structure blasting operation should not be resorted to.



Tirunelveli

79

SECTION – 5

PLASTERING AND POINTING

5.1 Materials

5.1.1 Sand for Mortar for plastering and Pointing

a. General

Sand shall generally conform to specification given in paragraph 7.1.6 except that the sand for

preparation of Mortar for plastering and pointing shall conform to the following gradition,

shown in Table 6 (A) as per IS 1542-1977.

Table 5 (A)

Requirement of Grading for sands for External Plastering and Rendering

I.S. Sieve Designation Percentage by weight passing I.S.

Sieve

10.00 mm 100

4.75 mm 95 to 100

2.46 mm 95 to 100 1.10 mm 90 to 100

600 microns 80 to 100

300 microns 20 to 65 150 microns 0 to 50

The procurement of sand for mortar for plastering and pointing shall conform to the

specifications given in paragraph 6.3.8.

b. Cost

The cost of sand for mortar for plastering and pointing will not be measured and paid

separately and the cost of sand including the cost of stripping and transporting and storing

and royalty charges shall be included in the unit price per cu.m bid therefar in the relevant

item of work in the bill of quantities for which this sand is required.

5.1.2 Cement

The specification and conditions specified for supply of cement in paragraph 7.1.3. shall be

applicable here also. Ordinary portiand cement conforming to IS 269-1976 shall be used for

preparation of mortar for plastering, pointing and for masonry work. In the event of

nonavailability of ordinary portland cement, portland pozzoklana cement conforming to IS

1489-1976 may be used with the approval of Engineer-in-charge.

5.1.3 Water

The specification and condition specified for procurement of water in paragraph 7.1.5 shall be

applicable here also.

5.2 Mortar

5.2.1 Preparation of Mortar for plastering work



Tirunelveli

80

Unless otherwise specified the cement mortar used in plastering work shall be in cement

mortar 1:3 (one cement, three sand by volume).

The other specifications and conditions enunciated in paragraph 5.2.1 shall apply for this

mortar for plastering work also.

5.2.2 Preparation of Mortar For Pointing

The cement mortar used in pointing work shall be cement mortar mix 1:4 (one cement four

sand by volume).

The other specifications and conditions enunciated in paragraph 4.2.1. shall apply for this

mortar for pointing of work also.

5.3 Plastering with cement Mortar (1:4 One Cement three sand by volume) 2Omm thick

5.3.1 Preparation of surface

The roughening of the background improves the bond of plaster. All joints shall be thouroughly

raked. After roughening the surface, care shall be taken to moisten the surface sufficiently

before plastering as otherwise freshly exposed surface may tend to absorb considerable

amount of water from the plaster. The surfaces shall be wetted evenly before applying the

plaster. Care shall be taken to see that the surface is not too dry as this may cause lack of

adhesion or excessive suction of water from the plaster. A fog spray may be used for this

work. As far as possible, the plaster work shall not be done under hot sun.

5.3.2 Laying,of plastering with cement mortar 1:3 (one cement three sand by volume)

2Omm thick

The mortar used for plastering shall be stiff enough to cling and hold when laid. TO ensure

even thickness and true surface, plaster shall be aplied in patches of 150 mm x 150 mm of the

required 20 mm thickness at not more than 2 metres intervals horizontally and vertically over

the entire surface to serve as guides. The surface of these guides shall be truly in the plane of

the to be finished plaster surface and truly plumpl. The mortar shall then be applied to the

surface to be plastered between the guides with a trowel. Each trowel full of mortar shall

overlap and sufficient pressure shall be used to force it into thorough contact with the surface.

On relatively smooth surfaces, the mortar shall be dashed on with the trowel to ensure

adequate bond. The mortar shall be applied to a thickness slightly more than that specified,

using a string, stretched out between the guides. This shall then be brought to a true surface

by working with a long wooden float with small-motion. The surface shall be periodically

checked with a string stretched accross it. Finally the surface shall be rendered smooth with a

small wooden float, over working shall be avoided. All corners arises and junctions shall be

brought truly to a line with the necessary rounding or chambering.

If it is necessary to suspend the work at the end of the day it shall be left in a clean horizontal

or vertical line not nearer than 150 mm from any corner or arises or on parapet tops or on

cooings etc. when recommencing the work, the edges of the old work shall be scraped clean

and treated with cement slurry before the new plaster is laid adjacent to it. After the first coat

is done it shall be kept undisturbed for the next 24 hours and thereafter kept moist and not to

be permitted to dry until the final rendering is applied.



Tirunelveli

81

After the plaster has sufficiently hardened cement slurry with cream like consistency shall be

applied as thinly and evenly and rubbed to a fine condition.

The finished surface shall be cured with winter for a minimum period of 14 days.

Should the mortar crack or perish, the work shall be removed and redone at the contractors

expense or should contractor fails to cure the work to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-

charge the later may cure the work at the risk and cost of the contractor.

All portions which sound hallow when tapped or found to be soft or otherwise defective shall

be cut out in regular shape and redone as directed by the Engineer in charge.

5.4 Pointing to R.R. Masonry Cement Mortar Mix 1:2

5.4.1 Preparation of surface

The joints in the masonry shall be racked out to a depth not less than the width of the joint or

as directed when the mortar is green. Joints shall be brushed clean of dust and loose sarticles

with a stiff brush. The area shall then be washed and the joint thoroughly wetted before

pointing is commenced. Normally for Random Rubble masonry, simultaneous pointing will be

done unless otherwise specified.

5.4.2 Flush pointing with cement mortar mix 1: for Random rubble masonry

The pointing to be done shall be flush pointing with cement mortar 1:2 (one cement, two sand

by volume). The mortar shall be pressed into the raked out joints according to the type of

pointing required. The mortar shall not be spread over the corners, edges or surface of the

masonry. The pointing shall be finished as detailed below. The mortar shall be finished off

flush and level with the edges of the stones, so as to give smooth appearance. The edges shall

be neatly trimmed with a trowel and a straight edge. When finished the mortar pointing shall

be restricted to the width of the joints and all superfluous mortar shall be removed with a

trowel. The work shall be executed as rapidly as possible (and not again touched after it has

begun to set) and kept wet for a minimum period of 4 days thereafter. The pointing shall also

be cured for 14 days.

5.5 Measurement and payment

a. Plastering

The measurement of plastering will be in units of square metres and it shall be paid at the

relevant unit prices bid per one square metres of plastering in the bill of quantities which unit

price shall include the cost of materials, their conveyance, charges for preparation of mortar

including mixing charges and charges for performing the plastering work as illustrated in this

division including curing.

pointing

Unless specified in the contract document, no separate payment will be made for pointing

random rubble masonry and coursed rubble masonry and the unit prices for the rubble

masonry in the bill of quantities, shall include the cost of materials, their conveyance, charges

for preparation of morter including mixing charges and charges for performing the pointing

work as illustrated in this division including curing.



Tirunelveli

82

SECTION - 6

6.1 General concrete Requirements

6.1.1 Composition

a. General

The I.S. 456- 1978 code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete shall be followed.

Concrete shall be composed of cement, sand, coarse aggregate water and admixtures (if any)

as specified and all well mixed in batching plant by weight or in concrete mixer and brought to

the proper consistency. The contractor shall provide such means and equipments as are

required to accurately determine and control the relative amounts of various material required

for the concrete. Such means, the equipment and its operation shall be subject, at this time,

to the approval of the Engineer-in-charge. The measuring and wighing equipment shall

operate with the degree of accuracy specified by the Engineer in charge.

For works in which water tightness is required the specification in I.S.3370 (part 1 & Part 11)

1965 para 1 to 10 shall be applied.

Mixing

Concrete shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer and shall be as dense as possible, plastic

enough to consolidate well and stiff enough to stay in place on the slopes.

Mixing shall be continued until there is a uniform mixing of the materials and the concrete is

uniform in colour and consistency. The time of mixing shall be as shown in table of IS 457-

1957 reproduced below:

Capacity of Mixer Minimum time of Mixing

Natural Aggregates Manufactured Aggregates

All mixers 2 minutes 2 ½ minutes

Concrete classification

It is related to the specified 28 days cornpressive the Table below:-

Classification of Max. size Aggregates Characteristic

concrete (JS.456-1978) Compressive Strength

N/mm2 for 15 em

cube at 28 days

1 . M-10 40 10

2. M-15 40/20 15

3. M-20 20 20

A minimum of 3 test specimens shall be made for each 120 m3 of each class of concrete for

given age. There shall be atleast 3 test specimens for each day of concreting even if only a

few cubic metres of the particular concrete is manufactured in a day.

The test shall satisfy the following criteria



Tirunelveli

83

i. The average strength of any 3 consecutive sample shall be greater than the specffied

strengths;

ii. The overall coefficient of variation for any ten consecutive sample strength shall be

less than 15%;

iii. Not more than 10% of the specimen strengths shall be less than 85% of the specified

strength.

Note: The mix shall be designed to produce the grade of concrete having the required workability and

characteristic strength not less than appropriate values given in above table.

b. Nominal maximum size of aggregates

For sizes of aggregates IS 383-1970 shall apply. The coarse aggregate to be used in concrete

shall be as large as practicable, consistent with required strength, starting of reinforcement

and embedded items, and placement thickness. The size of the coarse aggregate to be used

will be determined by the Engineer-in-charge and may vary incrementally according to the

conditions encountered in each concrete placement. Nominal maximum size of aggregate for

concrete in structures shall be as indicated in the relevant drawings appended to the contract

documents. Smaller coarse aggregate than specified shall be used where the opinion of the

Engineer-in-charge that proper placement of concrete is impracticable with the size of the

aggregate specified in the drawings.

Designation of size Nominal size range

20 mm aggregate 4.75 to 20 mm

40 mm aggregate 20 mm to 40 mm

generally coarse aggregate of maximum nominal size of 40 mm shall be used in M 7.5 and of

20 mm size in M 10 grade concrete bed.

C. Mix proportions

The proportions of various ingredients to be used in the concrete for different items of the

work are given in the bill of quantities. In proportioning concrete, the quantity of both cement

and aggregate should be determined by mass. Water shall be either measured by volume in

calibrated tanks or weighed. Wherever the quantity of concrete involved in a particular work is

small, nominal mix concrete may be allowed with the specific approval of the Engineer-in-

charge who may also allow volumetric batching/proportioning for the restricted quantity. The

proportion of materials for nominal size concrete shall be in accordance with Table.3, page 50

of IS 456-1978. All measuring equipment shall be maintained in a clean serviceable condition

and their accuracy periodically checked. Adjustments shall be made as directed to obtain

concrete having suitable workability, impermeability, density, strength and durability with out

the use of excessive cement. The acceptance of rejection of concrete shall be as per the

acceptance criteria laid down in clause 15 of I.S.456-1978.



Tirunelveli

84

The net water cement ratio exclusive of water absorbed by the aggregae shall be sufficiently

low to provide adequate durability in concrete. The water cement ratio for various grades of

concrete shall be as determined and ordered by the Engineer-in-charge.

Admixtures of pozzolana, if ordered, shall comform to the requirements specified in I.s. 9103-

1979 (Indian Standard Specification for admixtures for concrete).

Test Strength of samples

The test strength of sample shall be the average of the strength of three specimen. The

individual variation should not be more than 56% of the average.

Standard Deviation

i) Standard deviation based on test result

a) Number of test results:-

The total number of the results required to constitute an acceptable regard for the calculation

of standard deviation shall be not less than 30 atttempts shall be made to obtain the 30 test

results, as early as possible, when mix is used for the first time.

(ii) Determination of standard deviation:-

(a) Concrete of each grade shall be analysed separately to determine its standard deviation

(b) The standard deviation of concrete of a given grade shall be calculated using the following

formula from the results of individual test of concrete of that grade

Estaimated standard deviation = 1

2

−

∆∑n

Where T = deviation of the individual test strength from the average

n = number of sample test results

Where sufficient test results for a particular grade of concrete are not available the value of

standard deviation given in the following table may be assumed.

Table

Grade of Concrete Assumed standard Deviation-(N/mm2)

M10 ……………………………………………………………………….2.3

M15 ……………………………………………………………………….3.5 M20 ……………………………………………………………………….4.6

M25 ……………………………………………………………………….5.3

Acceptance Criteria

The Concrete.shall be deemed to comply with the strength requirements if:

a. every sample has a test strength not less than the characteristic value; or

b. the strength of one or more samples though less than the characteristic value, is in each

case not less than the greater of:

1. the characteristic strengthing minus 1:35 times the standard deviation: and



Tirunelveli

85

2. 0.80 times the characteristic strength; and the average strength of all the samples is not less than the characteristic strength plus

=

mplesnumberofsa

65.165.1 = times the standard deviation

The concrete shall be deemed not to comple with the strength requirements if:

a. the strength of any samples is less than the greater of:

1. the characteristic strength minus 1.35 times,.the standard deviation; and

2. 0.80 times the characteristic strength; or

b. the average strength of all the samples is less than the characteristic strength plus

=

mplesnumberofsa

365.1 times the standard deviation

Concrete is liable to be rejected if it is porous or honeycombed; its placing has been

interrupted without providing a proper construction joint. However, the hardended concrete may be

accepted after carrying out suitable remedial measures to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.

d. Consistencies

The slump of concrete at the placement shall range from 25 mm to 50 mm with vibrations

achieved through the vibrators to the satisfaction of Engineer-in-charge. The slump test shall conform

to IS 1199-1959.

1. Reinforced cement concrete

S.No. Place Condition Degree of workability value of work ability

1. Correcting of lightly Medium 25mm to 75 mm

reinforced sections slump for 2Omm

without vibration or 20 mm Aggregate heavily reinforced

sections with vibrations.

2. Concreting of heavily High 75mm to 125 mm reinforced sections Slump for 20 mm

without Vibration aggregate

ii. For plain concrete work. Slump requirements mentioned in item 1 above are applicable.

iii.Lining with slip form machine-60 to 70 mm and 50 mm for concrete paver finisher.

If the specified slump is exceeded at the placement, the concrete is unacceptable. The

Engineer-in-charge reserves the right to require lesser slump whenever concrete of such lesser slump

can be consolidated readily into place by means of vibration specified by the Engineer-in-charge. The

use of any equipment which will not readily handle and place concrete of the specified slump will not

be permitted.

To maintain concrete at proper consistency, the amount of water and sand batched for

concrete shall be adjusted to compensate for any variation in the moisture content or grading of the

aggregates as they enter the mixture. Addition of water to compensate for stiffening of the concrete



Tirunelveli

86

after mixing but before placing will not be permitted. Uniformity in concrete consistency from batch to

batch will be required.

6.3.2. Concrete quality Control Measures and concrete quality Assurance Test programme

a. Concrete quality Control Measures

The contractor shall be responsible for providing quality concrete to ensure compliance of the

contract requirements.

b. Making and curing concrete test specimens in the field: will confirm to I.S. 516-1959.

c. Capping cylindrical concrete specimens will conform to I.S.516-1959.

d. Compressive strength of concrete specimens will conform to I.S.,516-1959 and para 16 (16.1, 16.2 & 16.3) of I.S. 456-1978-core testing.

a. Sampling Procedure and Frequency

A random sampling procedure shall be adopted to ensure that each concrete batch has a

reasonable chance of being tested., i.e. the sampling should be spread over the entire period of

concreting and should cover all mixing units.

b. Frequency

The minimum frequency of sampling of concrete of each grade shall be in accordance with the

following:

Quantity of concrete M3 Number of samples

1 to 5 1

6 to 15 2 16 to 30 3

31 to 50 4

51 and above 4 plus one additional sample for each

additional 50 M3 or part thereof.

Note: Atleast one sample shall be taken during each shift.

Test Facilities

The Samples shall be collected and the tests conducted in the presence of the engineer or his

authorised representatives. Alternatively the contractor may test the materials during execution of

works at the laboratories approved by the Engineer at the contractors own cost provided that the

samples are collected and given proper identification marks in the presence of the engineer or his

authorised representative.

6.3.3. Cement

a. General

Cement shall conform to clause 4 of I.S. 456-1978 for the purpose of specifications. Cement

used shall be one of the following two types with prior approval of the Engineer-in- charge.

1. ordinary or low heat portiand cement conforming to I.S.269-1967 (I.S. Specification for

ordinary and low heat portiand cement third revision).



Tirunelveli

87

2. The provisions of this paragraph apply to cement for use in cast-in-place concrete required

for items such as concrete pipes, precast concrete structural members and other precast concrete

products, for grout and mortar and for other items is provided for in the applicable paragraphs of

these specifications covering the items for which such portiand cement is required.

The contractor shall make his own arrangements for the procurement of cement for the work

either bagged or in bulk as required by specification of the works. Each shipment of bagged cement

shall be stored separately so that it may readily be distinguished from other shipment and shall be

stored in a dry enclosed area protected from moisture. Storage of materials shall be as described in

I.S.4082-1977 (I.S. Recommendation on stacking and storage of construction materials at site). To

prevent undue aging of bagged cement after delivery, the contractor shall use bags of cement in the

chronological order in which they were delivered to the job site. All storage facilities shall be subject to

aoproval of the Engineer-in-charge and shall be constructed to prevent easy access for inspection, and

identification.

b. Acceptancy of cement

Tested cement will be supplied by the contractor according to clause 1 0. 1 of I.S. 269-1976.

c. Recovery of Cost of cement in wastee-lconcrete etc.

The cost of cement used in wasted concrete, in replacement of damaged or defective concrete,

in extra concrete required as a result of over excavation, and in concrete placed by the contractor's

operations shall be borne by the Contractor himself. No extra payment will be made to contractors for

such additional quantity.

6.3.4. Admixtures

The contractor shall use Air Entraining admixtures as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

Admixtures shall be of uniform consistently and quality and shall be maintained at the job site

at uniform strength of solution. Admixtures shall be batched in liquid form in containers capable of

measuring at one time the full quantity of each admixture required for each batch chemical

admixtures which harm the quality and strength of concrete shall not be used in the concrete.

Admixtures to be used in concrete shall confirm to I.S. 9103-1979 Indian Standard

Specifications for Admixtures for concrete.

6.3.5. Water

The water used in making a curing of concrete, mortar and grout shall be free from

objectionable quantities of silt, organic matter injurious amounts of oils, acids, salts and other

impurities etc. as per I.S. specification No.456-1978.

The Engineer-in-charge will determine whether or not such quantities of impurities are

objectionable.

Such determination will usually be made by comparison of compressive strength, water

requirement, time of set and other properties of concrete made with distilled or very clean water

concrete made with the water proposed for use. Permissible limits for solids when tested in

accordance with I.S. 3025-1964 shall be as tabulated below.

PERMISSIBLE LIMITS FOR SOLIDS IN WATER



Tirunelveli

88

1. Organic Maximum permissible limit 200 mgliitre

2. Inorganic 300 mgliitre 3. Sulphate (as So4) 500 mgliitre

4. Chlorides (as CL) 2000 mgliitre for plain concrete work and

1000 mgliitre for RCC work..

5. Suspended matter 2000 rng/litre

If any water to be used in concrete, mortar, or grout is suspected by the Engineer-in-charge of

exceeding the permissible limits for solids, samples of water will be obtained and tested by the

Engineer-in-charge in accordance with I.S. 3025-1964.

6.3.6. Sand (Fine Aggregate)

a. General

The term sand is used to designate aggregate most of which passes 4.75 millimeter I.S. sieve

and contains only so much coarser materials as permitted in clause 4.3 of I.S.383-1970. Sand shall be

predominantly natural sand which may be supplemented with crushed sand to make up deficiencies in

the natural sand gradings.

All sand shall be furnished by the contractor from any approved sources specified in the

contract.

Sand as delivered to the batching plant. Shall have a uniform and stable moisture content.

Determination of moisture content shall be made as frequently as possible, the frequency for a given

job being determined by the Engineer-in-charge according to weather conditions (I.S. 456-1978).

b. quality

The sand shall consist of clean, dense, durable, uncoated rock fragments, as per I.S. 383-

1979.

Sand may be rejected if it fails to meet any of the following quality requirements.

Organic Impurities in sand

Colour no darker than the specified standard in clause 6.2.2 of I.S. 23286 part 11 1963.

(Indian Standard method of test for aggregates for concrete parts estimation of deleterious materials

and organic impurities).

Sand shall be screened before use. If sand brought to site is not clean it must be washed clean in water. Fine drift sand or sea sand or sand containing saline impurities shall on no account to be

used.

Sodium Sulphate Test for Soundness

The sand to be used shall pass a sodium or magnesium sulphate accelerated test as specified

in I.S. 2386 (Part-V) 1963 for limiting loss of weight.

Specific Gravity: 2.6 Minimum

Deleterious substances

The amounts of deleterious substances in sand shall not exceed the maximum permissible

limits prescribed in table 1 clause 3.2.1 of I.S.383-1970 and shall be described as Fine aggregates,

grading zones – I,II,III and IV, sand complying with the requirements of any of the four grading zones



Tirunelveli

89

is suitable for concrete. But, sand conforming to the requirements of grading zone-IV shall not be used

for reinforced cement concrete work.

6.3.7 Coarse Aggregate

a. General

For the Purposes of these specifications the term "coarse Aggregate" designate clean well

graded aggregate most of which is retained on 4.75 mm t.S. Sieve and containing only so such finer

material as permitted for various types described under clause 2.2 of I.S. 383-1970. Coarse

Aggregate for concrete shall consist of uncrushed stone, or crushed stone and partially uncrushed and

crushed stone.

Coarse Aggregate for concrete shall be furnished by the Contractor from the approved

quarries specified in the contract documents. The contractor shall unless otherwise specified in the

tender notice and subsequently on this basis in contract be responsible for payment of seignorages,

quarry fees etc., on all materials.

Coarse Aggregate as delivered to the building plant shall generally have uniform and stable

moisture content. In case of variations, clause 9.2.3 of I.S. 456-1978 shall govern during batching.

b. Quality

The coarse aggregate shall consist of naturally occurring (crushed or uncrushed) stones, and

shall be hard, strong, durable clear and free from veins and adherent coating, and free from injuious

amounts of distintegrated pieces, alkali, vegetable matter and other deleterious materials. Coarse

aggregate will be rejected if it fails to meet any of the following requirements.

1. Los-Angeles Abrasion Test

The abrasion value of Aggregates when tested in accordance with the method specified in I.S.

2386 (Part IV) using Los-Angles machine shall not exceed 30% for Aggregate to be used in concrete

for wearing surface and 50% for aggregate to be used in other concrete.

2. Aggregate Crushing Strength Test

Aggregate crushing value, when determined in accordance with I.S. 2386 (Part IV) 1963. The

aggregate impact value shall not exceed 45% by weight for aggregates used for concrete for other

than wearing surfaces, and 30% by weight for concrete for wearing surfaces such as runways, roads

and payments.

3. Soundness Test

The coarse aggregate to be used for all concrete works shall pass a sodium or magnesium

sulphate accelerated soundness test specified in I.S. 2381 (Part V) 1963 and the average loss of

weight after 5 cycles shall not exceed the limits specified in clause 3.6 of I.S. 383- 1970.

4. Specific Gravity: should be 2.60 Minimum

5. Deleterious Material

The maximum quantity of deleterious materials in coarse aggregates shall not exceed the

limits specified in Table 1 of I.S. 383-1970 When tested in accordance with I.S. 2386-1963.



Tirunelveli

90

c. Separation

The coarse aggregate shall be separated into nominal sizes during production of the

aggregate. Just prior to batching the coarse aggregate shall be rewashed by pressure spray and finish

screened on multidesk vibrating screen capable of simultaneously removing undersized and oversized

aggregate from each of the nominal aggregates entering the batches occured during intermittent and

batching then a dewatering screen will be required after the finished screens to remove the excess

free moisture. Finish screen shall be mounted over the batching plant or on the ground adjustant to

the batching plant. Finished screen shall be so mountered that the vibration of this screen will not be

transmitted to batching bins or scales and wiii not affect the accuracy of the weighing equipment in

any other manner.

The method and rate of feed for finish screening shall be such that the screen will not be

overloaded and will result in a finished product which meets the grading requirements of these

specifications. Coarse aggregate shall be fed to the finished screen in a combination of alteration of

nominal sizes which will not cost noticeable accumulation of poorly graded coarse aggregate in any

bin. The finish screened aggregate shall pass directly to the individual batching bin in such a manner

has to minimise breakage. Below 2.36 mm materials passing through the finish screens, shall be

wasted unless it is tooted back through a sand classifier in a manner which causes uniform blending

with the natural sand being processed. Water from finish screening shall be drained in such a manner

as to prevent aggregate wash water from enterin the batching bins and weighing hoppers. Washing

and finish screening requirements shall be subject to approval by the Engineer-in- charge.

Coarse agrregate for concrete shall be separated into various nominal maximum sizes

specified in the relevant drawings. Separation of the coarse aggregate into the specified sizes after

finish screening shall conform to the grading requirements specified in table - 2 of I.S. 383-1970,

when tested in accordance with I.S. 2386--(Part-1) 1963 (Method of test for aggregate for concrete

part -1) particle size and shape.

Coarse aggregate for mass concrete may be separated as previously herein specified.

Separations of the Coarse aggregate into the various sizes shall be sue that when tested in accordance

with I.S. 386 (part-]) 1963 shall conform to the requirements specified in Table- 3 of I.S. 383-1970.

Sieves used in grading tests will be standard mesh sieves conforming to I.S. 460 (part-]) 1978

(specification for test sieves part-1 wire cloth test sieves).

6.3.8 Production of sand and Coarse Aggregate

a. General

Sand and Coarse aggregate for concrete, and sand for mortar and grout, may be obtained by

the Contractor from the approved source shown in the contract documents.

Tests performed on samples of sand and coarse aggregate obtained from the approved

sources mentioned in the contract documents indicated that they are generally suitable. Well in

advance of their usage on the works, the contractor shall have his own testing of materials and satisfy

himself that they conform to the specification mentioned herein for use in the works.



Tirunelveli

91

No seperate payment will be made for such tests. If sand and coarse aggregate are to be

obtained from a deposit not previously tested and approved by the Engineer-in-charge. the Contractor

shall submit representative samples for pre-construction test and approval. not less than 60 days

before the sand and coarse aggregates are required for use. Each, sample shall approximately consist

of 100 kg. of material. In addition to pre-construction tests, the approval of deposits, the Engineer-in-

Charge may test the aggregates for their suitability during their processing. The Contractor shall

provide such facilities as may be necessary for procuring representative samples free of cost at the

aggregate processing plant at the batch plant. Final acceptance of aggregates will be based on the

samples taken from the batch plant or mixing platform.

But use and development of any such deposit shall be subject to the approval by the Engineer-

in-charge. Any royalties (seigniorage or other charges) required for materials taken from deposits not

owned by the State Government and controlled by the Department of Mines and Geology, Government

of India shall be paid by the Contractors.

b. Developing Aggregate Deposits

If the Deposit is owned by the State Government and controlled by the Department of Mines

and Geology, the portion of the deposit used shall be located and operated so as not to detract the

usefulnes of the deposit or any other property of the Government,and so as to preserve, in so far as

practicable. the future usefulnesson value of the deposit. The Contractor shall carefully clear the area

of deposit, from which the aggregates are to be produced, of trees, roots, bush sod, solid, unsuitable

sand and gravel and other objectionable matter. Materials including stripping, removed from deposits

owned by the Governmentand controlled by the Director of minessand Geology, Government of India

and not used in the work covered by these specifications shall be disposed off as directed.

Due to k the overil construction programme. it is quite likely that more than one contractor

may elect to use one of the sources named in the contract document. The Contractor shall be

responsible for coordinating his work such that it does not interfere with the operations of other

contractors who are also using any given source.

c. Processing Raw Materials

Processing of the raw materials shall include screening and washing as necessary to produce

sand and coarse aggregate conforming to the requirements of paragraphs 7.1.6 and 7.1.7 processing

of aggregates produced from any source owned by the State Government and controlled by the

Department of Mines and Geology shall be done at an approved site. Water used for washing

aggregate shall be free from objectionable quantities of salts, organic matter and other impurities.

Oversize metal may be crushed to correct aggregate particle size, and excess material in individual

coarse aggregate size fractions may be crushed to give the largest practical yield of usable concrete

aggregate.

Suitable types of crushers shall be used with the prior approval of the Engineer-in-charge for

producing coarse aggreates. Crusher fines produced in the manufacture of coarse aggregates may be

used in sand. Crushed stone, sand, crushed gravels and crusher fines if used shall be predominantly

cubical in shape and shall be blended uniformly with natural sand by routing them together through



Tirunelveli

92

sand classifier. Crusher coarse aggregate shall be blended uniformly with coarse aggregate by routing

both together through the classifying screens.

In the process of developing and producing aggregates from approved sources for work under

these specifications, the provisions of Environmental quality protection shall apply.

d. Cost

This shall be included in the applicable prices bid in the schedule for concrete filler road works

in which the aggregates are used, which prices shall include the cost of stripping and transporting and

storing materials. The Contractor shall not be entitled to ;any additional compensation for materials

wasted from a deposit. including crushed fines, excess materials of any of the sizes into which the

aggregates are required to be separated by the contractor, and materials which have been discarded

by the reasons of being above the maximum sizes specified for use.



Tirunelveli

93

6.3.9 Batching

a. General

The Contractor shall notify the Engineer-in-charge 24 hours before batching concrete. Unless

inspection is waived ineach case, batching shall be performed only in the presence of an Engineer

authorized by Engineer-in-charge.

The Contractor shall provide, maintain and operate the equipments as required to accurately

determine and control the prescribed amounts of the various materials entering the concrete mixers.

The quantities of cement sand and each size of coarse aggregate entering each batch of concrete shall

be determined by individual measurement. Cement has to be weighed separately.

The grading of aggregates will be controlled by obtaining the coarse aggregate in different

sizes and blending them in the right proportions. the different sizes and blending them in the right

proportions, the different sizes being stocked in separate stock piles, the materials shall be stock piled

a day before use. The grading of coarse and fine aggregates will be checked as fequently as directed

by the Engineer-in-charge. Water shall be added by weight or measured by volume in calibrated

tanks. The amount of added water shall be adjusted to compensate for any observed variations in the

moisture contents. Determinations of moisture content in the aggregate shall be in accordance with

I.S. 2386 (Part-111) 1963 (Indian Standard Method of test for aggregate for concrete Part-III specific

gravity test. The amount of surface water carried by aggregates will be; estimated in accordance with

Table-4 of I.S.456-1978.

When cements and aggregates are hauled from a central batching plant to the mixers each

batch shall be protected during transit to prevent loss and to limit the pre-hydration of cement.

Separate compartments with suitable covers shall be provided to protect the cements or they shall be

completely enfolded in and covered by the aggregates to prevent wind loss.

If cements are enfold in moist aggregates or otherwise exposed to moisture and delays occur

between batching and mixing, extra cement will be added to each batch. The extent of such extra

cement will be so as to attain the required quality. No separate payment shall be allowed for this

addition of extra cement.

b. Equipment

1. The batching plant to be used shall conform to the requirements of I.S. 4925-1968

(I.S.specifica,Lions for concrete batching and mixing plant). Tests for accuracy of measuring

equipment shall be made in the presence of Engineer-in-charge or his authorised Engineer and shall

be subject to his approval. In addition on to monthly tests the contractor shall perform additional tests

as and when requested by the Engineer-in-charge. The Contractor shall make such adjustments.

repairs or replacement as may be necessary to meet the specified requirements for accuracy of

measurement. All measuring equipment shall be maintained in a clean serviceable condition.

2. Each weighing unit shall be spring less and shall visibly register the actual weights during

the weighing operation and not just indicate when a prescribed weight has been obtained. Each batch

weight indictor and volumetric dispenser shall be in full view of the operator. Batching controls shall

be interlocked so that a new batch cannot be started until the weighing hoppers have been completely

emptied of the last batch and the scales register zero weight.



Tirunelveli

94

3. Equipment for conveying batched materials from weighing hoppers into the mixer shall be

constructed maintained and operated so as to prevent spillage of the batched materials and overlap of

batches.

4. Equipment for handling cement on the batching plant shall be constructed and operated so

as to prevent noticeable dust during the measuring and discharging of such each batch of maerials.

5. Aggregate batch bins shall be so constructed as to be self cleaning during drawdown.

6. Coarse aggregate shall be deposited in the batch bins directly over the discharge gates.

7. Convenient facilities shall be provided for readily and safely obtaining representative

samples of cements, sand and each size of coarse aggregate from the discharge stream between

batch bins and the weighing hoppers or between the batch hopper and mixer.

8. The water batching device shall be constructed so that the water will discharge quickly and

freely into the mixer without the objectionable dribble from the end of the discharge pipe and such

that leakage will not occur when the valves are closed. In addition, equipment shall be capable of

adjusting batch water by a little as possible and there shall be a means of accurately introducing small

increments of water into each mixer after batching for occasinal final tempering of the concrete.

9. The equipment shall be capable of adjusting to compensate for the varying moisture

content of the sand and coarse aggregate and to adjust the mix proportions as needed.

10.The contractor shall inform a batch plant supervisor prior to and after changes and

adjustments in batching equipment and control instrumentations.

6.3.10 Mixing

a. General

The Concrete ingredients shall be thogoughly mixed in mecahanical mixers designed to

postitively ensure uniform distribution of all the component materials through out the concrete at the

end of the mixing period. Mixing shall be done as per clause 9.3 of I.S.456-1978. The mixer should

comply with I.S. 1791-1985 (I.S. Specifications for batch type concrete mixers).

The concrete as discharged from the mixer, shall be uniform in composition and consistent

from batch to batch. Workability shall be checked at frequent intervals as per I.S. 1199-1959. Mixers

will be examined regularly by the Engineer-in-charge or his authorised Engineer for changes in

condition due to accumulation of hardened concrete or mortar or to wear of blades. The mixing shall

be continued until there is a uniform distribution of the materials so that the mass is uniform in colour

and consistency and to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge. If there is segregation after

unloading the concrete should be remixed.

Any mixer that at any time produces unsatisfactory mix, shall not be used until repaired. If

repair attempts are unsuccessful, a defective mixer shall be replaced. Batched size shall be atleast

10% of, but not in excess of the rate capacity of the mixer unless otherwise authorised by the

Engineer-in-charge.

b. Central Mixers



Tirunelveli

95

Water shall be admitted prior to and during charging of the mixer with all other concrete

ingredients. After all materials are in the mixer,each batch shall be mixed for not less than the time

specified by the Engineer-in-charge. The minimum mixing time shall be 2 minutes and as per para

6.3.1 (a). The minimum mixing time as required by the observations of the mix delivered from mixer.

Excessive over mixing which require addition of water to maintain the required concrete consistency

will not be permitted.

In addition to I.S. 1971-1968, the mixing equipment shall conform to the following further

requirements.

1. Plant configuration shall be such that the mixing of each mixer can be observed from a safe

location which can be easily rached from the control station. Provisions shall also be made so that the

operation can observe the concrete in the receiving hopper or bucket as it is being dumped from the

mixers.

2. Each mixer shall be controlled with a timing device which will indicate the mixing period and

assure a compliance of the required period of mixing.

3. The batch plant shall be equipped with an interlocking mechanism which will prevent

concrete batches from entering mixers which are not empty.

4. Truck Mixers

Each truck mixers shall be equipped with accurate water meter located between the supply

tank and mixture and having a dial or digital indicator and a reliable revolution counter, located near

the water meter, which can be readily reset to zero for indicating the total number of revolutions of

the drum from each batch. Each mixer shall have affixed there to a metal plate on which the drum

operations in terms of volume for both mixing and agitating and the maximum and minimum speeds

of rotation of the drum are plainly marked.

Mixing shall be continued for the minimum period specified, and may be increased and no of

revolutions, speed or the drum may be such that the mix as delivered from the mixer has uniform

distribution of materials and the mass is uniform in colour and consistency to the satisfaction of

Engineer-in-charge. In no case, shall the design water content be exceeded.

Concrete shall be discharged within half an hour after introduction of the mix water and

cement into the mixer. Each batch of concrete, when delivered at the job site from commercial ready

mix plants, shall be accompanied by a written certificate of batch weights and time of batching.

6.3.11 Temperature of Concrete

Fresh structural concrete and fresh canal lining concrete shall be place at temperature of

between 150C to 320C. During Hot or cold weather, the concreting should be done as per the

procedure set in I.S. 7861 (part -I) - 1975 or I.S. 7861 (part-II).



Tirunelveli

96

The temperature will be determined by placing a therometer in the concrete immediately after

sampling at the site of placement. The temperature of concrete at the batch plant shall be adjusted to

assure that the specified concrete temperature is attained at the placement.

In case of concrete in hot weather condition. the contractor shall employ effective means such

as precooling of aggregates and sprinkling water on aggregate piles and placing the concrete at night,

as necessary to maintain the temperature of the concrete as it is placed at the specified limit. The

methods of precooling shall be subject to approval by the Engineer-in-charge.

The contractor shall not be entitled for any additional compensation due to the foregoing

requirements.

6.3.12 Forms

a. General

Form shall be used wherever necessary, to confine the conrete and shaping it to the required

lines. If a type of form does not consistently perform in an acceptable manner, as determined by the

Engineer-in-charge, the type of form shall be changed and method of creation shall be modified by the

contractor subject to approval of the Engineer-in-charge.

Plumb and string lines shall be installed before, and maintained during concrete placement.

Such lines shall be used by the contractor's personnel and by the Engineer-in-charge and shall be in

sufficient number and properly installed as determined by the Engineer-in-charge. During concrete

placement, the contractor shall continuously monitor plumb and string lines, form positions and

immediately correct defeciencies.

Forms shall have sufficient strength to with-stand the pressure resulting from placement and

vibration of the concrete and shall be maintained rigidly in position. Where form vibrators are to be

used, forms shall be sufficiently rigid to effectively transmit energy from the form vibrators to be

concrete. While not damaging or altering the positions of forms. Forms shall be sufficiently tight to

prevent loss of mortar from the concrete. Chamfer strips shall be placed in the corners of forms and at

the top of wall placement to produce beveled edges on permanently exposed concrete surfaces.

Interior angle of inter-secting concrete surfaces and edgps of construction joints shall not be bevelled

except where indicated on the drawings.

Suitable struts of stiffeners of ties shall be used for the form work wherever necessary. All

supports shall be braced and cross braced into two directions. All splices and braces shall be secured

by bolting unless specially intended otherwise. All struts shall be firmly supported against settlement

and sliping, by suitable means as directed. All supports shall be cut square at both ends and firmly

supported against settlement and slipping. When the formwork is supported on soils, planks. sleepers

etc., shall be used to properly disperse the loads. In case, the supports rest on already completed

beam or slab, suitable props shall be provided under the latter.

a. The joint between the form work and existing concrete shall also be 'grant tight'. Forms

shall over lap the hardened concrete in the lift previously placed by not more than 75mm and shall be

tightened against the hardened concrete so that when concrete placement is resumed the forms will

not allow loss of mortar at the construction joint.



Tirunelveli

97

b. The form work shall be of well seasoned timber or steel. When timber forms are used, they

shall be lined, with mild sheet or other suitable smooth faced non-absorbent materials as specified.

Supports may be of timber or steel. Suitable wedges in pairs to facilitate adjustment and subsequent

releasing of forms shall be provided preferably at the upper end of the support. The details of the

proposed form work and supports shall be submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge and got approved

before erection.

c. In case of columns, retaining walls of deep vertical component the height of the column

shall facilitate any placement and compact in of conrete and suitable arrangement may be made for

securing the form to the already poured concrete for placing the subsequent lifts. No steel ties or

wires used for securing this form work shall be left exposed on the face of the finished work.

d. Suitable inserts for blackouts for electrical and other service fixtures where necessary shall

be provided in the required locations as specified.

e. Cleaning and oiling of forms at the time the concrete is placed in forms, the surfaces of the

forms shall be free from encrustations of mortar, grout or other foreign material. Before concrete is

placed, the surface of the forms shall be oiled with a commercial forms of oil.

f. Removal of Forms

The stripping of form work shall conform to clause 10.3 of I.S. 456-1978. The contractor shall

be liable for damage and injury caused by removing forms before the conerete has gained sufficient

strength. Forms on upper sloping faces of concrete such as forms on the water sides of warped

transitions, shall be removed as soon as the concrete has attained sufficient stiffness to prevent

sagging. Any needed repairs or treatment required on such sloping surfaces shall be performed at

once and be followed immediately by the specified curing.

To avoid excessive stresses in concrete that might result from swelling of forms. Wood for wall

openings shall be loosened as soon as the loosening can be accomplished damages to the concrete.

Forms for the openings shall be constructured so as to such loosening. Forms shall be removed with

care so as to avoid injury to and any concrete so damaged shall be repaired in accordance with

paragraph 6.3.21.

g. Cost

The cost of furnishing all materials and performing all work for constructing forms, including

any necessary treatment or coating of forms are to be included at applicable prices bid in the

schedule.

6.3.12 Tolerances for Concrete Constructions

a. General



Tirunelveli

98

Tolerances are defined as allowable variations from specified lines, grades, and dimensions

and as the allowable magnitude of the surface irregularities. Allowable variations from specified lines,

grades and dimensions are listed in table given under sub paragraph (b) below.

The intent of this paragraph is to establish tolerance that are consistent with modern

construction practice that the governed by the effect that permissible variations may have upon a

structure. The Government reserves the right to diminish the tolerances set-forth herein if such

tolerances impair the structural action, operational function or architectural appearance of a structure

or portion thereof.

Concrete shall be within all stated tolerances even though more than one tolerance may be

specified for a particular concrete structure. Provided that the specified variation for one element of

the structure to exceed its allowable variation. Where tolerances are not specified for a particular

structure, tolerances shall be those specified for a similar work. As an exception to clause 2 of the

general provisions, specific tolerances shown herein in connection with any dimension shall govern.

The Contractor shall be responsible for finishing the concrete forms with in the limits necessary to

insure that the completed work will be within the tolerances specified. Concrete work that exceeds the

tolerance imits specified shall be remedied in accordance with the sub paragraphs (d and e).

b. Variations From Specified Lines, Grades And Dimension

Hardened concrete structures shall be checked by the contractor and will be subject to such

inspection and measurement as needed to determine that thle structures are with in the tolerance

specified in the table below.

Variation is defined as the distance between the actual position of the structure or any

element of the structure and the specified position in plan for the structure or the particular element.

Plus or minus variations shown as (+) indicate a permitted actual position up or down and in or out

from the specified position in plan. Variations not designated as plus or minus indicate the maximum

deviation permitted between designated successive points on the completed element of construction.

Specified position in plan is defined as the lines, grade and dimensions described in these

specifications or shown on the drawings or as otherwise prescribed by the Engineer-in-charge.

NOTE: Tolerances apply to concrete dimensions only, but not for positioning of vertical

reinforcing bars or dowels.

C. Concrete surface Irregularities

1. General

Bulges, depressions and offsets are defined as concrete surface irregularities. Concrete surface

irregularities are classified as "abrupt"or gradual and are measured relative to the actual concrete

surface.



Tirunelveli

99

2. Abrupt surface Irregularities

Abrupt surface irregularities are defined herein as offsets such as those cause be misplace or

loose forms, loose knots in form number, or other similar, forming faults. Abrupt surface irregularities

are measured using a straight irregularity and the magnitude of the offset is determined by direct

measurement.

3. Gradual Surface Irregularities

Gradual surface irregularities are defined herein as bulges and depressions resulting in gradual

changes on the concrete surgace. Gradual surface irregularities are measured using a suitable

template conforming to the design profile of the concrete surface being examined. The magnitude of

the gradual surface irregularities is defined herein as a measure of the rate of change in slopes of the

concrete surface.

The surface irregularities shall not exceed 6mm for bottom slab and 12 mm for side slopes

when tested with a straight edge of 1.5 metre in length.

The magnitude of gradual surface irregularities on concrete shall be checked by the contractor

to ensure that the surfaces are within the specified tolerances. The Engineer-in-charge will also make

such checks of hardened compliance with such specifications.

d. Repair of Hardened Concrete Not within Specified Tolerances

Hardened concrete which is not within specified tolerances shall be repaired to bring it within

those tolerances. Such repair shall be in accordance with paragraph 6.3.21 and shall be accomplished

in a manner approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. Concrete repair to bring concrete with the

tolerances shall be done only after consultation with a representative of Engineer-in-Charge regarding

the method of repair. The Engineer-in-Charge shall be notified as to the time when repair will be

performed.

Concrete shall be finished in a manner which will result in a concrete surface with a uniform

appearance. The tins and any rough projections can then be rubbed down and the whole surface

brought to an even finish by rubbing with an wooden float using a mortar of one part cement by two

parts of coarse sand as an abrasive, the mortar at the same time filling the voids. A neat cement work

shall then be applied to give a smooth surface. If the concrete has set hard, the tins and rough

projections, if any, shall be removed by using corburandum brick or a paved grinding machine by

chipping, before finishing off with the smoothing wash. If the work of chipping is not done with care or

if the surface exposed after removal of the forms cannot be satisfactorily dealt with in this manner due

to bad form work or for other reasons, a coat of cement plaster of 1:2 of thickness as ordered by the

Engineer-in-charge shall be applied. No extra payment will be given for finishing concrete surface as

instructed above in this clause.

e. Prevention of Repeated Failure To Meet Tolerances

When concrete placements result in hardened concrete that does not meet the specified

tolerances, the contractor shall submit to the Engineer-in-Charge an outline of all preventive actions



Tirunelveli

100

such as modification to forms, modified procedure for setting screeds, and different finishing

techniques to be implemented by the contractor to avoid repeated failures.

The Engineer-in-Charge reserves the right to delay concrete placement until the contractor

implements such preventive actions which are approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.

6.3.14 Reinforcing Bars

a. General

Reinforcing bars shall be placed in the concrete as shown in the drawings or as directed. For

anchoring the concrete to the Hard rock provision of Anchor rods is made in the Drawing and the

contractor shall place these anchor rods to the spacing and depth shown in the drawings.

b. Materials

Unless shown otherwise on the drawings the reinforcement to be used shall be High yield

strength deformed (H.Y.S.D.) bars of grace F.E. 415 conforming to I.S. 1786-1985 (I.S. specification

for high yield strength deformed steel bars and wires for concrete reinforcement.

c. Placing

Reinforcement shall be bent and fixed in accordance with the procedure specified in I.S. 2502-

1963 (code of practice for bending and fixing of bars for concrete reinforcement). All reinforcement

shall be placed and maintained in the position shown in the drawings splices shall be located where

shown in the drawings, provided that the location of the splices may be altered subject to the written

approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.

Subject to the written approval of the Engineer-in-Charge, the contractor may for his

convenience, splice bars at additional locations other than those shown on the drawings. All additional

splices allowed shall be at the expense of the contractor. In order to meet design and space limitation

on splicing, some bent bars may exceed usual clearance cutting and bending of such bars from select

lengths may be required at the site.

Unless otherwise prescribed, placement dimensions shall be to the centre lines of the bars.

Reinforcement will be inspected for compliance with requirements as to size, shape, length, splicing,

position, and amount after it has been placed, but before being laid with concrete.

Before reinforcement is embedded in concrete the surface of the bars and the surfaces shall be

cleaned of heavy flaky rust, loose mill scale, dirt, grease or other foreign substances which in the

opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge are objectionalbe. Heavy flaky rust that can be removed by firm

rubbing with burlap, or equivalent treatment is considered objectionable.

As specified in clause 11.3. of I.S. 456-1978 unless otherwise specified by the Engineer-in-

Charge, reinforcement shall be placed with the following tolerances.

a. For effective depth 20Omm or less = ± 10 mm

b. For effective depth more than 20Omm = ± 15 mm

c. The cover in no cases be reduced by more than one third of specified cover or 5mm which ever is less.



Tirunelveli

101

Reinforcement shall be securely held in position so that it will not be displaced during the

placing of the concrete and special care shall be exercised to prevent any disturbances of the

reinforcement in concrete that has already been placed. Welding of bars shall be done as directed by

the Engineer-in-Charge and in conformity with the requirements of clause 11.4 of I.S. 456-1978.

Chairs, hangers, spacers and other supports for reinforcement shall be of concrete, metal or other

approved material. Concrete cover shall be as shown on the drawings.

d. Reinforcement Drawings

The Engineer-in-Charge will supply drawings of reinforcement details and bar bending

schedules for adoption.

e. Measurement and Payment

Measurement for payment of reinforcement bars will be based on the weight of the bars

placed in the concrete in accordance with the drawings supplied by the Engineer-in-Charge in

conformation with those specified drawings has been determined at the time of embedment. Except as

otherwise provided below payment for furnishing and placing reinforcing bars will be made at the unit

price per one quintal bid in the bill of quantities for furnishing and placing reinforcing bars, which unit

price shall include the cost of reinforcing bars, attaching, wire ties or other approved supports and of

cutting, bending cleaning securing and maintaining in position reinforcing bars as shown on the

drawings.

The total weight of bars placed as reinforcement in concrete shall be arrived at by adding the

products of lengths of each size and mass per meter (vide Table 1 and para 6.2.1. of IS 1786-1985) of

that size of rod.

6.3.15 Dowels

The dowels shall be of same H.Y.S.D. bars of grade Fe 415 conforming to I.S. 1786-01985 as

used for reinforcement.

Details for dowels shall be as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer-in-

Charge.

Dowels shall be placed in the concrete where shown on the drawings or where directed and

will be accepted for compliance with requirements as to size, shape, length, position, and amount

after they have been placed but before being covered by concrete.

Before the dowels are embedded in concrete, the surfaces of dowels shall be cleaned of all

dirt, grease or other foreign substances which in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge are

objectionable.

The dowels shall be accurately placed and secured in position so that they will not be displaced

during the placing of the concrete.

Measurement for payment of dowels will be made only on the weight of the dowels placed

in.the concrete in accordance with the drawings or as directed.



Tirunelveli

102

Payment for furnished and placing of dowels will be made at the unit price per one quintal bid

in the bill of quantities for furnishing and placing of reinforcing bars which unit price shall include the

costs of furnishing all the materials and for placing the dowels as required.

6.3.16 Preparation for Placing

a. General

No concrete shall be placed until all form work installation of items to be embedded and

preparation of surface involved in the placement have been approved.

The Contractor shall supply concrete placement checkout cards (Placement Register)

satisfactory to the Engineer-in-Charge and shall provide a water tight container for such cards at the

convenient location near each individual concrete placement site. The cards shall list all the various

work items for example "cleanup" and "embedded items" required prior to placement of concrete.

After each work item for an individual placement has been completed that item on the cards shall be

signed by contractor or his representative signifying completion of the required work. Engineer

authorized by the Engineer-in-Charge will inspect the work during and after completion of each phase

of the preparation and if the work is satisfactory will sign the check-outward placement register.

Approval of preparation to placement will not be complete units the contractor or his representative

and above authorized Engineer have approved by signature all applicable items for that placement.

All surfaces of forms and embedded materials shall be free from curing compound, dried

mortar for previous placements, and other foreign substances before the adjacent or surrounding

concrete placement is begun.

Prior to beginning concrete placement, the contractor shall make ready a sufficient number of

properly operating vibrators and operators and shall have readily available additional vibrators to

replace defective one during the progress of the placement. The Engineer's representatives at the

placement may require that the contractor delay the start of the concrete placement until the number

of working vibrators available is acceptable.

b. FOUNDATION SURFACES

All surfaces upon or against which concrete is to be placed shall be free from frost, ice, water,

mud and debris.

1. Rock surfaces shall be free from oil, objectionable coatings, and, loose semi-detached and

unsound fragments. Immediately prior to placement of concrete, surfaces of rock shall be washed with

an air water jet and shall be brought to a uniform surface dry condition.

2. Earth foundation surfaces shall be wet to a depth of 15cm, or to inpermeable material

whichever is less before concrete is placed.

c. Construction Joints

Construction joints are defined as concrete surfaces upon or against which concrete is to be

placed and to which new concrete is to adhere but which have become so rigid that the new concrete

cannot be incorporated integral with that previously placed. The provision of construction joints shall

conform to clauses 12.4.1 and 12.4.2 of I.S. 456 - 1978.



Tirunelveli

103

When the work has to be resumed on a surface which has hardened such surface shall be

roughened. It shall then be swept clean and thoroughly wetted. For vertical joints neat cement slurry

shall be applied on the surface before it is dry. For horizontal joints the surface shall be covered with a

layer of mortar about 10 to 15 mm thick composed of cement and sand in the same ratio as the

cement and sand in concrete mix. This layer of cement slurry or mortar shall be freshly mixed and

applied immediately before placing of the concrete.

Where the concrete has not fully hardened ail laitance shall be removed by scrubbing the wet

surface with writ or bristle brushes, care being taken to avoid dislodgement of particles or aggregate.

The surface shall be thoroughly wetted and all free water removed. The surface shall then be coated

with neat cement slurry. On this surface, a layer of concrete not exceeding 150 mm in thickness shall

first be placed and shall be,well rarnmed against old work, particular attention being paid to corners

and close spots, and work thereafter shall proceed in the normal way.

Preparation of Proiper Construction Joints

Preparation of proper construction joints inust be ensured by the contractor through the

following guidelines. A sketch of air water gun is also enclosed. The contractor must use such air water

guns.

GUIDELINES ON PREPARATION OF CONSTRUCTION JOINTS (LIFT JOINTS)

Objective

The objective in concrete placement in walls 1 cross drainage structures, etc., is to be

absolutely sure of achieving a good bond at the joints between the successive concrete "lifts". The

surface of each lift has to be thoroughly cleaned of all laitence, grout, and dirt before concrete for the

next lift is placed.

Green Cutting

2. The surface of the respective lift shall be thoroughly green-cut with an air water jet. Green

cutting is usually done 8 to 12 hours after the top surface of a concrete lift had been completed and

sufficiently hardened. The actual time for taking up the green cutting operation shall depend upon the

following factors:

• Concrete placement temperature;

• atmospheric temperature; • concrete mix; and

• slump.

The air-water jet will remove the thin surface film of laitence and grout to expose clean

surface.

3. Green cutting, if done at the proper time, shall Yield very good results. When started too early, it

shall result in oversutting and removing too much mortar. It is also liable to loosen the aggregate

particles and leaving too poor a surface to bind the fresh concrete. On the other hand, if green-cutting

is delayed to long, the cutting action of the air and water jet would be ineffective for proper removal

of laitence. It, therefore, requires much greater care and judgement for proper use at the proper time.

4. Skill of Jet Operator Besides determining the proper time for initiating green-cutting, the process

will require constant attention on the part of the air-water jet operator. By correct manipulation of the



Tirunelveli

104

high velocity air-water jet, a trained operator can ensure the removal of the thin surface film of

laitence and grout effectively and at the same time leaving the aggregate stones, already embedded

in the mortar, undistributed.

5. Proper Air - Water Gun : In addition to the skill of the jet operator, a prooer air-water gun is also

a vital requirement for effective green-cutting. The issuing nozzle must be about 460 mm (18 inches)

long to ensure the requisite cutting force close to the concrete surface. A dimensioned sketch of an

air-water gun is enclosed as sketch 1.

6. Quantum of Compressed Air and Water, For effective greencutting, it is essential that the air

pressure should be around 6.33 to 7.03 Kg/Cm2 (90 to 100 lbs. per square inch). It should not be

allowed to fall below 90 lbs per square inch. The water pressure, of course, should be sufficient to

bring the water into effective influence of the air pressure. As an approximate estimate, the quantity

of compressed air required by the breen-cutting gun is 2 cubic meters per minute (70 cfm) and the

quantity of water 60 gallons (273 litres) per minute.

7. An Important Aspect. An important aspect to be taken note of is that 'Green Cutting" as an

exclusive operation shall be fully useful only if the next lift of concrete is placed within 3 to 4 days (or

a maximum of 5 days) of the placement of the previous lift. If there be a delay in concrete placement

beyond this period, the laitence will come upto the concrete surface again at some places. Removal of

such faitence shall then be not possible by the ordinary green-cutting operation alone. liglit sand

blasting of even the green-cut lints shall need to be resorted to. However, if there is excessive delay

in concrete placement, it will require either "wet sand blasting" or the application of high pressure

'water blaster' to remove the laitence for effective binding with the fresh concrete. The effort to

achieve this will be considerably less if green cutting has already been done.

8. Sand Blasting

Sand blasting is the process of roughening and cleaning the surface of old and set concrete by

means of coarse sand and air applied under pressure of 90 to 100 pounds per square inch (6.33 to

7.03 kilograms per square centimeter) through the nozzle, so as to erode the laitence and grout from

the old and fresh concretes monolithic. Sand blasting of rock is also done so that concrete may be

placed on or against a clean surface as required according to specifications.

9. There are two types of sand blasting, namely "wet sand blasting' and "dry sand blasting". In

wet sand blasting water is also used along with sand and air under pressure, while in the latter, only

sand and air under pressure are used. Normally the concrete and rock surface etc., are wet sand

blasted to keep down the dust.

The percentages of different sizes of sand particles for efficient sand blasting shall be as

follows

Size Percentage

8 mesh per inch (25.40 millimetres) .......... 26






Tirunelveli

105

10. For effective sand blasting it is essential that pressure of air should be between 90 to 1000 pounds

per square inch (6.33 to 7.03 kilograms per square centimeter). If pressure fails below 90 bounds per

square inch (6.33 kilograms per square centimeter), sand blasting becomes ineffective. If sand having

large percentage of fines is used, it will not provide the requisite cutting power and the whole effort

goes waste. A good quality well graded "Sand-blast sand" is needed for achieving the objective of

sand blasting.

11. High Pressure Water Blasters. Green cutting is far cheaper than sand blasting, Proper quality

sand (known as sand-blast sand) is the most expensive item and special efforts are needed to arrange

such sand. A high pressure water blaster offers a workable alternative to sand blasting, On the Sardar

Sarovar Project, indigenously manufactured water blaster are being used which can develop pressures

in the range of 50-150 bars, with their water jet capacity adjustable to 880-1760 litres per hour (viz

15 litres/minute - 30 litres/minute). The equipment has a very small sand blasting attachment as well.

12. Summary:

Green - cutting offers the most economical methodology in the preparation of good

construction joints. It has, however, to be inititated at the proper time and with a proper air - water

gun (as per enclosed dimensional sketch) to yield the best results. It is far cheaper than sand blasting.

If a delay of more than 3 to 5 days is anticipated in placing the concrete over the previous lift, the

concrete surface of the lifts should be properly 'green-cut" and thereafter (say one day prior to

placement of concrete) it should be light sand-blasted or water blasted in order to remove the "re-

appeared" laitence.

D. Contraction Joints

Contraction joints serve to provide for volumetric shrinkage of monolithic concrete and for

movement between monolithic unit at established joints, thus preventing formation of objectionable

shrinkage cracks elsewhere in concrete. Prior to application of wax based curing compound to

contraction joints, the surfaces of all joints shall be cleaned thoroughly oc accretion of concrete or

other foreign material by scraping, chipping or other means approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.

Water stops, reinforcing bars and other embedded items shall be free of curing compound when

adjoining concrete is placed.

6.3.17 Placing

a. General

The contractor shall notify the Engineer-in-Charge before batching begins for placement of

concrete. Placing shall be performed only in the presence of an authorised Engineer's representative.

Placement shall not begin until after preparations are complete and the concrete placement check out

card has been signed by the contractor or his representative and the authorised representaitive of the

Engineer-in-Charge substantiating completion of all preparation for that placement.

All surface upon or against which concrete is to be placed shall be prepared in accordance with

paragraph 6.3.16.

Retempering of concrete will not be permitted. Any concrete which has become so stiff that

proper placing cannot be assured shall be wasted.



Tirunelveli

106

Concrete shall not be placed in standing water except with written permission of the Engineer-

in-Charge and the method of placing shall be subject to approval. Concrete shall not be placed in

running water and shall not be subjected to running water until after the concrete has hardened.

Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practical in its final position and shall not be allowed

to flow in such a manner that the lateral movement will cause segregation of the coarse aggregate

from the concrete mass. Methods and equipment employed in depositing concrete in forms shall

minimize clusters of coarse aggregate clusters that occur shall be scattered before the concrete is

vibrated.

Forms shall be constantly monitored and their position adjusted as necessary during concrete

placement in accordance with paragraph 6,3.12.

All concrete shall be placed in approximately horizontal layers. All construction joints which

intersect exposed concrete surfaces all be made straight and level to plumb except as shown

otherwise on the drawings.

The placing of concrete shall be in accordance with clause 12.2 of I.S. 456-1978.

If concrete is placed monolithically around openings having vertical dimension greater than 60

cm, or if concrete in decks, floor slabs, or other similar parts of structures is placed monollithically

with supporting concrete, the following requirements shall be strictly observed.

1. Concrete shall be placed upto the top of the formed openings at which point further

placement will be delayed to accommodate settlement of fresh concrete. If levels are specified

beneath nearly horizontal structural members such as decks, floor slabs, beams and girders such

levels being between the nearly horizontal members and the vertical supporting concrete below.

Concrete shall be placed to the bottom of the bevels before delay of placement.

2. The last 60 cm or more of concrete placed below horizontal members or bevels shall be

placed with a 50 mm or less slumps and shall be thoroughly consolidated.

In placing concrete or unformed slopes so steep as to make internal vibration of the concrete

impractical without forming, the concrete shall be placed ahead of non-vibrating slip form screed

extending approximately 0.75 meters back from its leading edge. Concrete ahead of the slip form

screed shall be consolidated by internal vibrations so as to ensure complete filling under the slip form.

A cold joint is an unplanned joint resulting when a concrete surface harden before the next

batch is placed against it cold joints would be allowed only in the event of equipment breakdown or

other unavoidable prolonged interruption of continuous placing. If such unavoidable delays in placing

occur which make it appear that unconsolidated concrete may harden to the extent that later vibration

will not fully consolidate it. The contractor shall immediately consolidate such concrete to a stable and

uniform slope. If delay of placement is then short, enough to permit penetration of the under lying

concrete placement shall resume with particular care being taken to thoroughly penetrate and re-

vibrate the concrete surface placed before the delay. If concrete cannot be penetrated with vibrator

the cold joint shall be then treated as a construction joint.



Tirunelveli

107

Care shall be taken to prevent cold joints when placing concrete in any part of the work. The

concrete placing rate shall ensure concrete is placed with the previously placed adjacent concrete in

plastic so that the concrete can be made monolithic by normal use of vibrators/tamping.

Concrete shall not be placed in rain sufficiently heavy or prolonged to wash mortar from

concrete. A cold joint may necessarily result from prolonged heavy rainfall.

The Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional payment, over the unit prices bid in the

schedule for concrete, by reason of any liiiiitation in the placing of concrete, required under the

provisions of this paragraph.

b. Transportation

The transportation of concrete stiall conform to clause 12.1 of I.S. 456-1978.

The methods and equipment used for transporting concrete from the batch plant to its final

position in to placement and the time that elapses during transportation shall not cause measurable

segregation of coarse aggregate or slump loss during transportation exceeding 5 centimeters.

Concrete shall be deposited as near as practical to its final position. The use of Aluminium pipe

or Aluminurnchutes for delivery of concrete will not be permitted. Concrete buckets shall be capable

of promptly discharging concrete of the specified mix design and the dumping mechanism shall be

capable of discharging at one location shall portions of concrete from a full bucket.

If used to transport concrete, the truck mixers shall meet the applicable requirements of

paragraph 6.3.10.

If used to transport concrete, the truck mixers shall meet the applicable requirements of

paragraph 6.3.10.

The transporting equipment for placing concrete shall readily handle the place concrete of the

specified slump, The Contractor shall when directed, replace in-adequate transporting equipment with

acceptable equipment.

C. Compaction

The compaction of concrete shall conform to clause 12.3 to I.S. 456-1978.

Concrete shall be consolidated by vibrators 1 tampers. The vibrations shall be sufficient to

removal all undesirable air voids from the concrete, including the air voids trapped against the forms.

After consolidation, the concrete shall be free of rock pockets and honeycomb areas and shall be

closed tightly against all surfaces of forms and embedded materials. All concrete shall be properly

consolidated before it hardens.

Except as herein after provided, consolidation of all concrete shall be by immersion-type

vibrators. Immersion type vibrators shall be operated in nearly vertical position and the vibrating head

shall penetrate and re-vibrate the concrete in the upper portion of the underlying layer. Care shall be

exercised to avoid contact of the vibrating head with embedded items and with formed surfaces which

will later be exposed to view. Concrete shall not be placed upon either plastic concrete until the

previously placed concrete has been thoroughly consolidated.



Tirunelveli

108

Form vibrators shall be used in conjunction with slip form lining machines to consolidate

concrete in canal linings. Such vibrators shall be arranged for effective uniform consolidation of the

concrete. The Engineer-in-Charge or his representative may remove samples of the hardened concrete

for testing and examination, and the contractor shall repair, at no cost to the Government, concrete

from which such samples are removed.

Immersion type vibrator shall be operated at speeds at 7000 revolutions per minute when

immersed in concrete. Form vibrators shall operate at speeds of atleast 6000 revolutions per minute

when being used to consolidate concrete. The contractor shall immediately replace improperly

operating vibrators with acceptable vibrators.

6.3.18. FINISHES AND FINISHING

The requirements for finishing of concrete surface shall be as specified in this paragraph,

paragraph 6.3.12 and 6.3.13. or as otherwise indicated on the drawings. The contractor shall notify

the Engineer-in-Charge before finishing concrete. Unless inspection is waived, in each specific case,

finishing of concrete shall be performed only when on Engineer's representative is present. General

surfaces will be tested by the'Engineer-in-Charge in accordance with paragraph 6.3.13 where

necessary to determine whether the concrete surface is within the specified tolerances shall be

repaired in accordance with paragraph 6.3.21.

Interior surfaces shall be sloped for drainage where shown on the crawings or as directed.

Surfaces which will be exposed to the weather and which would normally be level, shall be sloped for

drainage.

Floating may be performed by use of hand on power driven equipment. Floating shall be

started as soon as the screeded surface has stiffened sufficiently by and shown to the minimum

necessary to produce a surface what is force from streened mark and in and uniform in texture. Joints

and got shall be tooled where shown on the drawing or as directed.

After the surfaces of road way slabs of concrete bridges, have been wood floated, the surfaces

shall be given a broom finish. The finish shall be applied when the water sheet has practically

disappeared. The broom shall be drawn transersely across the pavement with adjacent strokes slightly

overlapping. The brooming shall be completed before the concrete is in such condition that the surface

will be torn or unduly roughened by the operation. The finished suface shall have a uniform

appearance and shall be free of corrugations exceeding 1.5 millimetres in depth. Broom shall be of

quality, size and construction and be so operated as to produce a surface finish satisfactory to the

Engineer- in-Charge.

6.3.19 PROTECTION

The contractor shall protect all concrete against damage until final acceptance by the

Engineer-in-Charge.

The Contractor shall provide protection to prevent erosion to fresh concrete whenever

precipitation either periodic or sustaining is imminent or occuring.



Tirunelveli

109

When precipitation appears imminent, the contractor shall immediately make ready at the

placement site all materials which may be required for protection of fresh concrete. The Engineer-in-

Charge may delay placement of concrete until adequate provisions for protection against weather are

made.

All fresh concrete surfaces shall be protected from contamination and from foot traffic until the

concrete has hardened. Hardened concrete surfaces which have to receive finish shall be protected

against damage from foot traffic and other construction activity by covering with protective iiiats,

plywood or by other effective means. Methods of protection shall be subject to approval by the

Engineer-in-Charge.

6.3.20 Curing

a. General

The contractor shall furnish all materials and perform all work require for curing concrete.

The uniformed top surfaces of concrete shall be cured for 28 days with a damp sand cover or

curing mat over. The sand or curing mats shall both be kept so wet as to allow alter to drain from

them and stain other concrete. The sand or curing mats shall be removed after the expire of the

during period.

All concrete surfaces shall be treated as specified to prevent loss of moisture from the

concrete until the required curing period elapsed or until immediately prior to placement of other

concrete or backfill against those surfaces. Only sufficient time to prepare construction oint surfaces

and to bring them to a surface dry condition shall be allowed between discontinuance of curing and

placement of adjacent concrete.

Forms shall be removed witli 24 hours after the concrete has hardened sufficiently conforming

to clause 10.3 of I.S. 456-1978 to prevent structural collapse of other damage by careful form

removal. Where required, repair of all minor surface imperfections shall be made immediately after

form removal and pr;or to curing. Minor surface repair shall be completed within 2 hours after form

removal and shall be immediately followed by the initiation of curing by the applicable method

specified herein. Concrete surfaces shall be kept continuously moist after form removal uniti initiation

of curing.

b. Material

Concrete cured with water shall be kept wet for atleast 28 days from the time the concrete

has attained sufficient set to prevent detrimental effect to the concrete surfaces. The concrete

surfaces to be cured shall be kept wet by covering them with water - saturated material by using a

system of perforated pipes mechanical spinklers or porous hose, or by other methods which will keep

all surface continuously (not periodically) wet. All curing methods are subject to approval of Engineer-

in-Charge.

c. Cost

The cost of furnishing all materials and performing all work for curing concrete shall be

included in the price bid in the bill of quantities for the concrete on which the particular curing

methods are required.



Tirunelveli

110

6.3.21 Repair of Concrete

a. General

Concrete shall be repaired in accordance with clause 5.7 of I.S. 3873-1978. Imperfections and

irregularities on concrete surface shall be corrected in accordance with paragraph 6.3.13 and clause

5.7 of I.S. 3873-1978.

b. Types of Repair

All repairs shall be made with concrete. Repairs to concrete surfaces and addition where

required shall be made by cutting regular opening into the concrete and placing fresh concrete to the

required lines. The chipped openings shall be sharp and shall not be less than 70 mm in depth. The

fresh concrete shall be reinforced and chipped and troweled to the surface of the openings. The mortar

shall be placed in layers not more than 2Omm in thickness after being compacted and each layer shall

be compacted thoroughly. All exposed concrete surfaces shall be cleaned of impurities, lumps of

mortar or grout unsightly stains.

c. Cost

The cost of furnishing all materials and performing all work required in the repair of concrete

shall be borne by the contractor.

6.3.22 Measurement of Concrete

Measurement for payment of concrete required to be placed directly upon or against surfaces

of excavation will be made to the lines for which payment for excavation is made.

In measuring concrete for payment, the volume of all openings, arises, embedded pipes and

metal work, each of which is large than 0.1 square meter in cross section will be deducted.

6.3.23 Payment for Concrete

Payment for concrete in the various parts of the work will be made at the applicable unit

prices therefor in the bill of quantities, under unit price shall include the cost of furnishing all materials

and performing all works required for the concrete construction, except that payment for furnishing

and placing reinforcing bars will be made at the respective unit price's bid therefore in the schedule.

6.4 Special Concrete Requirements

6.4.1 P.V.C. Strips

The finished P.V.C. strips shall be manufactured with shapes conforming to dimensions shown

on the drawings and shall be extruded from virgin, pigmented, plasticized P.V.C. The finished P.V.C.

strip shall meet the requirement of Table i and 11 of I.S. 9766-1981.

The P.V.C. water stops conforming to the above requirements shall be placed in the joints

where shown in the drawings. The contractor should furnish an I.S.I. Test certificate for the P.V.C. he

proposes to use.

6.4.2. Elastomeric Bearing Pads



Tirunelveli

111

The contractor shall furnish and place elastorneric bearing pads at the locations shown on the

drawings shall accordance with this paragraph. Elastomeric bearing pad shall be fastened to one

concrete surface with rubber cement recommended by the manufacturer of the plastometric bearing

pads. Elastorneric beating pads shall be stored at 70 F or less. Elastomeric bearing pads will not be

stored in open places or where they will be exposed to the direct rays of the sun.

The elastomeric compound shall be 100 percent virgin polychloroprence (neoprene).

The contractor should furnish on I.S.I. Test Certificate for the Elastomeric Bearing pads he

proposes to use.

6.4.3. Placement of Kraft Paper

The top surface of the masonry should be leveled and pointed with brush, with asphaltic

emulsion of 20/30 grade, such that the bearing surface is ordered smooth and uniform. Over this

surface, kraft paper bearing should be placed and the top painted with asphaltic emulsion of 20/30

grade. The unit price bid in the bill of quantities for this item shall include the cost of all materials and

labour involved in the operations.



Tirunelveli

112

SECTION - 7

BRICK WORK 7.1 Brick Masonry

7.1.1 Specification for Building Bricks and classification are covered by I.S. 1077/1970 and

3102/1971.

7.1.2 Bricks are to be well soaked in water before use for a period sufficient for the water to penetrate

the whole depth of the bricks. For further instructions regarding soaking and size of bricks to be used

IS 2212/1962 and IS 1200 part 111/1970 shall apply. Wetting the bricks assists in removing the dirt,

sand and dust from them and also it prevents the suction of water form the wet mortar, as otherwise

the mortar is likely to dry out soon and crumble before attaining any strength. Bricks shall not be too

wet at the time of use as they are likely to slip on the mortar and proper adhesion of bricks to mortar

will not be possible.

7.1.3 Regarding making of bricks IS 2117/1967 shall apply. Specification for facing brick is covered by

IS 2691/1972.

7.1.4 Mortar : Specification is covered by IS 2212/62 should the mortar perish, i.e, become dry white

or powdery through neglect of watering, the work shall be pulled down and rebuilt at the Contractor's

expense, or should the Contractor fail to watch the work to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge

of the work the later may supply the requisite men to watch the work properly and charge the cost to

the Contractor.

7.1.5 All masonry shall be washed down on completion and all strains - lime or otherwise removed

from the face.

7.2 No bats or out bricks shall be used except where absolutely required for obtaining the dimensions

of the different courses for obtaining the specified bond and where in the opinion of the Engineer-in-charge of the work is of too pretty a naturd to warrant the special moulding of bricks of the shape

required.

7.2.1 Setting bricks in mortar, bond and making of joints are covered by IS 2212/1962.

7.2.2 No extra payment will be made for the manner of finishing brick work face joints and it shall be

included by the Contractor in his unit rate for brick work.

7.2.3 Raking back, when circumstances render it necessary on the same section. of the structure in

uneven course the bricks shall be raked back so as to maintain an uniform and effective bond.

7.3 Openings : This is covered in para 10.2, 10.4 of IS 2212/1962.

7.4 Contract unit rate for brick work are inclusive of Queen and Joints.

7.5.1 Measurement of brick work is covered by IS 1200

7.5.2 Brick work shall generally be measured in cubic metres or otherwise specified.

7.5.3 Walls half brick in width and less shall be measured in square metres stating thickness.

7.5.4 Brick walls of width over half brick shall be measured in multiples of half brick which shall be

deemed to be inclusive of mortar joints, irrespective of excess of executed width. Wall exceeding one

brick thick by not exceeding three bricks in thickness shall be measured in multiples of half brick which



Tirunelveli

113

shall be deemed to be inclusive of the mortar joints where fractions of half brick occur due to

architectural or other reasons the measurements shall be taken as follows

a. upto 3/4 brick - actual measurement

b. Exceeding 3/4 brick - full half brick for walling more than three bricks in thickness the actual

thickness of wall shall be measured.

7.5.5 The following shall be taken as half brick measurements

For metric bricks

For bricks 1 9 x 9 x 9 em - 1 0.00 cm

For bricks 19 x 9 x 5.7 cm - 10,00 cm

For Bricks other than metric bricks

For Brick of size 9" x 4 ½” x 3" (23 x 11.5 x 7.5 cm) - 11.50 cm

For Brick of size 8 ¾” x 4 ¼” x 2 ¾” (23 x 11 x 7 cm) - 11.00 cm

For Brick of size 8 ¾” x 4 1/4" x 2 ¼” (23 x 11 x 5.7cm) - 11.00 cm

For Brick Of Size 8 ¾” x 4 ¼” x 2" (23 x 11 x 5 cm) - 11.00 cm

7.6 Handling bricks:

Bricks shall not be handled in baskets or in other manner which will destroy the sharpness of their

edges.

7.7 Rounding corners: Corners of rooms or pillars whether interior (or) projecting shall not be

rounded by in exceptional cases where it is so desired to round the corners shall be done in plaster for

the reentrant corners but will require chiseling of projecting angles before plastering.

7.8 Brick on edge coping etc. Para 10 of IS 2212/1962 shall apply. No extra payment will be made

for this work, over the Contract rate for brick work. The contract rate shall include the same.

7.9 Plinth offsets: Plinth off-sets on the interior faces only should be kept 15cm below floorievel

(unless finished thickness of floor to be laid will detremine, instead of the 15 cm) to allow for the floor

paving which is done subsequently coming upon the face of the superstructure. Similarly retaining wall

of verandahs etc must be built with due regard to the slope allowed for the floors.

7.10 Parapets: All parapets will be measured under the masonry below them and which they are

continuous in a floor, the parapet has to be reckoned with the lower floor.

7.11 Bricks forming skew back joints shall be specially mould or cut, so as to radiate truly, and

defects in this particular shall not be remedied by the extravagant use of mortar nor shall patching up

by chips etc. be permitted.

7.12.1 Bricks shall not be dumped at site. They shall be stacked in regular tiers as and when they are

unloaded to minimise breakage and defacement of bricks.

7.12.2 In the case of bricks made from clays containing lime Kankar the bricks in stack should be

thoroughly soaked in water (docked) to prevent lime blastering.



Tirunelveli

114

7.12.3 Brick stacks shall be placed close to the site of work so that least effort is required to unload

and transport the bricks again by loading pallets or in barrows. Building bricks shall be loaded or

unloaded a pair at a time unless palletised. Unloading of Building bricks or handling in any other way

likely to damage the cornets or edges or other parts of bricks shall not be permitted.

7.12.4 Bricks shall be stacked on dry firm ground. For proper inspection of quality and ease in

counting the stacks shall be 50 bricks long and 10 bricks high, the bricks being placed on edge and

preferably the width of each stack shall be two bricks. Clear distance between adjacent stacks shall

not be less thiin 0.8m.

7.12.5 Bricks of different type and classification shall be stacked separately.

7.13 Specification for common burnt clay Building Bricks as per IS 1077:1970

7.13.1 The common burnt clay bricks shall be classified on the basis of their minimum compressive

strength. The bricks of cornpressive strength 5OKg/cm2 shall be classified as 50. The bricks of

classification 50 shall have sub-classification 50A and 50B based on tolerances and shape.

7.14 General Quality

7.14.1 Bricks shall be hard-or machine moulded, they shall be free from cracks and claws and

modules of free lime. Bricks of 9cm height shall be moulded with a frog 1 or 2 cm deep on one of its

flat side. Bricks of 4 cm height and those made by an extrusion process may not be provided with

frogs.

7.15 Dimensions and tolerances

7.15.1 The standard size of common building bricks shall be as follows:

Length Width Height

Cm cm cm

a) Metric bricks 19 9 9

19 9 4

b) For bricks other than Metric bricks 9” 4 ½” 3"

7.15.2 Tolerances: The dimensions of bricks when tested in accordance with 7.15.3 shall be within

the following limits:

(a) Length

368 to 392 cm

(b) Width

174 to 186 cm

Sub Clause-A

(c) Height

174 to 186 cm (in the case 9 cm high bricks, 77 to 83 cm (in the case 4 cm high bricks)

(a) Length 350 to 410 cm

(b) Width 165 to 195 cm (in the case 9 cm high bricks)

Sub Clause B

(c) Height 74 to 86 cm (in the case 4 cm high bricks)

7.15.3 Twenty (or more according to the size of stack) whole bricks shall be selected at random. All

blisters, loose particulars of clay and small projects shall be removed. They shall then be arranged



Tirunelveli

115

upon a level surface successively in contact with each other and in a straight line. The overall length of

the assembled bricks shall be measured with a steel tape or other suitable in extensible measure

sufficiently long to measure the whole row at one stretch. Measurements by repeated application of a

short rule or measure shall not be permitted. If for any reason it is found impractible to measure

bricks in one row, the sample may be divided into all the rows of 10 bricks, which shall be measured

separately to the nearest millimentre. All these dimensions shall be added together.

7.16 Physical properties:

7.16.1 Compressive strength: Common building bricks shall have a minimum compressive strength

of 50 Kg/cm2 when tested in accordance with procedure laid down in table 1 of IS: 3495 - 1966 (See

also note under 1.1)

7.16.2 The compressive strength of any individual brick shall not fall below the average compressive

strength specified for the corresponding class of bricks by more than 20 percent.

7.16.3 Water absorption: When tested in accordance with the procedure laid down in Table 2 of IS :

3495 - 1966 (method of sampling and testing of clay building bricks) the average water absorption of

common building bricks shall not be more than 20 percent upto class 125 (see 30-1 below) and 15

percent for higher class, by weight after immersion in cold water for 24 hours.

7.16.4 Efflorescent: When common building bricks are tested in accordance with the procedure laid

down in Table 3 of IS: 3495 - 1966 (method of sampling and testing of clay building bricks) the rating

of efflorescence shall not be more than "moderate" upto class 125 and "slight" for higher classes.

7.17 Classification of burnt clay solid bricks (as per IS: 3102=1971):

7.17.1 Classes and sub-clause fo burnt clay solid bricks shall be as detailed below:

Type of brick

class

designation (see not below)

Compressive

strength Kg/CM2 min. immersion

Water

absorption (24 hrs. %) Max

Efflorescence

1 2 3 4 5

Heavy duty

(See IS 2180-

1970)

450 450 10 Nil

Common burnt

clay building bricks (See IS

1077-1970)

400 400 10 Nil

350 350 15 Slight

300 300 15 Slight

250 250 15 Slight

200 200 15 Slight

175 175 15 Slight

150 150 20 Moderate

125 125 20 Moderate

100 100 20 Moderate

75 75 20 Moderate

50 50 20 Moderate

Note: Each class of bricks shall further be divided into subclasses A, B etc. based on the following.

Sub Clause A - Tolerance limit shall be ± 3 percent and shall have smooth rectangular faces

with sharp corners and emit clear ringing sound.



Tirunelveli

116

Sub Clause B - Tolerance limit shall be ± 8 percent and shall be permitted to have slight

distortion and rounded edge, provided no difficulty shall arise in laying of uniform courses.

7.17.2 Specification for burnt clay facing bricks as per IS 291-1972

The facing bricks shall be of two.classes - (a) Class 1 & (b) Class 11

7.17.3 General quality: The facing bricks shall be made of clay, shale or mixture of these materials

with or without admixtures and burnt to meet the requirements of this standard. The colouring

material added to be clay shall be of suitable ceramic,materiaisand shall be well distributed

throughout the body. The bricks shall be of uniform colour.

7.17.4 Bricks shall be free from cracks, flows and modules of free lime and of even texture. These

shall be thoroughly burnt and shall have plane rectangular faces with parallel sides and sharp straight

right angled edge.

7.17.5 The standard sizes of the facing bricks shall be 19 x 9 x 9 cm and 19 x 9 x 4 cm. The

permissible tolerances shall be as under.

Tolerances Dimension

Class I cm Class II cm

19 ±3 ±3

9 ±3 ±3

4 ±1.5 ±2

7.17.6 The average compressive strength obtained in accordance with the procedure laid down in

Table 1 of IS 3495 - 1966 (Method of Sampling and testing clay building bricks) shall not be less than

75 Kg/CM2 for class II and 100 KG/cm2 for Class I.

7.17.7 Water absorption requirement when tested in accordance with the procedure laid down in

Table 2 of IS: 3495 - 1966 for 24 hours immersion shall not exceed 15 percent.

7.17.8 When tested in accordance with the method specified in Table 3 of IS: 3495 - 1966

efflorescence requirements shall be'Nil'for both cases.

7.18 When measured in accordance with the method specified in Table 4 of IS: 3495 - 1966 the

warpage for both classes shall not exceed 2.5mm.

7.19 Nominal thickness of wall. This is the thickness of wall that is stated in the estimates for

calculation of quantities. It is a fictitious dimension, which is neither the actual thickness of wall

excluding surface finishes like plaster, rendering etc. for necessarily the overall thickness, including

such finishes. The following example will illustrate this point.

Nominal

thickness

Actual

Thickness

For traditional bricks of 8 inch

length (with allowance of 114 inch for mortar joint)

1 Brick 9 inch 8 ½ to 8 ¾ inch

1 ½ Bricks wall 13 ½ inch 13 to 13 ¼ inch

2 Brick wall 18 inch 17 ½ to 17 ¾ inch

For modular brick(with

allowance of Icm for mortar

joint)



Tirunelveli

117

Nominal

thickness

Actual

Thickness

One Brick wall 20 cm 19 cm

1 ½ Brick wall 30 cm 29 cm

2 Bricks wall 40 cm 39 cm

7.20 Bricks - unless otherwise specified, burnt clay bricks shall confirm to the requirement of IS :

1077-1957 specification for common burnt clay building bricks and shall be of the specified class.

7.21 Mortar - Mortar for masonry shall be perpared in accordance with IS:2250 code fo paractice for

preparation and use of masonry mortars. The selection of mortar will also be governed by the strength

required for masonry and reference may be made to IS:1905- 1961 code of practice for structure

safety of buildings. Mortar shall be well mixed and shall be transported from the mixing plate form to

the site of work in such a manner to prevent formation of laitance or segregation.

7.22 Cement - Cement used for brick masonry shall be of ordinary or rapid - hardening portiand

cemnt conforming to IS 269:1958 specification for ordinary. Rapid - hardening and low heat Portland

Cement (Revised) or blast furnace slag cement conforming to IS:455- 1962, specification for Portland

Blast - furnace slag cement (Revised).

7.23 Fine aggregate: Sand shall confirm to IS: 2116 specification for sand for masonry mortar.

7.24 Water: Water used for masonry mortar shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of

deleterious materials.

7.25 Bonds and joints: The primary object of bond is to give strength to masonry but is may also be

employed to create artistic effects when the brick work is exposed to view. In brick work the cross

joints in any course shall not be nearer than a quarter of a brick length from those in the course below

or above it.

The thickness of bed joints shall be such that four courses and these joints taken consecutively

shall measure as follows:

a. In the case of traditional brick : Equal to four times to actual thickness of the brick plus 3 cm

b. In the case of modular : Equal to 39 cm brick conforming to IS:1077-1957

7.25.1 The face joints of brick may be finished by jointing or by pointing. In jointing, either the face

joints of the mortar shall be worked out while still green to give a finished surface flush with face of

the brick work, or the joints shall be squarely raked out to a depth of 1 cm while the mortar is still

green for subsequent plastering. The face of the brick work shall be cleaned with wire brush so as to

remove any splashes fo mortar during the course of raising the brick work.

In pointing, the joints shall be squarely raked out to a depth of 1.5cm while mortar still green

and raked joint shall be well brushed to remove dust and loose particles and well wetted, and shall be

later refilled with mortar to give the required finish. Some such finishes are "flush", "weathered",

"tucked" and "ruled".

7.25.2 Laying of brick work: Bricks shall be laid on a full bed of mortar. When laying the bricks shall

be slightly pressed so that the mortar can get into ail the pores of tile brick surface to ensure proper

adhesion. Cross joints and wall joints shall be properly flushed and packed with mortar so that no



Tirunelveli

118

hollow spaces are left. In case of thick walls (two - brick thick and over) the joints shall be grouted at

every course in addition to budding and flushing with mortar.

The course at the top of the plinth and sills at the top of the wall just below the roof slab or

floor slab and at the top of the parapet shall be laid with bricks on edge(applicable only in the case of

traditional bricks) and at corners arid at dead ends the bricks shall be properly radiated and keyed

into position by using cut bricks.

Brick with 2 cm deep frog shall be used frog down. Bricks with 1 cm deep frog shall be used

either frog up or frog down. The course shall be aligned and care,shall be taken to keep the perpends.

The brick work shall be built in uniform layer corners and other advanced work shall be racked

back. No part of a wall during its construction shall rise more than one metre above the general

construction levels, to avoid unequal settlement and also in proper jointing. Toothing may be done

where future extension is contemplated but shall not be used as an alternative to racking back. All

quoins shall be accurately constructed and the height of the course checked with storey rods as the

work proceeds. In general, quoin-bricks shall be headers and stretchers in alternative courses, the

bond being established by placing a quoin closer next to the queen header. Acute and obtuse quoin

closer next to the queen header. Acute and obtuse quoins shall be bonded. Where practicable, in the

same way as square quoins. Obtuse quoins shall be formed with squints showing a three-quarter brick

on one face and a quarter brick on the other. The arrangement of bond at jambs of openings shall be

symmetrical.

7.26. Pilasters: These shall be so set out to avoid broken bond.

7.27. Partitions: For half brick partitions to be keyed into main walls, indents shall be left in the

latter.

7.28 Fixing of frames : When doors or window frames of timber are fixed in the openings, the fixing

shall be done generally with hold fasts of adequate size and strength securely embedded in the brick

work or in chases later filled up by cement mortar or concrete. Hold fasts shall be fixed into the brick

work for a sufficient length and then turned up at end into across joint, thus avoiding indiscriminate

cutting of bricks. Iron hold fasts shall be given a protective coat of bitumen to avoid rusting. Wood

work faces in contact with brick work shall be treated with wood preservative to prevent attack from

insects and termites.

Fixing of Steel doors and windows shall be done in accordance with IS : 1081 - 1960. Code of

practice for fixing and glazing of metal (Steel and Aluminium) Doors, Windows and Ventilator.

The frame shall preferably be fixed simultaneously and the masonry work proceeds, as this

construction will ensure proper bond without gaps between the masonry and the framer.

7.29. Curing : In hot and dry weather, the mortar is likely to dry up before it has attained its final set

and crumble. This shall be prevented by keeping the brick work constantly wet for atleast seven days,

except in the case of brick work with mud mortar, for which no such curing shall be done.

7.30. Workmanship: The following shall be strictly followed :



Tirunelveli

119

(a) All loose materials, dirt and set lumps of mortar which may be lying over the surface over which

the brick work is to be freshly started shall be removed with a wire brush.

(b) All the bricks shall be thoroughly shaken in clean water before use.

(c) The surface over which the brick work is to be started shall be slightly wetted.

(d) The first course itself shall be made horizontal by providing enough mortar in the bed joint to fill

up any undulations in the bed course.

(e) Care shall be taken to see that the required quantity of water is added to the mortar at the mixing

platform itself and not over the course.

(f) Care shall be taken to see that there is no through joints and the lap is not less than half the width

of the brick and that all the vertical joints are properly filled with mortar.

(g) The vertically of the walls and horizontality of the courses shall be checked very often with plumb

bob and spirit level respectively.

(h) No portion of the brick work shall be left more than 1 metre lower than the other. Where the

masonry of one part has to be delayed work shall be “racked back” suitably at an angle not exceeding

40O according to bond and not toothed.

(i) Where plastering is required to be done the joints shall be raked to a depth of 1 crn while the

mortar is wet to facilitate satisfactory adhesion between the plaster and brick work.



Tirunelveli

120

SECTION – 8

STEEL AND IRON WORK

8.1 General : This specification will include governing clauses on the supply and delivery fabrication

and erection at site, of all materials covered by cast iron, wrought iron, and steel, employed for

structural purposes, shown on the relevant drawings and described in the supplementary

specifications and schedules.

8.2 All materials must strictly conform to relevant specifications, and proof thereof is to be furnished,

if so required to the Engineer-in-Charge.

8.3 The work includes all bolts, nuts, washers and field rivets required for complete erection at site

together with an allowance for waste etc., upto 10 percent (unless otherwise specified in the schedule)

on net-number of bolts, nuts, washers feld rivets required.

In addition to the above, the contractor is to supply all service bolts and nuts and ordinary

plates, washers necessary for erecting the work at site.

8.4 For design of steel sections, Part VI section 6 of N.B. Code and I.S. 800 1962 shall apply.

8.5 Quality : (i) Regarding quality relevant I.S. shall apply. Especially I.S. 800/1962 and N.B. Code

part VI - Section 8.

8.5.1 As regards 'Tests relevant I.S. shall apply.

8.5.2 Tensile strength of rivet bars : Regardina the Tensile strength of rivet bars paragraphs 9.1 to

9.2.1 in I.S. 1148-1964 shall apply.

Cold Bend Test : For cold bend test relevant paragraphs 8.3 to 8.3.2 in I.S. 226- 1969 shall apply.

8.5.3 Test for manufactured rivets : Regarding tests paragraphs 7.2 in I.S. 1929 -1961 shall

apply.

8.5.4 Margin over and under dimensions and weights:

(a)Specified lengths : When steel in bars or sections is specified to be cut to certain lengths it shall

be cut within a margin of 25.5 mm under or 25.5 mm over the specified length, but when the

minimum lengths are specified the margin shall be within 51 mm over.

(b)Exact lengths : When lengths are specified to be 'exact' the steei in bars or sections shall be cold

sawn or machined with in a margin of 3 mm over and 3 mm under the lengths specified.

(c)Weight : When a minimum weight is specified the rolling margin or plates, sections and bars shall

be 5 percent over and when a maximum weight is specified the rolling margin shall be 5 percent under

the specified weight.

When the specified weight is not stated to be either a minimum or maximum, the rolling

margin shall be between 2½ percent over and 2½ percent under the specified weight.

The Margin shall be ascertained separately for plates, each jection (eg. angles, tees, beams,

channels, etc.,) and bars.



Tirunelveli

121

(d) Cross sectional dimensions of beams and channels : The permissible upwards and

downwards variation in the specified depth of beams and channels shall not exceed the following :

Beams :

Depth Tolerance

Over mm. Upto and including mm.

Plus mm. Minus mm.

… 200 3.0 2.0

200 400 3.5 2.5

400 600 4.0 3.0

Channels

… 200 3.0 2.0

200 400 3.5 2.5

In addition to the above, the I.S. 800/1962 Appendix 11 shail also apply.

8.6 Shop and field finish and workmanship :

8.6.1 All sheared edges and ends where stress is transmitted shall be planed on machined. Rough

edges shall be filed off, ground or machined as may be instructed. No article shall be supplied with any

edge or end in a rough or improperly finished manner to require further treatment before it can be

fitted closely into its intended position. Ends of all stiffeners, etc., must bear tightly top and bottom.

Joints in angles, plates, etc., are to be made only in such positions as may be shown on plans

or ordered. But joints must meet truly over the whole of the butting surface Plates and bars should be

levelled and straightened when necessary by pressure and not by hammering. All steel work intended

to be rivetted or bolted together must be absolutely in contact over the whole surface.

8.6.2. Regarding drilling and other operations, instructions contained in Paragraphs 35 to 37 of I.S.

800/1962 shall apply.

8.6.3. All bolts and nuts shall conform to I.S. 1367 - 1961 technical supply conditions for thread

fasteners. The heads and nuts shall be hexagonal unless otherwise specified. Headed bolts are to have

heads forged in one piece with the shank, the shank being truly cylindrical and the head concentric.

Nuts, when measured across the flats, are to be atieast twice the diameter of the bolt and to be

atleast equal in depth to the diameter of the bolt.

8.6.4. The screws of all bolts should show full thread above the nuts when the latter has been

screwed up tight, any length beyond this arnount for finished work, observable to view as in buildings

and bridges shall where so instructed, be cut off and the end rounded with a file.

Care must be taken that all holding down belts are provided with proper hexagonal heads and

have not merely got the end of the shank burred over the washer.

Heads and nuts of bolts and rivet heads shall be tightened and drawn closely home and shall

lie squarely and closely on the plates. Bolts and rivets shall pass through holes in plates accurately

fitting and without distortion of bolts, rivet or plate.

8.6.5. Welding : Wherever weld;ng is proposed relevant I.S. may be referred.



Tirunelveli

122

8.6.6. Bearings : The surface of every steel bed and bearing plate or plate over saddle casting shall

be made perfectly fair and level all over, and when attached to the member supported by it, shall be

lead true in every direction to its proper angle of bearing.

All rivet heads of bearing surfaces shall be counter-sunk and dressed flush.

8.6.7. Expansion gear, etc.: Generally in connection with the roller and bearing gear, all meeting

surfaces, including the sides of the roller frames, are to be machined, all bolts turned and fitted, all

washers faced and the whole to be got up in a style of first- class machine work, the rollers, knuckles,

and pins being polished to a smooth surface.

8.6.8. Camber in fabrications : Main girders are to be erected on block accurately set to give them,

while so erected, the camber, specified of the drawings, which must not be exceeded. No camber shall

be given to cross girders.

8.6.9. Oiling and Painting : Painting should not be done to steel work till it has been inspected by

the Engineer-in-Charge, unless otherwise permitted.

8.6.1O. Regarding detailed instructions on the method of painting relevent I.S. 800/1962. paras 43.1

to 43.4 shall apply. The exemption made under clause 43.3 of I.S. 800/1962 shall not apply, in cases

of hollow structures likely to be punctured later on, in such case the interior of sealed hollow sections

shall also receive the full specified protective treatment before assembly.

8.6.11. All field rivets, bolts, nuts, washers. etc., are to be dipped into boiling linseed oil.

8.6.12. All machined surfaces are to be well coated with a mixture of a white lead and tallow.

8.6.13. No extra payment will be made for the oiling and painting under this clause unless there is

definite provision as a separate schedule item of the contract.

8.7. In the case of spans upto and including 18.30 m the erection of every span at the contractor's

works will not be insisted upon, provided that methods are used to ensure strict inter-changeability of

parts and correctness of assembleage and bearing of the span as a whole. In such cases, one spaii in

ten of each thype will be erected from pieces selected at random, by the Engineer-in-charge. all pieces

of the ten spans being previously marked with a consecutive number representing the span to which

they belong. Should there be any failure of parts to fit, or of the span, as a whole, to correctly

assemble and to have all bearings true when assembled, all similar spans must be erected complete.

8.7.1 The work is to be put together with a sufficient number of either parallel drifts or turned bolts to

bring the pieces into p!ace, when so erected all holes left to be filled in the field must be so fair that a

cold rivet of the size specified, or a gauge turned to the same size can be passed through them

without difficulty. No drift is to be used anywhere about the work, large in any part than the hole into

which in is to be driven.

8.7.2 Putting together: In putting iron work together, greatest care is to be taken to fit the plates

and bars accurately in contact, and to see that rivet and bolt holes correspond before riveting up. All

joints are to be perfectly clearned and freed from rust. Should any parts be bent or injured they are to

be repaired according to the instructions of the Engineer-in-Charge.



Tirunelveli

123

In case holes do noe exactly correspond. they should not be slotted out to fit, but shall with

the permission of the Engineer-in-charge be enlaorged with a circular bit and larger rivets or bolts

used to fill the holes.

All members must be so formed that they can be accurately assembled without being unduly

packed strained or forced into position and when built, shall be true and free from twists, kinks,

buckles, or open joints between component pieces. Failure in these respects will involve the rejection

of the defective members.

8.7.3 Heating rivets : Rivets shall be heated uniformly through out their whole substance if possible

in an air furnace, the rivets being kept clear of the fuel. Great care is necessary in beating rivets be

prevent the iron from burning and becoming brittle.

8.7.4 Packing to camber during errection: In erecting girders, the different parts are to be first fitted

together with service bolts and packed upto camber before riveting is done, care is to be taken to

keep the girders laterally straight.

8.7.5 Bed Plates : In fixing bed plates special care must be taken to put the holding down bolts

exactly in position, so that the nuts may bearsquare, and firmly grip, the plate below. The Upper

surface of the bed plates or rollers must be exactly at the level given the Engineer-in-Charge. The bed

plates are to be set in cement or on lead sheets as the plans or addendum specification may show or

as the Engineer-in- Charge may direct, the cost of which shall be included in the rate for fixing.

8.7.6 Marking: Every portion of the work is to have its erection letters or numbers distinctly stenciled

on it with paint and marked with a punch for guidance in erection at site and every piece, bundle or

packing case shall be also clearly marked as the Engineer-in-Charge.

8.7.7. Rivet and Bolt lists: The contractor is also to supply without charge complete lists in duplicate

of the rivets and bolts required for erecting the work at site showina the parts of the work to which the

various rivets and bolts belong and having each item marked, so as to indicate the particular case in

which it will be found.

8.8 All Projecting pieces plates or bars are to be kept in shape by timber or angle bars bolted (or)

spiked to them, to the extent necessary to protect them from injury in transit. Before despatch. screw

ends of the rods and machined surfaces shall be efficiently protected from injury during transit.

8.8.2 All straight bars and plates, except small pieces are to be sent out in conven.ient bundles

temporarily riveted (or) bolted together or bound with rod iron or suitable wire as may be necessary.

Corrugated floor plates are to be sent Out in nests, bolted together at ends, with washers between.

8.8.3 All rivets, bolts, nuts, washers, plates under 30 cm, square and small articles generally, are to

be packed in cases, of strength sufficient for purposes of safe transit and separately for each span,

each case weighting when full not more than 356 Kg. All bolts and rivets of different sizes are to be

packed in separate bags, each bag having a label indicating its contents.

8.8.4 Regarding inspection and testing relevant I.S. 800/1962 paras 47.1 to 47.6 Shall apply.

8.9 Cast Iron



Tirunelveli

124

Clauses additional to "General" preceding:

8.9.1. All cast-iron used on the work shall be of the best tough, close grained, grey metal, clean

sound, without admixture of deleterious matter, true in section with an even thickness of metal

throughout conforming to the design, free from air holes, sand holes, flaws or defects of any kind, and

with clean and sharp edges, where so shown on plan, and with an even surface. It shall be sufficiently

soft to admit of being easily cut be either chisel or drill.

8.9.1.1 The quality of material may be fairly well judged from or as a white iron, grey, being the

strongest, is in demand the most and should invariably be used where strength is desired. Hard and

brittle material is commonly light grey in colour, havog little or no lusture. A tough iron is marked by a

uniformly diffused dark grey colour having a good lusture, but if mottled in colour and without lustre,

then the material is weak. A light grey colour with pronounced lusture indicates a hard and tenacious

iron and when a fracture shown up as a much mottled dark colour with an entire absence of lusture

the suitability of the iron should be susoected, with a view of rejection.

8.9.1.2 For all practical purposes of importance, steel has entirely displaced cast iron in structural

engineering, bug owing to its relative cheapness and the ease witii which it can be cast in moulds to

almost any desired shape, there are still many uses to which it is put.

8.9.1.3 Brazing and riveting are inadmissible operations where cast-iron is concerned. Grey iron is

much cheaper to machine than white iron which not easily worked.

8.9.2 Moulds and patterns shall be supplied by the contractor unless otherwise specified. It will be

specified if the casstings are to be oversize in any dimension to permit of subsequent machining.

8.9.3 Stopping or plugging with lead, putty, or paint shall be prohibited, Castings shall not be painted

until they have been passed by the Engineer-in-Charge.

8.9.4 Casting must be of such a strength that a test bar cast from the same heat of meta, 5cm deep x

2.5em wide placed upon bearings 90em apart will sustain without fracture a weight of 1360 Kg placed

at the centre with a minimum deflection of 8mm.

8.9.5 Castings having wearing surfaces shall be made from cold blast pig.

8.9.6 Holes for bolts, etc., shall be drilled out or cast in the casting as may be directed in each case.

8.9.7 Regarding measurement of steel work and iron work-relevarit I.S, 120C (Part VIII) 1967 shall

apply.

Extract From I.S. 226-1969

Specification for Structural Steel

8.10. Tensile Test

8.1 0.1 Number of Tensile Tests

8.10.1.1 Plates, Sections (Angles, Tees, Beams. channels and flats. etc.)



Tirunelveli

125

One tensile test shall be made from finished steel for every 40 tonnes or parat thereof from each cast,

a separate test being made for each class of steel product (namely plates, sections and flats) rolled

from a cast).

8.10.1.1.2 Where plates, sections, or flats of more than one thickness are rolled from teh same cast,

one additional tensile test shall be made from the material in each class of product for each variation

in thickness of 6mm above or below the thickness of the test piece first selected in such a class.

8.10.2. Bars (round, square and hexagonal) : One tensile test shall be made from ,finished steel for

every 40 tonnes or part thereof from each cast and for every class of product. When more than one

diameter or thickness of the bar is specified, one additional tensile test shall be made for each

diameter or thickness of the bar ordered if so desired by the purchases.

8.10.2.1 Tensile test pieces : The tensile strength, yield stress and percentage elongation of steel

shall be determined from standard iest pieces cut lengthwise or cross wise from plates and length wise

from sections, flats and bars. The tests shall be carried out on Indian Standard test pieces prepared in

accordance with I.S. 1608-1960.

8.10.3. Tensile Test : The Tensile Strength, yield stress and percentage elongation, when determined

in accordance with I.S. 1608-1960 shall be as given in Table 1.

8.10.3.1. In case of sections, the thickness of which is not uniform throughout the profile, the limits

shall be applied according to the actual maximum thickness of the piece selected for test.

8.10.3.2. Should a tensile test piece break outside the middle half of its gauge length (see I.S. 1608-

1960) and the percentage elongation obtained is less than that specified, the test may be discarded at

the manufactures option, and another test made from the same plate, section, flat or bar.

8.11.2 In the case of round bars 25mm in diameter and under the internal diameter of the bend shall

be not greater than twice the diameter of the bar.

EXTRACT FROM I.S. 1143-1964

Specifications for rivet bars for structural purposes

8.12 Tensile Test:

8.12.1 One Tensile test shall be made from the finished steel for every 10,000 kg. of cast iron or part

thereof.

8.12.2 The Tensile Strength, yield stress and percentage elongation of steel, when determined on test

piece cut lengthwise from bars, in accordance with I.S. 1068- 1968 shall be given in Table 1.

EXTRACT FROM I.S.1929-1961



Tirunelveli

126

Specification for rivet for general purposes

(12 to 48mm Diamete)

8.13.1 Tests Bend Test: The rivet shank-shall be bent cold, and hammered until the two parts of the

shank touch. There shall be no fracture on the outside of the bend.

8.13.2. Flattening Test :The rivet head shall be flattened while hot. The head shall be flattened until

its diameter is 2.5 times the diameter of the shank. There shall be no cracking at the edges.

EXTRACT FROM I.S. 800-1962

Code of practice for use of structural steel in general building construction Appendix H

(Clause 14.6)

Loading Tests 8.14 Acceptance Tests:

8.14.1 The structure or structural member under consideration shall be loaded with its actual dead

load for as long a time as possible before testing and the tests conducted as follows:

8.14.1.1 Stiffness Test: In this test, the structural or member shall be subjected in addition to its

actual dead load, to a test load equal to 1.5 times the specified super imposed load. and this loading

shall be maintained for 24 hours. The maximurn deflection attained during this test should not be

excessive. If, after removal of the test load, the member on structure does not show a recovery of

atleast 80 percent of the maximum strain on deflection shown during the 24 hours under load, the

test shall be repeated. The structure shall be considered to have sufficient stiffness, provided that the

recovery after this second test is not less than 90 percent of the maximum increase in strain on

deflection shown during the second test.

8.14..1.2 Strength Test:

8.14.1.2.1 The structure shall be subjected, in addition to its actual dead load to a test load equal to

the surri of the dead load and twice the specified superimposed load, and this load shall be maintained

for 24 hours, except that for dwelling houses of not more than two storeys and for single storey;

schools, the structure may be subjected in addition to its actual dead load to a test of twice the

specified superimposed load only.

8.14.1.2.2 In the case of wind load a load corresponding to twice the specified wind load shall be

applied and maintainedx for 24 hours, either with or without the vertical test load, according to which

condition is the more severe in the member under consideration on the structure as a whole.

Complete tests under both conditions may be necessary to verify the strength of the structure. The

structure shaii be deemed to have adequate strength if during the test no part completely fails, and if

on removal of the est load the structure shows a recovery of atleast 20 percent of the maximum

deflect on strain shown during the 24 hours under load.

8.14.2 Structures of same Design: Where several structures are to be built to the same design

and it is considered unnecessary to test all of them one structure, as a prototype. shall be fully tested,

as described in 14.1.1 and 12.1.2 by a qualified Engineer, but in addition during the first application of

the test load particular note shall be taken of the strain or deflection when the test load, at 1.5 times

the specified super imposed load, has been maintained for 24 hours. This information is required as a

basis of comparison in any check tests carried out on samples of the structure.



Tirunelveli

127

8.14.2.2 When a structure of the same type is selected for a check test, it shall be subjected, in

addition to its actual dead load, to be super imposed test load, equal to 1.5 times the specified live

load, in a manner and to an extent prescribed by the Engineer carrying out the test. This load shall be

maintained for 24 hours during which time the maximum strain deflection should be noted. The check

test shall be considered to be satisfactory, provided that the maximum strain or deflection noted in

the check test does not exceeded by more than 20 percent the maximum strain or deflection shown at

similar load in the test on the prototype.

8.14.3 Satistactory Structure:

8.14.3.1 An actual structure which has passed the "Strength Test" (see 14.1.2) and is subsequently

to be erected for use, shall be considered satisfactory for occupancy after it has been strengthened by

replacing any distorted members, and has subsequently satisfied the "Stiffness Test" (see 14.1.1)

Note: Method of test: The manner in which the loading is to be applied and the position at which

deflections or strains are to be measured can only be decided with reference to the particular

structure to be tested, but as general guide the following are suggested:

(a) Beams and Girders: The deflection should be measured at mid span and if it is expected that

considerable strain on settlement may occur at the supports, the deflection on settlement at the

support should also be recorded.

(b) Cantilevers: The deflections at the end of the cantilever should be measured, and under

theconditions visualised above for the beams the deflections at the support should also be recorded.

(c) Stanchion : The latterial deflections at the mid height of the stanchion and at the heed Of the

stachion should be measured relative to the joint next below and to the base.

Note 2 : Loading:

(a) Vertical Loading : Uniformly distributed laoding on beams may be represented by two loads. each

half the total of the uniformly distributed laod applied at the quarter points.

(b) Horizontal loading : Where the effect of horizontal forces on the structure as a whole has to be

tested, the action of the cladding in applying the load to the frame should be. taken into account. The

horizontal forces would in general be represented by a limited number of point loads.

(c) Dead Load equivalent : It has been assumed that the actual dead load is in place, but when it is

convenient to do the test before the dead load in applied, an equivalent can be used, placed as

described in (a). The deflection due to the dead load on its equivalent should not be included in the

measurements.

Para 35 I.S. 800-1962

8.15 Holing:

8.15.1 Holes through more than one thickness of material for members such as compound stanchion

and girder flanges shall, where possible, be drilled after the members are assembled and tightly

clamped or bolted together. Punching may be permitted before assemble provided the holes are



Tirunelveli

128

punched 3mm less in diameter than the required size and reamea after assembly to the full diameter.

The thickness of material puriched shall be not greater than 16mm.

8.15.2 When the holes are drilled in one operation through two or more separable parts, these parts

when so specified by the Engineer, shall be separated after drilling and the burrs removed.

8.15.3 Holes in connecting angles and plates, other than splices, also in roof members and light

framing may be punched full size through material riot over 13mm thick, except where required for

close tolerance on barrel bolts.

8.15.4 Matching holes for rivets and block belts shall register with each other so that a gauge of

1.5mm or 2.0 mm (as the case may be depending on whether the diameter of the rivet or bolt is less

than or more than 23mm) less in diameter than the diameter of the hole will pass freely through

theassembled members in the direction at right angles to such members, finished holes shall be not

more thari 1.5 mm or 2.0 mm (as the case may be) in diameter larger than the dizmeter of the rivert

or black bolt passing through them, unless otherwise specified by, the Engineer.

8.15.5 Holes for turned and fitted bolts shall be drilled to a diameter actual to the nominal diameter

of the shank or barrel subject to 88 tolerance specified in I.S. 919-1959 recommendations for limits

and fits for engineering. Preferably, pacts to be connected with close tolerance barrel bolts shall

be firmly held together by taking belts or clamps and the holes drilled through all the thickness at one

operation and subsequently reamed to size. All holes not drilled.through all thicknesses at one

operation shall be drilled to a smaller size and reat-ned out after assembly. Where this is not

practicable, the parts shall be drilled and reamed separately through hard bushed steel.

8.15.6 Holes for rivets or bolts shall not be formed by a gas cutting process.

8.16 Assembly:

The assembly shall be assembled in such a manner that they are neither twisted or otherwise

damaged, and shall be so prepared that the specified carrbers if-any. are provided.

8.17 Riveting:

8.17.1 Rivets shall be heated uniformly through out their length without burning or excessive scaling,

and shall be of sufficient length, to provide a head of standard dimensions. They shall, when driven

completely fill the holes and if counter sunk, the counter sinking shall be fully filled by the rivet, any

proudness of the counter sunk head being dressed off flush, if required.

8.17.2 Reveted members shall have all parts firmly drawn and held together before and during

reverting, and special care shall be taken in this respect for all single riveted connections. For multiple

riveted connections, a service bolt shal be provided in every third or fourth hole.

8.17.3 Wherever practicable, machine riveting shall be carried out by using machines of the steadly

pressure type.

8.17.4 All loose, burned or otherwise defective rivets shall be cut out and replaced before the

structure is loaded and special care shall be taken to inspect all single riveted connections.

8.17.5 Special care shall be taken in heating and drilling long rivets.

Welding



Tirunelveli

129

8.18.1 Welding shall be in accordance with any of the following standards as appropriate.

I.S. 816-1956 - code of practice for use of metal Arc Welding for general construction in mild steel.

I.S. 819-1957 - Code of Practice for resistance spot welding for light assemblies in mild steel.

I.S. 820 - Code of Practice for use of welding in tabular construction.

I.S. 821 - Code of Practice for use of welding in pipelines.

I.S. 822 - Code of Practice for inspection of welds.

I.S. 823 - Procedure code for metal arc welding of mild steel.

I.S. 1024 - Code of Practice for welding of structures subject to dynamic loading.

I.S. 1261 - 1959 - Code of Practice for seam welding in mild steel.

I.S. 1323-1959-Code of Practice for Oxy-Acetylene welding for structural work in mild steel.

8.18.2 For welding of any particular type of joint, we!ders shall give evidence acceptable to the

purchaser of having satisfactorily completed appropriate tests as discribed in any one of the following

standards as relevant:

I.S. 817 - 1957 - Code of Practice for training and testing of metal arc welders.

I.S. 1181 - 1957 - Qualifying tests for metal arc welders (Engaged in welding structures other than

pipes)

I.S. 1393 - 1961 Code of Practice for training and testing of Oxy-aceetylene welders.

8.19 Painting:

8.19. ALL surfaces which are to be painted, oiled or otherwise treated shall be dry and thoroughly

cleaned to remove all loose scale and loose rust.

8.19.2 Shop contact surfaces need not be painted unless so specified. If so specified, they shall be

brought together while the paint is stell, wet.

8.19.3 Surfaces not in contact, but inaccessible after shop assembly shall receive the full specified

protective treatment before assembly. This does not apply to the interior of sealed hollow sections.

8.19.4 In the case of surfaces to be welded, the steel shall not be painted or metal coated within a

suitable distance of any edges to be welded if the paint specified on the metai coating would be

harmful to welders or impair the quality of the welds.

8.20 Shop erection:

8.20.1 The steel work shall be temporarily shop erected complete or as arranged with the inspector

so that accuracy of fit may be checked before despatch. The parts shall beshop assembled with a

sufficient number of parallel drifts to bring and keep the parts in place.

8.20.2 In the case of parts drilled or punched, through steel jigs, with bushes resulting in all similar

parts being inter-chargeable the steel work may be shop erected in such position as arranged with the

inspector.

8.21 Inspection and testing:



Tirunelveli

130

8.21.1 The Inspector shall have free access at all reasonable times to these parts of the

manufacturers works which are connected with the fabrication of the steel work and shall be afforded

all reasonable facilities for satisfying himself that the fabrication is being undertaken in accordance

with the provisions of this standard.

8.21.2 Unless specified otherwise, inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture prior to

despatch and shall be conducted so as not to interface unnecessarily with the operation of the work.

8.21.3 The Manufacturer shall guarantee compliance with the provisions of this standard, if required

to do so by the purchaser.

8.21.4 Should any structure of part of a structure be found not to comply witli any of the provisions of

this standard, it shall be liable 'No rejection. No structure of part of the structure, once rejected shall

be resubmitted for test, except in cases where the purchaser or him authorised representative

considers the defect as rectifiable.

8.21.5 Defects which may appear during fabrication shall be made good with the consent of and

according to the procedure laid down by the inspector.

8.21.6 All gauges and templates necessary to satisfy the inspector shall be supplied by teh

manufacturer. The inspector may at his discreation, check the test results obtained at the

manufacturer's works by independent tests at the Government,test house or else where, and should

the material so tested be found to be unsatisfactory, the costs of such tests shall be borne by the

manufacturer and if satisfactory, the costs shall be borned by teh purchaser.

8.22 General Rules : Methods of Measurement

8.22.1 Clubbing of items - Items may be. clubbed together provided that break up of clubbed items is

agreed to be on basis of detailed description of items, stated in this standard.

8.22.2 Booking of Dimensions - In Booking Dimensions, order shall be consistent and generally in

sequence of length, width and height or depth or thickness.

8.22.3 Description of items - The description of each item which covers both fabrication and erection

shall include conveyance and delivery, handling, unloading stories, hoisting and all labour for finishing

to required shape and size. Alternatively, in each item of work fabrication or erection shall be

described and measured separately.

8.22.4 Bill of quantities - Items of work shall fully described the materials and turly represent the

work to be executed.

8.22.5 Dimensions unless otherise stated all work shall be measured not in decimal system, as fixed

in its place as given in 22.5.1 to 22.5.3.

8.22.5.1 Dimnensions excepting cross sections and thickness of plate shall be measured to nearest

0.001m except for reinforcement which shall be measured to nearest 0.005m.

8.23 Steel work



Tirunelveli

131

8.23.1 Various items of steel work shall be classified and measured separately under following

categories work in each classification shall be described, Bolted, riveted and welded structures shall be

described as such and measured separately.

(a) Rolled sections (joist, channel, angle or tee) fixed independently without connecting plates.

(b) Rolled sections fixed with connecting plate or angle cleats as in main and cross-beams, hip and

jack rafters, purlins connected to common rafters and the like:

(c) Rolled joists, with or without stiffeners in grillages (the weight of siffeners shall be added to the

weight of joists).

(d) Compound girders:

(e) Plate girders (stating type and overall height of girder).

(f) Lattice girders, aerial masts, tank staging and like (stating details of members and overall height of

structure)

(g) Single stanchions composed of rolled - joists or channels with caps, bases, splices,. angle

bnrackets, etc.

(h) Compounds stanchions with caps, bases, splices, angles brackets, etc.

SECTION - 9

9.1 PILE FOUNDATION

9.1.1 Driven in situ pile:

The pile formed within the ground by driving a casiiig of uniform diameter, permanent or

temporary and subsequently filling in the hole so formed with reinforced concrete. For displacing the

subsoil the easing is installed with a shoe, at the bottom end.

Piles shall be installed as accurately as possible according to design and drawings IS 2911

(Part 1 1 Sec 1) - 1979 covers the design and construction of reinforced concrete driven cast in situ

pile.

Greater, care shoudi be exercised in installation of single pile or piles in groups. As a guide for

vectical piles a deviation of 1.50 percent should not normally be exceeded. Piles should not deviate

more than 75mmm from their designed position at the working level of the piling rig. In a pile group

the sequence of installation of piles shall normally be from centre to the periphery of the group or

from one side to the other. Sufficient time shall be allowed When installing piles in a group for the

freshly poured concrete in a pile to set before installing adjacent piles.

The joint between the shoe and tube shall be effectively sealed so as to prevent entry of sub

soil water while driving or withdrawing to forms. If water, sand or slush or any other impurity get into

the forms at any stage and if they cannot be removed to the satisfaction of Engineer-in-charge the



Tirunelveli

132

forms shall be pulled out and driven if so required at the contractors expense and as per the direction

of departmental Officers. While withdrawing the form after casting the pile if there is any disturbance

to cast in site pile, the Engineer in charge shall decide whether the piles shall be rejected and a fresh

pile will have to be driven in the same place with a new shoe. If this is not possible fresh pile will be

driven as per the direction of Engineer in Charge.

Following the founding of the piles at the correct depth, concrete sufficient for a length of one

third pile depth shall be placed in the tube before the initial wittidrawl. As soon as the skin frictin

between the earth and tube has been broken withdrawl shall be stopped and the reminder of the

concrete placed in the tube after which the withdrawal may proceed.

All concrete in the pile must be thoroughly completed in one operation throughout its length

from pile shoe to top of pile as soon as pile driving is completed. Piles shall not be left unconcreted

after driving and founding the easing in position at the end of days work. Either the concreting should

be carried out the same days or the pile easing stopped well above the founding depth say for 2 or 3

metres and driving continued next day.

9.1.2. Set

It is the penetration of pile per below. The set depends upoii area of pile, load and weight of

hammer length of fall, diameter of casing pipe. As soon as the casing pipe is reacted to the founding

depth, the set observation shall be made by the Engineer in Charge. Placing of grills and concreting

shall be done onlyh after obtaining the approval of Engineer in Charge for all piles.

The reinforced concrete work shall comply in all respects with the Indian Standard

Specification and pradtice. Effective means shall be ad.opted to ensure to specified cover to the

reinforcement as per IS 2911 (Pr section 1) 1979 and other aspects as per IS 456/1978. The

reinforcement for pile, pile caps shall be as per the design furnished and as per the direction of the

Engineer in Charge.

Observation made during the driving of each pile shall be recorded in the proforma as laid

down in Indian Standard Number of piles driven their respective length, special features if any should

be recorded.

9.1.3. TESTING OF PILES

Test on pile shall be conducted in accordance with IS 2911 (Part 4) - 1985 load test on piles.

The Contractor will conduct loading tests for the piles selected by the Engineer in charge. The

test load specified above should be put on a test cap over the pile unaided by another support. The

load test on a pile shall not be carried otit earlier than 28 days from the time of casting of pile.

The testing equipments instruments loading structures to be used for making the load test

shall be got approved by the Engineer in charge. The loading platform should be kept atleast 1.50m

above ground level to have sufficient headroom to read about.

The top of the pile cap shall be finished even and smooth and true to plane. The dial gauges

used shall be of rnetre units and shall be filled to the datum bars with magnetic basis. Thedial gauges



Tirunelveli

133

ahould have a sensiture of 0.01 mm. The datum bars shall be of suitable structural section and should

be built in position into masonry or concrete at a distance of 5d where d is the diameter of piles.

The test load may be applied by means of an appropriate capacity hydraulic Jack with pressure

gauge with'remote control pump reacting against rolled steel joists or suitable load frame obtaining

reaction. The pressure gauge will be 96t celebrated from a recognized institution and celebration chart

produced to the Engineer in Charge.

The routine load test shall be cyclic load test or as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.

The method of loading and observation of settlement datas shall be as per the procedure laid

down in Indian Standard Specification.



Tirunelveli

134

SECTION - 10

10.1 WATER SUPPLY

10.1.1 MATERIALS

Galvanised pipes of medium class (B class) conforming to IS : 1239 - 1959 shall be used for all

distribution mains and suction mains.

10.1.2 LAYING OF PIPES

In case of mains below ground level the pipe should always be laid over a sand cushion of

sufficient thickness as directed and wrapped with tar dipped gunny bags, The width of the trench shall

be the nominal diameter of, the pipe plus 40 cm to 55 cm minimum in all suits and which should not

be less than 1 m in rock for mains fixed to the walls of the buildings (above Ground level) the pipes

have to be given a primary coat of red oxide painting and them two coats of best quality synthetic

enamel paint as directed. Teakwood plugs special clamps and screws conforming to specifications and

as directed are to be used for fid ing to masonry or concrete.

Jointing of G.I. Pipes should be done with white lead and thread. Thread should not be left

exposed and the joints should be secured. Flanged joints should also be done wherever necessary and

as directed.

All the brackets, wooden blocks or other materia;s, for fixing the pipes and specials shall be securely

fixed into the wall floor or ceiling as the case may be conforming to standard specification in C.M. 1:3

only.

Any demolition of walls, roof, floor partition or any hole to be made in the same for the

purpose of fixing pipes, fittings shall be carried out by the contractor and made good without any

additional payment.

10.1.3 G.I. SPECIALS & FITTINGS

The G.I. Specials shall be of heavy duty conforming to standard specification.

The G.P. Fittings viz towel rails, soap tray, screw down tap shower shall conform to standard

specification as laid down in the schedule and as directed by the Engineer in Charge.

10.1.4 TESTING

Testing the pipes shall be done wholly at the contractors expense inclusive of all required

apparatus, provision of water etc and as directed by the Engineer-in- Charge.



Tirunelveli

135

SECTION - 11

11.1 1 SANITARY WORKS

11.1.1 MATERIALS

Stoneware pipes shall conform to the specifications as laid down in IS 651-63.

Cast Iron Pipes for sewage and water supply shall conform to IS 1536-1967. The specials shall

conform to IS 53 Part 3 III - 1977.

Wash basins should be of white glazed earthernware. The top of the wash basin shall be at a

height of 83 cm from the finished floor level. Overflows should be of the open type capable of being

easily cleaned. The waste fitting should be provided with Unions for connection to lead any other

suitable pipe. Basin's shall be fixed on approved cast iron frames or brackets.

Urinals shall be of earthernware glazed. Colour of Urinals shall be specified in the schedule.

Each Urinal shall be provided with trot less than two fixing holes on each side having a minimum

diameter of 6.Smm. At the bottom of the urinal and outlet horn shall not be glazed and the surfaces

shall be provided with grooves at right angles to the axis of outlet to facilitate fixing the outset pipe

with cement or suitable binding material. The inside surface of the urinal shall be regular and smooth

throughout to ensure efficient flushing. The bottom of pan shall have sufficient slope from the front

towards the outlet such that there is efficient draining of the urinal.

Urinals shall be fixed in position using wooden plugs of size 50mrn x 5Ornm at base tapering

to 4Omm x 40 mm at the top and of lenght 50 mm. These plugs shall be fixed in wall in CM 1:3. Each

urinal shall be connected to waste pipe as mentioned in the schedule.

The matching earthen ware glazed standard Urinal partition shall be fixed with U Clamps made

up of non-rusting material.

Closet pans shall be of earthernware glazed inside. Colour of water closets will be specified in

the schedule. The back of the pan shall be near vertical as Possible to prevent fouling. The area of

water shall be large and the depth of seal shall, not be less than 50 mm. The dimensions of water

closets shall conform to IS 771 - 1963.

Water closet pan shall be. sunk into floor and embedded in a Cushion of average 15 cm of

brick jelly concrete in time hortan 1:2. The concrete shall be left below the top level of the pan so as

to allow for flooring and its bed concrete.

11.1.2 LAYING OF STONEWARE PIPES

The pipes shall be carefully laid to the alignment level and gradients shown on the plans and

sections and great care shall be taken to prevent any sand earth or other matter from entering to

pipes during laying. As it is not permitted to rectify errors of grade by packing up underneath with

earth. Care should be taken to bring to grade. The pipes between manholes shall be laid truly in

straight lines without vertical or horizontal undulations.

Jointing of pipes shall be done as per IS 4127/1967 paragraph 6.

11.1.3 TESTING



Tirunelveli

136

Testing of pipes shall be done wholy at the contractors expense inclusive of apparatus,

provision of water etc and as directed by the Engineer in Charge.

The test will be for an hour or such longer period as may be set by the Engineer in charge. If

the water level doesn't fall more than 12mm in length of 90m, the test may be considered

satisfactory.

11.1.4 MANHOLES

Inspection chambers and Manholes shall be constructed at the position shown an In

accordance with plans furnished. All materials and work shall conform to relevant standard

specification. The Manhole cover shall conform to IS 172611960. All pipes and step irons of type

specifed shall be built in while the walls are being constructed and fixed in cement mortar 1:3. All

pipes entering a manhole shall be relieved of pressure by having an arch turned over them in the brick

work.

All brackets lewis both wooden blocks or other materials for fitting sani'kary fittings shall be

securely fixed into the wall floor or ceiling as the case may be with standard specification in CM 1:3

only.

Any demolition of walls, roofs floors, partition& or any hole to be made in the same for the

purpose of fixing sanitary fittings or leading pipes to or from sanitary fittings shall be carried out by

the contractor without additional payment.

All other fittings and appliances shall conform with the standard specification and as specified

by the Engineer in Charge.



Tirunelveli

137

SECTION – 12

PAINTING NEW WOOD WORK AND IRON WORK

12.1 Specification for painting new wood work laid down in IS 2338 (Part 1) 167 shall apply.

Specification for painting new iron and steel work laid down in IS 1477 part 1171 shall apply.

Paints, Oils , varnishes etc of approved brand and manufacture shall be used. Ready mixed

paint as received from the manufacturer without any admixtures shall be used.

Approved paints shall be brought to the site of work by the contractor in their original

containers in sealed condition. The material shall be brought in at a time in adequate quantities to

suffice for the whole work or atleast a fortnight work. The materials shall be kept in the joint custody

of the contractor or Engineer in charge. The ernpties shall not be removed from the site of work, till

the relevant item of work has been completed and permission obtained from the Engineer in Charge.

12.1.1 COMMENCING WORK

Painting shall not be started until the Engineer-in-Charge has inspected the items of work to

be painted, satisfied himself about their proper quality and given his approval to commence the

painting work.

12.1.2 PREPARATION OF SURFACE

The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned and dusted. All rust, dirt, scales, smoke and grease

shall be thoroughly removed before painting is started. The prepared surface shall have received Ikhe

approval of the Engineer in charge after inspection. before painting is commenced.

12.1.3 APPLICATION

Before pouring into smaller containers for use, the paint shall be stirred thoroughly in its

containers, when applying also, the painting shall be continuously stirred in the smaller containers so

that its consistency is kept uniform.

The painting shall be laid on evenly and smoothly by means of crossing. and laying off. the

later in the direction of the grain of wood. The crossing and laying off consists of covering the area

over with paint, brushing the surface hard for the first time over and then brushing alternately in

opposite direction two or three times and then finally brushing lightly in a direction at right angles to

the same. In this process, no brush marks shall be left after laying off is finished. The full process of

crossing and laying 1 off will constitute one coat.

Each coat shall he allowed to dry out thoroughly and rubbed smooth before the next coat is

applied. This should be facilitated by thorough ventilation.

Each coat except the last coat, shall be lightly rubbed down with sand paper or fine prmice

stone and cleaned off dust before the next coat is laid.

No left over paint shall be put back into the stock tins. When not in use, the containers shall

be kept properly closed.



Tirunelveli

138

No hair marks from the brush or logging of paint puddles in the corners of panels angles of

moulding etc. shall be left on the work.

In painting door and windows the putty round the glass panels must also be painted, but care

must be taken to see that no paint stains etc. are left on the glass. Tops of shutters and surfaces in

similar hidden locations shall not be left out in painting.

In painting steel work, special care shall be taken while painting over bolts, nuts, rivets, overlaps etc.

SECTION – 13

13. Mosaic Flooring

13.1 Cement concrete flooring tiles shall be manufactured from a mixed cement natural aggregates

and colour materials where required by pressure process. During manufacture the tiles shall be

subjected to the pressure of not less than 140 Kg. per sq.m. (or 2000 1bs. sq. inc.)

13.2 Proporation of cement to aggregate in backing of the tiles shall be not less than 1:5 by weight.

13.3 On removal from mould, the tile shall be kept in rnoist condition continuously for atleast 7 days

and subsequently if necessary kept moist for such a longer period that would ensure their conformity.

to the requirements of Transers, strength. Resistance to wear and tear absorption and would minimise

shrinkage and cracking. Tiles shall be stored under cover.

13.4 TOLERANCE : Tolerance on length and breadth shall be plus or minus one millirnetre Tolerance

on thickness shall be plus 5mm that the range of dimensions if any of one delivery of this shall not

exceed 1 mm of length and breadth and 3inm on g thickness.

13.5 THICKNESS OF WEARING LAYERS

Class of tiles Minimum thickness

of wearing layer (m)

Plain cement and plain coloured tiles for general duty 3

Plain cement and plain coloured tiles for heavy duty 6

(Mosaic) terrace tiles with chips of size varying from the snallest upto 6mm (1/4”)

5

(Mosaic) terrace tiles with chips of size ranging from the

smallest upto 12mm (1/2")

5

(Mosaic) terrace tiles with chips of size ranging from the

smallest upto 20 mm (3/4")

6

13.6. Colours and appearances : The colour and texture of the wearing layer shall be uniforrn

through its thickness.

13.7. When specifying the tiles. the contractor should specifically indicate wherher the chips to be

used are from the smallest units 6mm or from smallest upto 12mm or from the smallest upto 2Omm

size. The officers of the department shall also specify size of chips by referring the approximate

photograph given in figure 4 to figure 6 in Indian Standard 1237/1959.

GENERAL QUALITY OF TILES



Tirunelveli

139

13.8. UnieFs otherwise required the wearing face of the terrace tiles shall be mechanically sound and

flat. The wearing face of the tiles shall be plane free from projections depressions and crack. Chair

cracks not included and shall be reasonlably parallel to the back face of tiles. All angle shall be right

angles and all edges shall be sharp and true.

13.9. Breaking Traverse Strength of tile shall be given as below :

Size of tiles Span Breaking wet

test

Land based dry

test

19.85 x 19.85 cm 15 cm 71 kg 106 kg

24.85 x 248.5 cm 20 cm 90 kg 120 kg

29.85 x 29.85 cm 25 cm 99 kg 149 kg

13.10. The average wear of not less than 12 specimens shall not exceed 2 mm and the wear on any

individual specimen shall not exceed 2.5cm when tested in an Vibration Machine.

13.11 The average percentage of water absorption shall not be less than six full tiles shall not exceed

ten in the case of water absorption test.

13.12 The density of the tiles shall be in the order of about 2.4 gms. The tiles shall be laid with the

minimum possible width of joint and not exceeding 1/32 inch. The joints shall be filled with grey

cement to mtch the finish of the tiles and shall be made atmost invisible when the follors is given the

final polish. The polishing shall be done by means of electric polisher wherever possible and land

polish to other places like vertical faces, on walls, covers, and other areas where the machines can

have no access and to a high degree so as to present a perfectly smooth and clossy surface as given

as possible.

13.13 All angles at junctions of vertical faces shall be rounded off to 1/2" radius with same quality of

materials and colour of the tiles of the floor. But laid in situ add these cover shall be measured as part

of flooring and laid for at the same rates as the flat floors. The colours of the tiles shall generally

match other coloured face adjacent or as may be directed by Engineer-in-Charge.

13.14. The dadoeing and skirting have to be finished by giving necessary races in the brick wall itself

so that the projections does not exceed 3/4" from the face of the wall i.e. the finish plastered surface.

SECTION – 14

14. MISCELLANEOUS 14.1 STEEL DOORS & WINDOWS

All steel doors and windows shall conform to Is 1038-1968. Appendix A and N.B. Code, Part V

of Appendix.

Frames shall be fixed to plumb and accurate as otherwise opening portions will not function

satisfactorily. For actual fixing the procedure is usually given by the makers of each type of door and

window and shall be followed with such modifications as the Engineer in charge order.

The glazing shall conform to standard specification for glaziers work regarding thickness and

type of glass and putty to be used.



Tirunelveli

140

14.2 ALUMINIUM DOORS & WINDOWS & VENTILATORS

The specification shall conform to IS 1949-1961. The fixing of doors, windows and ventilators

shall be as per IS 1081-1960. The glazing shall conform to para 10 of IS 1081-1960.

14.3 ROLLING SHUTTER

The shutter should conform to specification as laid down in IS 6248-1971. Clear width and

clear height of the opening for rolling shutters shall be measured.

14.4 DOORS & WINDOWS, FURNITURE AND FITTINGS

Hold fasts shall be made from mild steel flat Iron of specified size. The bolt head shall be sunk

into the frame and the other end should be fixed in Cement Concrete block of specified size.

14.5 FITTINGS

Fittings shall be of brass or Aluminium or as specified conforming to ISI standards. These shall

be well made, reasonably smooth and free from sharp edges, corners, Flaws and other defects. Screw

holes shall be counter sunk to suit the head of specified screws. The fittings generally used for

different types of doors and windows are indicated in the Schedule. The fittings should be got

approved, by the Engineer in Charge. These fitting should be properly fixed using C.P. Nettle Fold

Screws.

14.6 IRON GRILLS

These shall be manufactured as per drawing and specification. All members shall be

thoroughly cleaned off rust, scales dust etc. and given a red oxide priming coat. The process of

welding various members shall be done as per standard specification.

14.7 WEATHERING COURSE AND PRESSED TILES

Weathering course of brick Jelly concrete is laid over RC Slab using 20 rnm Guage broken

brick jelly and slacked lime in the proportion as specified without using sand. Necessary slope to drain

the rain water shall also be given in the weathering course. The slope shall not be less than 1 in 50

and as directed by the Engineer in Charge.

After six days or after the Concrete laid has hardened, one course of pressed tiles of size 20cm

x 20cm x 2Omm as approved shall be laid in CM 1:3 with standard water proofing agent and rubbed

smoothly.

14.8 RAIN WATER DOWNFALL PIPE

The pipes used shall conform to standard specifications. These shall be straight, true and

smooth and regular in thickness. Pipes shall be secured to the face of the wall, below all joints by

standard holder bat clamps.

14.9 AC SHEET ROOFING

The sheets shall be of the specified approved,quality and shall confirm to IS 459- 1970. The

sheets shall be free from Cracks. Chipped edges or corners and other damages. The roofs shall not be

stretched at a flatter slope than 1 vertical to 5 Horizontal. The normal pitch adopted shall usually be 1



Tirunelveli

141

vertical to 3 horizontal. The sheets shall be laid on the purlins and other roof members as indicated on

the working drawings or as instructed by Engineer in Charge.

14.10 WHITE WASHING AND COLOUR WASHING

Wherever scaffolding is necessary it shall be erected on double suppports tied together by

horizontal pieces over which scaffolding plank shall be fixed. No ballies, bamboos or planks shall rest

on or touch the surface which is being white or colour washed.

Where Ladders are used piece of gunny bags shall be tide on their tops to avoid damage or

scratcher to walls. For white washing the ceiling proper stage scaffolding shall be erected.

Before new work is white washed, the surface shall be thoroughly brushed free from mortar

dropping and foreign matter.

Each coat shall be allowed to dry before the next one is applied. Further each coat shall be

inspected and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge before the subsequent coat is applied.

The mineral colours not affected by lime shall be added to white washing. No colour wash shall

be done until a sample of the colour wash of the tint is approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.

14.11 WOODEN PLATFORM AND PARTICLE BOARD SHUTTERS

Timber as specified shall conform to quality and well seasoned. The specification laid down in

IS 1200 (Part XXI) - 1973 should be followed:

Pafficle board shall be manufactured from particles of wood or other Lingo-Cellulose material

pressed together by means of an organic binder. The shrinkage in thickness and length of the particle

board shall not exceed 5%.

They shall conform to IS 2191 -PR II - 1966.

14.12 FALSE CEILING

The insulating boards shall be of approved quality as per IS code 3348-1965. The exposed

side of board shall be truly level and plane without any local sags. The joints shall be truly parallel and

perpendicular to walls. Care shall be taken to see that the uniformity of the colour of sheets is not

spoilt during fixing operations.

14.13 DAMP PROOF COURSE

Water proofing material of approved quality shall be added to the Cement mixture in the

proportion as speciffied or as directed by the Engineer in Charge. The thickness of DPC is 20mm and

the width is for the full masonry wall.

14.14 TERMITE TREATMENT

The chemical should conform to saandard specification and should be got approved by the

Engineer in Charge. The treatment shall be done at various statges as directed. The proportion of

chemical with water shall be as per standard specification or as directed by the Engineer in Charge.



Tirunelveli

142

14.15 CERAMIC TILE FLOORING

The tiles shall be of approved make and shall generally conform to standard specification and

as directed by Engineer in Charge. They shall be flat and true to shape and free from crakes, Crazing

spots, chipped edges and corners. The laying shall conform to IS 5318-69.

SPECIFICATIONS

PART-II

CHAPTER -1 1.1 General.

1.1.1 Point wiring.

1.1.1.1 Point wiring shall include all works necessary in complete wiring of a switch circuit of any

length from the tapping point on the distribution circuit to the following, via the switch:-

a) Ceiling rose or connector (in the case of ceiling / Exhaust fan point).



Tirunelveli

143

b) Ceiling rose (in the case of pendant points).

c) Back plate (in case of staff pendants, fluorescent fittings with down rods, etc.,)

d) Socket outlet (in case of socket outlet points).

e) Lamp holder (in the case of wall brackets, batten points, bulkhead and similar other

fittings).

f) Call bell / buzzer (in the case the words via the switch should be read as via the ceiling

rose / socket outlet or bell push where no ceiling rose / socket outlet is provided).

1.1.1.2 The following shall be deemed to be included in the point wiring:-

a) Switch.

b) Ceiling rose or connector as required

c) Any special and suitable round block for neatly housing the connector and covering the

fan hook in case of fan point.

d) Wooden box, bushed conduit, or porcelain tubing where cables pass through walls,

etc.,

e) Conduit or metallic covering up to 1.5 metre from floor.

f) Earth wire from three pin socket outlet point / fan regulator fan and lighting fitting to

the common earth including connections, to earth dolley, except the earth wire from

the first tapping point of live wire to the sub-distribution board.

g) All wood or metal blocks, boards and boxes, sunk or surface type including those

required for mounting fan regulator but, excluding those under the main and

distribution switch gear.

h) All fixing accessories such as clips, nails, screws, phil plugs, rawl plugs, wooden

wooden plugs, etc., as required.

i) In case of joint box system of wiring, if specified joint boxes with necessary

connections as required.

j) Connections, to ceiling rose, connector, socket outlet, lamp holder, switch, fan regulator, etc.,

k) Looping in the same switch board and inter-connections between points on the same circuit.

1.1.1.3 Length per point:- The term length per point in point wiring in the case of fan and light point

shall mean the distance between the switch and ceiling rose / connector or back plate /



Tirunelveli

144

lamp holder depending upon the fitting, measured along the run of wiring irrespective of

the number of wires in the run. In the case of socket outlet point, the length shall mean

the distance between the socket outlet and the tapping point of live wire on the nearest

switch board. Any junction box provided for extending the wiring beyond the point

referred to shall not be treated as the nearest tapping point. Separate measurements

may be made where the switches and socket outlet points are located on the same board.

In the case of call bell / buzzer points, the length shall mean the distance between the call

bell and the ceiling rose / socket outlet or bell push. (Where ceiling rose / socket outlet is

not used).

1.1.1.4 The connection between bell push and socket outlet / ceiling rose if wired by flexible cable

shall not be treated as part of call bell point wiring. Where the flexible cable is liable to

mechanical damage, the same shall be suitably protected by PVC sleeve or conduit as

directed by Engineer in charge.

1.1.2 Measurement of point wiring.

1.1.2.1 Wiring points shall be classified as follows:-

(a) Short points not exceeding 3m in length.

(b) Medium points exceeding 3m but not exceeding 6m in length.

(c) Long points exceeding 6m but not exceeding 10m in length.

(d) Special points of length exceeding 10m in length as required.

1.1.2.2 In the case of point with more than one light point controlled by the same switch, such points

shall be measured in parts, i.e., from the switch to the first point as one point and

classified according to Clause 2.1.2.1. For the subsequent points, the distance from fitting

to fitting shall be measured along the run of wiring, treated as one point and classified

according to Clause 2.1.2.1.

1.1.2.3 A light point controlled by two numbers of two way switches shall be measured as two points

from the fitting to the switches on either side and classified according to Clause 2.1.2.1.

Any extra light point in the same switch circuit shall be measured according to Clause

2.1.2.2. i.e., first as two points from switch on either side to the nearest fitting and

classified according to Clause 2.1.2.1. The extra light point is then measured from fitting

to fitting treated as one point and classified according to 2.1.2.1.

1.1.2.4 In the case of call bell / buzzer points with a single call bell / buzzer controlled by more than

one place with a ceiling rose / socket outlet or bell push where ceiling rose / socket outlet

is not provided, the points shall be measured in parts, i.e., from the call bell / buzzers to

one of the nearest ceiling rose / socket outlet or bell push, treated as one point and

classified according to Clause 2.1.2.1.; for the other ceiling rose / socket out let or bell

push to the next ceiling rose / socket outlet or bell push shall be measured along the run

of wiring treated as one point and classified according to Clause 2.1.2.1.



Tirunelveli

145

1.1.2.5 When more than one call bell / buzzer points are controlled by the same ceiling rose / socket

outlet or bell push, the points shall be measured according to Clause 2.1.2.2.

1.1.3 Circuit wiring.

1.1.3.1 Circuit wiring shall mean the length of wiring from the distribution board up to the tapping

point measured along the run of wiring. Such wiring shall be measured on linear basis.

1.1.4 Sub-main wiring.

1.1.4.1 Sub-main wiring shall mean the length of wiring from one main / distribution switch gear to

another main / distribution switch gear, measured along the run of wiring. Such wiring

shall be measured on linear basis.

1.1.5 Measurement of circuit / Sub-main wiring.

1.1.5.1 The length of sub-main / circuit wiring or any other type of wiring on linear basis shall include

all length from end to end of wood batten or conduit as the case may be exclusive of inter-

connections inside the switch board, etc. The increase on account of diversion or

slackness shall not be included in the measurement. The earth wire from the distribution

or Sub-distribution board up to the tapping point shall be measured separately.

1.1.5.2 The length of circuit wiring with two wires shall be measured from the distribution board to the

switch in the circuit irrespective of whether the neutral conductor is taken to switch box or

not.

1.1.5.3 When wires of different circuits are grouped in a single conduit / wood batten the same shall

be measured on linear basis depending on the actual number and sizes of wires run in

conduit / wood batten.

1.1.5.4 When circuit wires and wires of point wiring are run in the same conduit / wood batten, circuit

wiring shall be measured on linear basis depending on the actual number and sizes of

wires run in the existing conduit / wood batten.

1.1.6 Different types of wiring.

1.1.6.1 Except as discussed previously for point wiring, circuit wiring and sub-main wiring; other

different types of wiring shall be measured separately on linear basis along the run of

wiring depending on the actual number and sizes of wires run.

1.1.7 Layout of wiring.

1.1.7.1 Installations with connected loads as under must be wired for supply specified.

Less than 4,000 watts – Single phase.

More than 4000 watts – Three phase with the three circuits kept separate and maintained

balanced as far as possible.



Tirunelveli

146

Motors and apparatus requiring more than 2,500 watts each shall be wired for 400 volts 3

phase supply.

1.1.7.2 The wiring shall be carried out as may be specified in the Tender schedule or specified in the

special specification. ‘Power’ and ‘Heating’ wiring shall be kept separate and distinct from

‘Lighting’ and ‘Fan’ wiring.

All wiring shall be done on the distribution system with main and branch distribution

boards at convenient physical and electrical centres and without fuses at isolated places.

All conductors shall run, as far as possible, along the walls and ceiling so as to be easily

accessible and capable of being thoroughly inspected. In no case open wiring shall be run

above false ceiling without the approval of Engineer in-charge. The concealed wiring when

run along the walls should be as near the ceiling as possible. In all type of wiring due

consideration shall be given for neatness, good appearance and safety.

1.1.7.3 The balancing of circuits in three wire or poly-phase installations shall be arranged before

hand to the satisfaction of the Engineer in charge. Circuits on opposite pole of a three

wire D.C. system or an different phases of a poly phase system shall be kept apart at a

minimum distance of 2 metres unless, they are enclosed in earthed metal casing suitably

marked to indicated the rise of dangerous shock due to the voltage between the

conductors contained in them. In large or important rooms, light and socket outlet points

shall be distributed over more than one circuit, as directed by the Engineer in charge.

1.1.7.4 Medium pressure wiring and associated apparatus shall comply in all respect, with requirement

of rules 50, 51 and 61 of IE rule 1956 as amended: (See Appendix ‘A’).

1.1.7.5 All current consuming devices shall be suitable for the pressure and frequency of the supply to

which these are to be connected.

1.1.8 Drawings.

1.1.8.1 All wiring diagram shall indicate clearly in plan, the main switch board, the distribution fuse

board, the run of various mains and sub-mains and the position of all points with their

classification and their controls. All circuit shall be indicated and numbered in the wiring

diagram and all points shall be given the same number as the circuits to which they are

electrically connected. Distribution boards shall also be marked to indicate the circuit

numbers controlled by them.

1.1.9 Cables.

1.1.9.1 All cables shall conform to relevant Indian Standards.

1.1.9.2 The smallest aluminium conductor for the final circuit shall have a nominal cross sectional area

of not less than 1.5. square mm (1/1.40 mm). The minimum size of aluminium conductor

for power wiring shall be 4 square mm (1/2.24 mm).

1.1.10 Flexible cables.



Tirunelveli

147

1.1.10.1 Conductor of flexible cable shall be copper. The minimum cross sectional are of

conductor of flexible cable shall be 0.0006 square inch (14/0.0076 inch or 14/0.193 mm).

1.1.10.2 Unless the flexible cables and conduits are protected by armour or tough rubber or

PVC sheet they shall not be used in workshops and other places where they are liable to

mechanical damage.

1.1.10.3 Three core flexible cables shall be used for connecting single phase appliances.

1.1.11 Rolling of lamps, fans, socket outlets points and exhaust fans.

1.1.11.1 Incandescent lamps in residential and non-residential building shall be rated at 60

watts and 100 watts respectively.

1.1.11.2 Table fans and ceiling fans shall be rated at 60 watts. Exhaust fans shall be rated

according to their capacity.

1.1.11.3 Five amps sockets outlet points and 15 amps socket outlet points shall be rated at 100

watts and 1000 watts respectively unless the actual values of load are known or specified.

1.1.12 Joints and Looping back.

1.1.12.1 Where the looping back system of wiring is specified the wiring shall be done without

any junction or connection boxes on the line. Where the joint box system is specified, all

joints in conductors shall be made by means of approved mechanical connection in

suitable and approved joint boxes. In non-residential buildings, neutral conductor and

earth continuity wire shall be brought to each switch board situated in rooms and halls.

These shall be terminated inside the switch boards with suitable connectors and the switch

board shall be of adequate size to accommodate one number 5 amps socket outlet and

central switch in future.

These items shall be listed separately in the schedule of work and paid accordingly.

1.1.12.2 In any system of wiring, looping back or joints box system, no bare or twist joints

shall be made. In through run of cables, if the length of the final circuit sub-main is more

than the length of the standard cool, joints shall be made by means of approved

mechanical connectors only in suitable and approved junction boxes.

1.1.13 Connection to Ancillary buildings.

1.1.13.1 Unless otherwise specified, electrical connections to ancillary buildings, such as out-

houses, garages etc., adjacent to the main building at a distance not greater than 3 m and

where no road intervenes shall be taken in an earthed G.I. pipe of suitable size in the

exposed portion at a height of not less than 2.5 m or by UG cables. This applies to both

runs of mains or sub-mains or final sub circuit wirings between the buildings.

1.1.13.2 When the distance between the buildings exceed 3m or a road way intervenes,

separate mains, or sub-mains shall be run from the main building to ancillary building and



Tirunelveli

148

the portion of the same exposed to weather shall be carried in weather proof cable on G.I.

bearer wire at a height not less than 4m above the ground. Alternatively PVC wire

enclosed in G.I. pipe or underground cable may be used below ground level.

1.1.13.3 When a roadway intervenes, the portion of any U.G. cable in the road crossing shall be

enclosed in stone ware pipes.

1.1.14 Structural Alteration to buildings.

1.1.14.1 No alteration which shall affect the structure of building shall be done unless sanction

of the competent authority has first been obtained and request for the same shall be made

through the Engineer-in-charge. Al chases, ducts, holes, etc., required in connection with

the electrical works shall be provided and filled by the contractor at his own cost to the

original architectural finish of the buildings. For new buildings, these chases, ducts, holes

buildings. For new buildings, these chases, ducts, holes etc., shall be provided when the

building is in progress.

1.1.15 Convenience of occupants of the building.

1.1.15.1 When the building is occupied and major portion of the work is required to be done

under that condition, the work shall be carried out in such a way as not to come any

inconvenience to the occupants. In such cases, it may be necessary to work before and

after office hours as required.

1.1.16 Commissioning on completion.

1.1.16.1 Before the workman leaves the work finally, be must make sure that the installation is

in commission.

1.1.17.1 Good workmanship is an essential requirement for compliance with the clauses in this

specification. The work shall be carried out under the direct supervision of a first class

licensed foreman or of a person holding a certificate of competency issued by the State

Government for the type of work involved, employed by the contractor who shall rectify

then, the there, the defect pointed out by the Engineer-in-charge during the progress of

work.

1.1.17 Provision for maximum load.

1.1.17.1 All conductors, switches and accessories shall be of such size as to be capable of

carrying without the respective ratings being exceeded the maximum current which will

normally flow through them.

1.1.18 Addition to an installation.

1.1.18.1 An addition temporary or permanent shall not be made to the authorised loan of an

existing installation until it has been definitely ascertained that the current carrying

capacity and the condition of the existing accessories, conductors, switches, etc., affected

including those of the Supply authorities are adequate for the increased load.



Tirunelveli

149

1.1.19 Design and construction.

1.1.19.1 All materials supplied shall be new and conforming to relevant Indian Standard

Specification wherever they exist. Materials having I.S.S. certification marks will be

preferred.

1.1.20 Special risks.

1.1.20.1 Special forms of construction such as flame proof enclosures shall be adopted where

there is risk of explosion and wherever indicated in the Schedule of Work or Special

Specification.

CHAPTER – 2

2.Reception and distribution of main supply.

2.2.1 Control at point of entry of supply.

2.2.1.1 There shall be linked main switchgear with fuse or circuit breaker on each live conductor of

the supply mains at the point of entry. The wiring throughout the installation shall be

such that there is no break in the neutral wire except in the form of a linked switchgear.

The neutral shall also be distinctly marked. In this connection rule 32 (2) of the Indian

Electricity Rules, 1956 (see Appendix A) shall be referred.

2.2.1.2 The main switchgear shall be situated as near as practicable to the termination of service

line and shall be easily accessible without the use of any external aid.

2.2.1.3 On the main switchgear, where the conductors include an earthed conductor of a two wire

system or an earthed neutral conductor of a two wire system or an conductor which is to

be connected thereto, an indication of a permanent natural shall be provided to identify

the earthed neutral conductor. In this connection Rule 32 (1) of the Indian Electricity

Rules, 1956 (See Appendix A) shall also be referred.

2.2.2 Main switchgears, switch board and their location.

2.2.2.1 All main switches or miniature circuit breakers shall be either of metal clad enclosed

pattern or of any insulated enclosed pattern which shall be fixed at close proximity to the

point of entry of supply.

2.2.2.2 Location.

(a) Open type switch boards shall be placed only in dry situation and in well

ventilated rooms and they shall not be placed in the vicinity of storage

batteries and exposed to chemical fumes.

(b) In a amp situation or where inflammable or explosive dust, vapour or gas is

likely to be present, the switch boards shall be totally enclosed or made flame

proof as may be necessitated by the particular circumstances.



Tirunelveli

150

(c) Switch boards shall not be erected above gas stoves or sinke or within 2.5m of

any washing unit in the washing room of laundries or in the bath rooms,

lavatories, toilets or kitchens.

(d) In case of switch boards, if unavoidably fixed in places likely to be exposed to

weather, to drip or to abnormal moist atmosphere, the outer casing shall me

weather proof and shall be provided with glands or bushings or adopted to

receive screwed conduit according to the manner in which cables are run.

(e) A switch board shall not be installed so that is bottom is within 1.25m, above

the floor, unless the front of the switch board is completely enclosed by a

door, or the switch boards is located in a position to which only authorised

persons have access.

2.2.2.3 Switch boards shall be recessed in the wall if so specified in the schedule of work or in the

special specification. The front shall be fitted with hinged panel of wood or other suitable

material such as hard board in wood frame with locking arrangement; the outer surface of

door being flush with walls. Ample room shall be provided at the back of connections and

at the front between the switchgear mountings and the door.

2.2.2.4 Equipments which are on the front of a switch board shall be so arranged that inadvertent

personal contact with live parts is unlikely during the manipulation of switchgear, changing

of fuses or like operations.

2.2.2.5 No holes other that the holes by means of which the panel is fixed shall be drilled closer

that 1.3cms from any edge of the panel.

2.2.2.6 The various live parts, unless they are effectively screened by the substantial barriers of

non-hygroscopic, non-inflammable insulating material, shall be so spaced that are cannot

be maintained between such parts and earth.

2.2.2.7 The arrangement of the gear shall be such that they shall be readily accessible and their

connections to all instruments and apparatus shall be traceable.

2.2.2.8 In every case in which switches and fuses are fitted on the same pole, these fuses shall be

so arranged that the fuses are not alive when their respective switches, are in the ‘off ‘

position.

2.2.2.9 No fuses other than fuses in instrument circuit shall be fixed on the back of or behind a

switch board panel or frame.

2.2.2.10 All the metal switchgears and switch boards shall be painted, prior to erection with one

coat of antirust proof. After erection, they shall be painted with two coats of approved

enamel or aluminium paint as required on all sides wherever accessible.

2.2.2.11 All switch boards connected to medium voltage and above shall be provided with ‘Danger’

notice plate conforming to relevant Indian Standards.

2.2.3 Types of switch Boards.



Tirunelveli

151

2.2.3.1 Metal clad switchgear shall preferably be mounted on any of the following types of boards.

(a) Hinged type metal boards:- These are particularly suitable for small switch board for

mounting metal clad switchgear connected to supply at low voltage (230 volts)

Such boards shall be suitable for mounting of metal clad switchgear consisting of not

more than one iron clad switch and ICDB 4 way or 6 way 15 amps per way.

These shall consist of a box made of sheet metal no less than 2 mm, thick and shall be

provided with a hinged cover to enable the board to swing open for examination of the

wiring at the back. The joints shall be welded. A teak wood board thoroughly

protected both inside and outside with good insulating varnish—conforming to IS 347-

1952 [specification for Varnish, shellac for general purpose (with amendment No.1)]

and not less than 6.5mm thickness shall be provided at the back for attachment of

incoming and outgoing cables. There shall be a clear distance of not less than 2.5 cm

between the Teakwood board and the cover, the distance being increased for larger

and the cover the insulation of the cable is not subjected to excessive twisting or

bending in any case. The board shall be securely fixed to the wall by means of rag

bolts, plugs or wooden gutties and shall be, provided with a locking arrangement and

an earthing stud.

The earth stud should be commensurate with the size of the earth lead/leads. All

wires passing through the metal boards shall be made with insulating bushes.

No apparatus shall project beyond any edge of the panel. No fuse body shall be

mounted with in 2.5. cm of any edge of the panel.

(b) Fixed type metal boards:- Such boards shall be suitable for large switch boards for

mounting large number of switchgears and / or higher capacity metal clad switchgear

or both.

These shall consist of an angle or channel iron frame fixed on the wall or on the floor

and supported on the wall at the top. There shall be a clear distance of 1 m. in front of the switch board. If there are any attachment or bare connection at the back of the

switch board. Rule 51(1) of Indian Electricity Rules (See Appendix A) shall apply.

The connections between the switchgear mounting and the outgoing cable up to the

wall shall be enclosed in a protection pipe.

2.2.3.2 Teak wood boards:- For small installations connected to a single phase 240 volts supply

teak wood boards may be used as main-boards or sub-boards. These shall be of seasoned

teak or other durable wood with solid back impregnated with varnish of approved quality

with all joints dovetailed.

2.2.4 Dimensions.

2.2.4.1 The detailed dimensions and design of metal boards / Teak wood boards and angle iron

frame work for switchgears including the disposition of the various mounting which shall

be symmetrically and neatly arranged for arriving at the overall dimensions shall be



Tirunelveli

152

prepared and submitted before hand and shall have the prior approval of the Engineer-in-

charge. This will apply to large medium voltage installations.

2.2.5 Making of Apparatus.

2.2.5.1 When a board is connected to voltage higher than 250 volts all the terminals or leads of

the apparatus mounted on it shall be marked in the following colours to indicate the

different poles or phases to which the apparatus or its different terminals may have been

connected:

AC

Three phases – Red, Blue and Yellow

Neutral – Black

DC

Three wire system – Two outer wires – Red and Blue

Neutral - Black

Where four wire three phase wiring is done the neutral shall preferably be in one colour and

the other three wires in another colour.

2.2.5.2 Where a board has more than one switch, each such switch shall be marked to indicate

which section of the installation in\t controls. The main switch shall be marked as such.

Where there is more than one main switch in the building each such switch shall be

marked to indicate which section of the installation and building it controls.

2.2.5.3 All marking required under this rule shall be clear and permanent.

2.2.5.4 All distribution boards shall be marked ‘Lighting’ or ‘Power’ as the case may be and also

marked with the pressure and number of phases of the supply. Each shall be provided

with a circuit list giving details of each circuit which it controls and the current rating of

the circuit and size of the fuse element.

2.2.6 Main and Branch Distribution Boards.

2.2.6.1 Main and branch distribution boards shall be of any type mentioned in 2.2.3.

2.2.6.2 Main distribution boards shall be provided with a switch or circuit-breaker on each pole of

each circuit a fuse on the phase or live conductor and a link on the neutral or earthed

conductor of each circuit. The switches shall always be linked.

2.2.6.3 Branch Distribution Boards

2.2.6.3.1 Branch distribution boards shall be provided with a fuse of a miniature circuit breaker or

both of adequate rating/setting on the live conductor of each circuit and the earthed

neutral conductor shall be connected to a common link and be capable of being

disconnected individually for testing purposes. At least one spare circuit of the same

capacity shall be provided on each branch distribution board.

2.2.6.3.2 In residential, and office installations lights and fans may be wired on a common circuit.

Such sub-circuit shall no have more than a total of ten points of lights, fans and sockets

outlets. The total of such circuit shall be restricted to 800 watts. If a separate fan circuit

is provided the number of fans in the circuit shall not exceed ten. Power circuit shall be



Tirunelveli

153

designed according to the load but in no case shall there be more than two outlets on each

sub-circuit.

2.2.6.3.3 In industrial and other similar installations requiring the use of group control for switches

operation circuits for socket outlets may be kept separate from fans and lights. Normally

fans and lights may be wired on a common circuit. However, if need is felt, separate

circuit may be provided for the two. The load on any low voltage shall not exceed 3,000

watts. In the case of new installation all circuits and sub-circuits shall be designed by

making a provision of 20 per cent increase in load due to any future modification. Power

sub-circuits shall be designed according to the load but in no case shall there be more

than four outlets on each sub-circuit.

2.2.6.3.4 In wiring installations at construction sites, stadium, shipyards, etc., where large number

of lights wattage lamps may be required, there shall be no restriction of load in any circuit

but conductors used in such circuit shall be of adequate size of the load and proper circuit

protection shall be provided.

2.2.7 Installation of distribution Boards.

2.2.7.1 The distribution fuse boards shall be located as near as possible to the centre of the load

they are intended to control.

2.2.7.2 These shall be fixed on suitable stanchion or wall and shall be accessible for replacement

of fuses.

2.2.7.3 These shall be either metal clad type or all insulated type. But, if exposed to weather or

damp situations, they shall be totally enclosed in accordance with I.S. 2148-1968

[Specification for flame-proof enclosures of electrical apparatus (first revision) with

amendment Nos.1 to 3].

2.2.7.4 Where apparatus is to be operated at medium voltage or where medium voltage exists

between two or more adjacent low voltage circuits all terminals or other fixed live parts

not permanently surrounded in insulating material shall either be installed so as to be

accessible only to authorised personnel or shall be enclosed in earthed metal or non-

combustible insulating material and the distribution boards shall be fixed not less than 2 m

apart.

2.2.7.5 All circuits shall be marked distinctly on distribution boards as ‘lighting’ or ‘Power’ as the

case may be. And also marked with the voltage and number of phases of the supply. Each

board shall be provided with a circuit list giving details of each circuit which its controls

and the current rating of the circuits and size of fuse element.

2.2.8 Wiring of Distribution Boards.

2.2.8.1 In wiring a branch distribution board, the total load of the consuming devices shall be

divided as far as possible evenly between the numbers of ways of the board leaving the

spare circuit for further extension.



Tirunelveli

154

2.2.8.2 All connections between places of apparatus or between apparatus and terminals on a

board shall be neatly arranged in a definite sequence following the arrangements of the

apparatus mounted thereon avoiding unnecessary crossings.

2.2.8.3 Cables shall be connected to terminals only be soldered or welded lugs unless the

terminals are of such a form that they can be securely clamped without cutting away of

cable strands. Aluminium conductors should be tinned before insertion in clamps.

2.2.8.4 All bare conductors shall be rigidly fixed in such a manner that a clearance of at least

2.5cm is maintained between conductors of opposite polarity or phase and between the

conductors and any materials other than insulating material.

2.2.8.5 In a hinged board, the incoming and outgoing cables shall be neatly bunched and shall be

fixed in such a way that the door shall be cable of swinging through an angle of not less

than 90 degrees.

2.2.8.6 If required in the Special Specification, a pilot lamp shall be fixed and connected through

an independent single pole switch and fuse to the busbars of the board.

2.2.9 Fuses.

2.2.9.1 A fuse carrier shall not be fitted with a fuse element larger than that for which the carrier

is designed.

2.2.9.2 The current rating of a fuse shall not exceed the current rating of the smallest cable in the

circuit protected by fuse.

2.2.9.3 The use of rewirable fuses should be restricted to circuits with short-circuit level of 4 KV;

for higher level either cartridge of HRC fuses shall be used.

2.2.9.4 Every fuse shall have is own case or cover, on in an adjacent conspicuous position, an

indelible indication of its appropriate current rating for the protection of the circuit which it

controls.

2.2.10 Pussing through walls and floors

2.2.10.1 When conductors pass through walls, any one of the following methods shall be employed.

Care shall be taken to see that wires pass very freely through protective pipe or box and

that wires pass through in a straight line without any twist or cross in wires, on either

ends of such holes.

2.2.10.1A. A box of teak wood or approved hard wood extending through the whole thickness of

the wall shall be buried in the wall and casings or conductors shall be carried so as to

allow 1.3 cm. air space on the three sides of the casing or conductor.

2.2.10.1B The conductors shall be carried in an approved heavy gauge solid drawn or lap welded

conduit confirming to IS 1653-1960 [Specification for Rigid steel conduits for electrical

wiring (Second revision)] or in a porcelain tube of such size that it permits easy drawing

in. The ends of conduit shall be neatly bushed with porcelain, wood or other approved

material.



Tirunelveli

155

2.2.10.2 Insulated conductors while passing through floors shall be protected from mechanical

injury by means of steel conduit (as per IS 165301960) to a height of not less than 1.5

Metres above the floors and flush with the ceiling below. The steel conduit shall be earthed

and securely bushed.

2.2.10.3 Where a wall tube outside a building so as to be exposed to weather , the outer end shall

be bell mouthed and turned downwards and properly bushed on the open end.

2.2.11 Fixing to walls and ceilings.

2.2.11.1 Plug for ordinary walls or ceiling shall be well-seasoned teak or other approved hard wood

not less than 5 cm. long by 2.5 cm square on the inner end and 2 cm square on the outer

end. They shall be cemented into walls within 6.5 mm of the surface; the remainder being

finished according to the nature of the surface with plaster or lime punning.

2.2.11.2 Where owing to irregular coursing or other reasons the plugging of the walls or ceiling can

be done in a better way where neatness is the first consideration. In all such cases an

approved type of asbestos or fibre fixing plug (Raw or Phil plug) with correct size of tools

shall be used and done in a workman like manner.

CHAPTER – 3

3 Fittings and Accessories

3.1 Lighting Fittings

3.1.1 Where conductors are required to be drawn through tube or channel loading to the fitting, the

rube or channel must be free from sharp angles or projecting edge and of such size as will enable

them to be wired with the conductors used for the final circuit without removing the braiding or

tapping. As far as possible all tubes or channels should be of sufficient size to permit or looping back.

Non-current carrying metal parts of each lighting fitting should be bonded to an earth continuity

conductor.

3.1.2 Use of flexible cords – (a) Where a light fitting is supported by one or more flexible

cords, the maximum weight to which the twin flexible cords can be subjected shall be as

follows:

Size of twin flexible cords

Number and diameter of

wires in

Maximum permissible weight

in

Nominal cross sectional area

in sq. inches

inches mm Kg. Lbs

0.0006 14/0.0076 14/0.193 1.4 3

0.0010 23/0.0076 23/0.193 2.3 5

0.0017 40/0.0076 40/0.193 4.5 10

Where a weight greater than 4.5 kgm. (or 10 lbs) has to be supported, other means of

support namely, suitable metal pipe or suitable chain shall be provided.



Tirunelveli

156

(b) Care shall be taken that any hooks or clips used as supports for a flexible cord do not

damage the insulation.

(c) Where it is necessary for a flexible cord to pass through or be installed above a false

ceiling, the flexible cord shall be of the tough rubber or PVC sheathed type (it desired

with reduced thickness of insulation) and the mode of installation shall obviate risk of

mechanical damage.

3.1.1 No inflammable shade shall form a part of a light fitting unless such shade is well

protected against all risks of fire. Celluloid shade or light fittings shall not be used under

any circumstances. Vitreous enamelled iron shade shall be of size 250 mm x 90 mm

(nominal size with a tolerance of 5 mm) Plastic shade shall not be generally used in the

fittings suitable for incandescent lamps.

3.1.1.1 Enclosed type fittings shall be provided with a removable glass receptacle arranged to

enclose the lamp completely and of such size or construction as to prevent undue

heating of the lamp, or if the position of fittings be such that the glass receptacle is

liable to mechanical damage, the glass shall be protected by a suitable wire guard.

3.1.1.2 The leads of prewired fixture shall be terminated on ceiling rose or connector.

3.1.2 Outdoor Fittings:

3.1.2.1 External and road lamps shall have weatherproof fittings of moisture. An insulating

distance piece of moisture proof material shall be inserted between the lamp holder,

nipple and the fitting. Flexible cord conductors and cord grip lamp holders must not be

used where exposed to weather.

In verandahs and similar exposed situations where pendants are used, they shall be of

fixed rod type.

3.2 Bulk Head Fittings

3.2.1.1 Bulkhead fitting shall be of cast iron/cast aluminium body suitably painted white inside

and grey outside complete with head resistant glass cover. B.C. holder and wire guard

suitable for 100 Watts incandescent lamp. Where specified gasket for glass cover and

shock proof B.C. holder shall be provided.

3.2.2 Accessories:

3.3.1 Switches – All switches shall be placed in the live conductor fo the circuit and no single pole

switch or fuse shall be inserted in the earth or earthed neutral conductor of the circuit. Single

pole switches (other than to multiple control) carrying not more than 15 amperes may be of

the tumbler type and the switch shall be “on” when the handle or knob is down.

3.3.2 Lamp Holders – Lamp holders for use on brackets and the like shall have not less than 1.3 cm

nipple and shall be in accordance with LS 1258-1967 (Specification for Bayonet lamp holders

(first revision) (with Amendment No.1) and all those for use with flexible pendant shall be

provided with cord grips. All lamp holders shall be provide with shade carriers. Where centre



Tirunelveli

157

contact Edison Screw lamp holders are used, the outer or screw contact shall be connected to

the “middle wire” or the neutral or to the earthed conductor of the circuit.

3.3.3 Lamps – All incandescent lamps unless otherwise required, shall be hung at height of 2.5 M,

above the floor level.

3.4 They shall be provided with caps of the following patters:-

Upto and including 200 watts Standard Bayone (S.B)

Above 200 watts and not exceeding 300 watts Edison screw (E.S.)

Above 500 watts Golliath screw (G.S.)

3.4.1.1 Ceiling rose – (a) a ceiling rose or any other similar attachment shall not be used on a circuit,

the voltage of which normally exceeds 250 volts.

(c) Normally only one flexible cord shall be attached to a ceiling rose. Specially designed

ceiling roses shall be used for multiple pendants.

(d) A ceiling rose shall not embody fuse terminal and an integral part of it.

3.4.1.2 Socket Outlets:--

(a) A socket outlet shall not embody fuse terminal as integral part of it. But the fuse may

be embodies in plug in which case plug shall be non-reversible and shall be so

arranged and connected that the fuse is connected to phase / live conductor or the

non-earthed conductor of the circuit.

(b) Every socket outlet shall be controlled by a switch.

(c) The switch controlling the socket outlet shall be or the ‘Live’ side of the line.

(d) 5 amps and 15 amps socket outlet shall normally be fixed at any convenient place 23

cms above the floor level or near the switch level as desired by the Engineer-in-

charges. The switch for 5 amps socket outlet shall be kept at norms switch level and

that for 15 amps along with the socket outlet.

15 amps socket outlet in the kitchen of the residential buildings shall be fixed at

convenient place 23 cms above working platform.

In a room containing a fixed bath or shower, there shall be no socket outlet and there

shall be no provision for connecting a portable appliance. Any stationery appliance

connected permanently in the bath room shall be controlled by an isolator switch or

circuit breaker.

(e) Where socket outlets are placed at lower level, they shall be enclosed in a suitable

wooden or metallic box, as the case may be, to harmonise with the system of wiring

adopted.

(f) In an earthed system of supply, a socket outlet and plug shall be of the three pin type,

the third terminal shall be connected to earth.



Tirunelveli

158

(g) Conductors connecting electrical appliance with socket outlet shall be of flexible twin

cord with an earthing cord which shall be secured by connecting between the earth

terminal of plug and the metallic body of the electrical appliance.

(h) Where use of shutter type of interlocking type of socket is required for any special

installation, the items should be separately and specifically listed in the Schedule and

Specification of that particular work.

3.4.1.3 Call – bell / buzzer wiring – Call – bell / buzzer wiring shall not be done by twin flex plastic

insulated wire. It shall be done by the usual point wiring adopted for other accessories. If however

use of flexible cable is unavoidable, it shall be PVC sheathed cable. Where the flexible cable is liable

to mechanical damage, the same shall be suitably protect by PVC sleeve or conduit.

3.4.2 Attachment of fitting and accessories

3.4.2.1 In wood batten wiring, accessories like ceiling roses, brackets, battens, staff pendants etc.

shall be mounted to ceiling or wall on substantial blocks of teak wood or approved hard

wood double board construction twice varnished both inside and outside including back

side after all fixing holes are made in them. Bocks shall not be less than 4 cm. Deep.

3.4.2.2 In wood batten wiring, accessories like switches socket outlets, call bell pushes etc. shall be

flush mounted inside substantial box or block of teak wood or approved hard wood double

board construction twice varnished both inside and outside including back side after all

fixing holes are made in them and attached to the wall. Blocks shall not be less than 4

cm deep. The cover for the box or block shall be of either asbestos cement tile or

phenolic laminated sheet as approved by the Engineer – in – charge.

3.4.2.3 In wood batten wiring, groups of accessories and regulators shall be mounted on well

seasoned and properly secured double teak wood or approved hard wood boards of

suitable size to accommodate the number of fittings. The board shall be well varnished

with pure shellac on all sides, both inside and outside, irrespective of being painted to

match the surroundings. The board shall be divided into two sections, one for the

switches which shall be flush mounted and the other for regulators fixed on the board with

suitable flat washers and round head iron screws ( or any other type of screw as required).

The cover for section accommodating switches and socket outlets shall be of either

aspectos cement sheet or phenolic laminated sheet fixed with aluminium alloy / brass /

cadmium plated iron screws as approved by the Engineer-in-charge. Wherever possible

the control boxes shall be recessed in case of wood batten wiring and in such cases metal

boxes conforming to clause 2.4.3. A9 shall be used. The metal boxes shall be suitably

earthed.

3.4.2.4 Alternatively in the case of wood batten wiring, switches may be surface mounted on teak

wood or approved hard wood boxes. But in this case, the rate shall be suitably reduced

and suitably amended item entered in the schedule of work.

3.4.2.5 In case of conduit wiring, all accessories like switches, socket outlets, call bell pushes and

regulators shall be fixed in flush pattern inside metal boxes conforming to clause 2.4.3.



Tirunelveli

159

A9. Accessories like ceiling roses, brackets, batterns, stiff pendants etc. shall be fixed on

metal outlet boxes.

3.4.2.6 Aluminium alloy or brass or cadmium plated iron screws shall be used to fix the accessories to

their bases.

3.4.2.7 The block, board shall (normally) be mounted with their bottom 1.25 metre from floor level.

3.4.3 Fans, reguloators and clamps.

3.4.3.1 Ceiling fans. – (a) Ceiling fans including their suspension shall conform to I.S. 374-1966

(Second revision) – [Electric ceiling type fans and regulators (with Amendment Nos. 1 and

2)].

(b) All ceiling fans shall be wired to ceiling roses or to special connector boxes and

suspended from hooks or shackles with insulators between hooks and suspension rods.

There shall be no joint in the suspension rod.

(c) For wooden joists and beams, the suspension shall consist of M.S. flat of size not less

than 40 mm x 6 mm secured on the sides of the joists or beams by means of two

coach screws of size not less than 5 cm for each flat. Where there is space above the

beam, a through-bolt of size not less than 1.5cm dia shall be placed above the beam

from which the flats are suspended. In the later case the flats shall be secured from

movement by means of another bolt and nut at the bottom of the beam. A hook

consisting of M.S. rod of size not less than 1.5 cm dia. Shall be inserted between the

M.S. flat through oval holes on their sides. Alternatively the flats may be sent inwards

to hold tightly between them by means of a bolt and nut a hook of ‘S’ form.

(d) In the case of I beams, flats shall be shaped suitably to catch the flanges and shall be

held together by means of a long bolt and nut.

(e) For concrete roofs, ceiling fan hooks shall be got buried in the concrete during

construction.

16mm dia. M.S. rod in the shape of ‘ U ‘ with their vertical legs bent horizontally at

the top at least 19 cm on either side and bound to the top reinforcement of the roof

shall be used, as shown in Drawing No. 2 attached.

(f) Canopies on top of suspension rod shall effectively hide the suspension.

(g) The leading in-wire shall be of nominal cross sectional area not less than 1.5 sq.mm.

and shall he protected from abrasion.

(h) The fan body should be bonded to an earth continuity conductor.

(i) Unless otherwise specified, all ceiling fans shall be hung not less than 2.4 m above

the floor and 0.3m from the bottom of the ceiling / false ceiling. Where room h eight

permits the optimum height for a fan would be 2.75m.



Tirunelveli

160

3.4.3.2 In the case of measurement of extra down rod for ceiling fan including wiring, the same shall

be measured in units of 10 cms. Any length less than 5 cm. Shall be ignored

The wiring of extra down rod shall be paid as supplying and drawing cable in existing

conduit.

3.4.3.3 Exhaust fan. – (a) Exhaust fan shall conform to relevant Indian Standards.

(b) Exhaust fans shall be erected at the places indicated by the Engineer-in-charge. For

fixing an exhaust fan, a circular hole shall be provided in the wall to suit the size of the

frame, which shall be fixed by means of rag bolts embedded in the wall. The hole

shall be neatly plastered to the original finish of the wall. The exhaust fan shall be

connected to exhaust fan point which shall be wired as near to the hole as possible by

means of a flexible cord, care being taken that the blades rotate in the proper

direction. The exhaust fan body should be bonded to an earth continuity conductor.

(c) For Exhaust fans for installation in corrosive atmosphere the exhaust fan shall be

painted with special PVC paint or Chlorinated rubber paint (Chlo rubber paint).

(d) Installation of exhaust fans in kitchens, dark rooms and such other special locations

need careful consideration.

3.4.3.4 The regulators of ceiling fans / exhaust fans if made of metal shall be connected to earth by

loop earthing.

3.4.3.5 Similar parts of all switches, lamp holders, distribution fuse boards, switchgears,

ceiling roses, brackets, pendants, fans and all other fittings of the same type shall be Inter-

changeable in each installation.

CHAPTER - 4

4 Methods of Internal wiring

4.1 Tough Rubber Sheathed or P.V.C. – Sheathed wiring system.

4.1.1 General – Wiring with tough rubber-sheathed cable is suitable for low voltage Installation, and

should not be used in places exposed to sun and rain nor in damp places, but may be installed in the

above places, provided wires are sheathed in special approved protective covering against atmosphere

and well protected to withstand dampness and wiring with PVC sheathed cable is suitable for medium

voltage installation and may be installed directly under exposed conditions of sun and rain or damp

places.

4.1.1 Attachment to Walls and ceilings – All sheathed cables on brick walls, stone or plaster

walls and ceilings, steel joists, or any structural steel work shall be run on well seasoned

perfectly straight and well varnished on four sides teak wood batten not less than 10 mm

finished thick and the width of which is such as to suit total width of cables laid on the

batten. Prior to erection, these shall be painted with one coat of varnish conforming to IS

347 – 1952 or approved distemper or approved paint of colour to matel with the

surroundings. These battens shall be secured to the walls and ceilings by flat head wood



Tirunelveli

161

screws to wood plugs or other approved plugs. (see 2.2.11) at an interval not exceeding

75 cm. The flat head wood screws shall be counter sunk within the wood batten and

smoothed down with file.

Where wiring is to be carried along the face of rolled steel joist, a wooden batten of

adequate width shall first be laid on the same and clipped to its as inconspicuously as

possible. The wiring should then be fixed to this backing in the ordinary way where wiring

passes through structural steel work, the holes shall be suitably bushed to prevent

abrasion of cables.

This method of wiring shall in no case be run above false ceiling without the approval of

Engineer-in-charge.

4.1.1.1 Link clips- Only tinned brass link clips or joint clips shall be used. Link clips or joint

clips shall be so arranged that one single clip shall not hold more than two twin core

TRS or PVC sheathed cables upto 2.5 sq.mm above which a single clip shall hold a

single twin core cable or two single core cables.

The clips shall be fixed on varnished wood battens with brass pins or brass screws and

spaced at intervals of 10 cm in the case of horizontal runs and 15 cm in the case of

vertical runs. For the wiring and runs of mains exposed to heat and rain, clips specially

made for outdoor use from a durable metal, resistant to weather and atmospheric

corrosion shall be used.

4.1.1.2 Protection of TRS or PVC sheathed wiring from Mechanical damages.

In case where there are chances of any damage to the wiring, such wiring shall be covered

with sheet metal protective covering, the base of which is made flush with the plaster or

brick work, as the case may be or the wiring shall be drawn through a conduit pipe

complying with all requirements of conduit wiring.

Such protective covering shall in all cases be fitted on all down drops within 1.5.m from

the floor.

4.1.1.3 Bends in wiring – The wiring shall not in any circumstances be bent so as to form a

right angle but shall be rounded off at the corners to a radius not less than six times

the over-all diameter of the cable.

4.1.1.4 Passing through floors – All cables taken through floors shall be enclosed in an

insulated heavy gauge steel conduit extending 1.5m. above the floor and flush with

the ceiling below, or by means of any other approved type of metallic covering. The

ends of all conduits or pipes shall be neatly bushed with porcelain, wood or other

approved material. The conduit pipes, wherever accessible, shall be securely earthed.

4.1.1.5 Passing through walls. – The method to be adopted shall be that laid down under

2.2.10. 1A or 2.2.10.1B. In the later case, there shall be one conduit for every twin-

core cable or two runs of single-core cable, and the conduit shall be neatly arranged

so that the cables enter them straight without bending.

4.1.1.6 Buried cables. – The tough rubber-sheathed cables shall not be buried directly in

plaster. Where so specified, they may be taken in teak wood channelling of ample

capacity or cement chase or conduit pipe buried in the wall.



Tirunelveli

162

4.1.1.7 Stripping of Outer Covering. – While cutting and stripping of the outer covering of the

cables, care shall be taken that the sharp edge of the cutting instrument does not

touch the rubber or PVC sheathed insulation of conductors. The protective outer

covering of the cables shall be stripped off near connecting terminals, and this

protective covering shall be maintained upto the close proximity of connecting

terminals as far as practicable. Care shall be taken to avoid hammering on link clips

with any metal instruments, after the cables are laid.

4.1.1.8 Joints – Where joint box system is specified, joints shall be made by means of

connectors, insulated with porcelain or other approved material and enclosed in joint

boxes. The joint boxes shall be of size 10 cm x 10 cm minimum and shall be so

constructed as to prevent insects from entering them and allow the white washing of

the walls without water having access to the connections. The joint boxes shall be

made moisture proof with an approved plastic compound. All cables shall be bonded

through or across these boxes. Bonding connections shall be so arranged as not to

come in contact with plaster.

4.1.1.9 Painting. – If so required, the tough rubber sheathed wiring shall, after erection, be

painted with one coat of oil-less paint or distemper of suitable colour over a coat of

oil-less primer, and the PVC-sheathed wiring shall be painted with a synthetic enamel

paint of quick drying type.

4.1.1.10 4.2 Metal sheathed wiring system.

4.2.1 General. – Metal-sheathed wiring system is suitable for low voltage installation and shall not

be used in situations where acids and alkalies are likely to be present. Metal-sheathed wiring

may be used in places exposed to sun and rain provided no joint of any description is exposed,

this system may be installed in damp places with approved protection against dampness

coming in contact with open ends of cables.

4.2.1 Link clips. – Only tinned brass link clips or joint clips shall be used. Link clips or joint clips

shall be so arranged that one single clip shall not hold more than two twin core metal-

sheathed cables upto 2.5 mm2 above which a single clip shall hold a single twin core cable.

The clips shall be fixed on varnished wood battens with brass pins or brass screws and placed

at intervals of 10 cm in the case of horizontal runs and 15 cm. In the case of vertical runs.

For the wiring and runs of mains exposed to heat and rain clips specially made for the

outdoor use from a durable metal, resistant to weather and atmospheric corrosion, shall be

used.

4.2.1 Attachment to Walls and Ceilings. – All metal-sheathed cables on brick walls, stone walls or

plastered walls and ceilings, steel joists or any structural steel work shall be run on well-

seasoned and perfectly straight teak wood battens of not less than 10 mm finished thickness,

which have been well varnished on four sides. The width of teak wood battens shall be such

as to suit the total width of cables laid on the batten. Prior to erection, these shall be painted

with one coat of varnish (conforming to IS 347-1952 [(Specification for Varnish, Shellac for

general purposes (with Amendment No. (1)] or approved paint of colour to match with the

surroundings. These battens shall be secured to the walls and ceilings by flat-head wood



Tirunelveli

163

screws to wood plus or other approved plugs at an interval not exceeding 75 cm the flat head

wood screws shall be counter sunk within wood batten and smoothed down with file.

4.2.1 Wiring on Rolled Steel Joints:-- Where is to be carried along the face of rolled steel joins a

wooden batten shall first be laid on the joint and clipped to it as inconspicuously as possible.

The wiring shall be fixed to the batten in the ordinary way.

4.2.1 Protection of wiring from Mechanical Damage:-- In cases where there are chances of any

damage to the wiring such wiring shall be covered with sheet metal protective covering the

base of which is made flush with the plaster or brickwork, as the case may be, or the wiring

shall be drawn through a steel conduit pipe (see IS 1653-1960) by complying with all

requirements of conduit system of wiring.

The protective covering shall in all cases be carried right through the entire length of such

doubtful positions.

4.2.1 Joints:-- Where joint box system is specified, joints shall be made by means of connectors,

insulated with porcelain, or other approved materials and enclosed in joint boxes. The joint

boxes shall be so constructed as to prevent insects from entering them, and to allow the

white washing of the walls without water having access to the connectors. All cables shall be

conded through, or across these boxes. Bonding connections shall be so arranged as not to

come in contact with plaster.

4.2.1 Stripping of insulation and Outer covering:-- When rubber or, PVC insulation has to be

stripped for joints, the metal sheathing shall be nicked only, not cut, and the insulation

between the metal sheath and the conductors shall be of rubber or PVC sheath only. All tape

shall be stripped off. Where paper insulated metal sheathed cable is used, all opening in the

same shall be efficiently sealed.

While cutting and stripping of the outer covering of the cables, care shall be taken that the

sharp edge of cutting instrument does not touch the rubber or PVC insulation of

conductors. While connecting conductors to the connecting terminals of accessories, care

shall be taken to remove cotton tape covering from the top of rubber insulation of cables.

The cotton tape covering shall always remain inside lead covering of cables.

4.2.1 Passing through floors:-- All cables taken through floors shall be enclosed in an insulated steel

conduit (see IS 1653-1960) extending 1.5 m above the floor the flush with the ceiling

below, or protected by means of any other approved type of metallic covering. The ends of

all conduits or pipes shall be neatly bushed with porcelain, wood or other approved materials.

4.2.1 Passing through Walls:-- The method to be adopted shall be that laid down under 2.2.10.1A or

2.2.10.1B. In the latter case there shall be one conduit for every twin-core cable or two runs

of shingle S. core cable and the conduits shall be neatly arranged so that the cables enter

them straight without bending.

4.2.1 Buried cables:-- Metal-sheathed cables shall in no case be buried directly in the plaster or

under any masonry work.

4.2.1 Earthing:-- Precautions shall be adopted to ensure that all lead sheathing including portable

appliance with exposed metal parts, together with all joint boxes and other similar



Tirunelveli

164

receptacles are efficiently earthed in accordance with the requirement laid down under

Chapter 6 and made electrically continuous throughout their lengths by means of soldered

joints or approved suitable clamps or alternatively with earth continuity conductors (earth

bonded cables) specially manufactured for the purpose. The earthing shall extend to all main

switches, distribution boards etc., in compliance with I.E.rules, 1956 (see Appendix A) as well

as manufacturer’s design and instructions in connection with earthing of all insulated

microgap main switches or similar fittings. For earthing of Anti Static Flooring for Operation

Theater – See 14.16 (Civil specification).

4.2.1 Testing”—The electrical resistance of the metal sheathing together with the resistance of the

earthing lead, measured from the connection with the earth electrode to any other position in

the completed installation, shall not exceed one ohm.

4.2.2 Painting:-- Where required, all metal-sheathed wiring or its protective covering when such is

fitted, shall be neatly painted after erection with two coats of zinc paint.

4.2.3 Conduit wiring system

4.3.A Surface conduit wiring system

4.3.A1 General:-- Conduit wiring shall be provided for the following cases

(a) Situations where considerable dust or fluff is present (for example in textile mills and

factories).

(b) In places used for hazardous trade or process (for example, oil mills, paint and varnish

factories, etc.,) and

(c) Places where writing is likely to receive mechanical damage (for example, godowns,

engine rooms, rope and motor alleys) and where damp situations exist.

Gas, water or steam pipes shall not be sued for the protection of conductors.

All accessories shall be of approved design and of metal construction.

Ends or outlets of conduits shall be provided with suitable screwed bushes.

Ends of conduits shall enter and be mechanically secured to the switch, fuses, control

gear, motor terminal box, etc. In certain applications it may be necessary to use

galvanized or copper plated flexible tubing of suitable quality which shall be mechanically

secured by approved type of coupling. Flexible conduit shall not be used for general

wiring. It may be sued for connection between switch and starter or for a maximum

distance of 60 cm. To connect an apparatus. Such flexible conduits should have a

separate earth continuity wire bonded at either end to the conduit and or the apparatus.

All exposed screw threads or other bare parts shall be coated with rust-proof paint. Joint

boxes, drawing in boxes and inspection bends shall be complete at all times with metal

covers secured by adequately spaced screws.

4.3.A2 Types and Size of conduit:-- All conduit pipes shall be conforming to IS. 1653-1972 [Rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring (second revision)] finished with galvanised or stove enamelled

surface. All conduit accessories shall be of threaded type and under no circumstances, pin grip type or

clamp type accessories be used. The conduit wiring system shall be complete in all respect including



Tirunelveli

165

accessories. No steel conduit less than 19mm. In dia shall be used. The capacity of conduits shall be

in accordance with the requirements specified in table as below.

Max. capacity of conduits for the drawing – in of 250 volts grade cables.

Conductor of cables. Size conduit (mm)

NUMBER OF (CABLES MAX.)

19/20 25.4 31.8 34/40 51/50 63.50

Nominial cross

sectiona

l area mm2

Number and dia

in mm

of Wires

S B S B S B S B S B S B

2.5 1/1.8 6 5 10 8 18 12

4 1/2.24 4 3 7 6 12 10

6 1/2.80 3 2 6 5 10 8

10 7/1.36 2 4 3 6 5 8 6

16 7/1.70 2 4 3 7 6

25 7/2.24 3 2 5 4 8 6 9 7

Note.- The table shows the maximum capacity of conduit for the simultaneous drawing-in of cables. The table applies to 250 volts grade cables. The columns headed ‘S’ apply to

runs of conduit which have distance not exceeding 4.25 m between draw in boxes and

which do not deflect from the straight by an angle of more than 15 degree. The columns headed ‘B’ apply to runs of conduit which deflect from the straight by an angle of more

than 15 degree.

4.3. A3. Bunching of cables.- Unless otherwise specified insulated conductors of AC supply and DC

supply shall be bunched in separate conduits. Cables carrying alternating current if

installed in metal conduit shall always be bunched such that the outgoing and return

cables are drawn into the same conduits.

4.3. A4 Conduit Joints.- Conduit pipes shall be joined by means of screwed couplers and screwed

accessories only. In long distance straight runs of conduit inspection type couplers at

reasonable intervals shall be provided or running threads with couplers and jam-nuts (in

the latter case the bare threaded portion shall be treated with anticorrosive preservative)

shall be provided. Thread on conduit pipes in all cases shall be between 13mm to 27mm

long sufficient to accommodate pipes to full threaded portion of couplers or accessories.

Cut ends of conduit pipes shall have to sharp edges n or any burrs left to avoid damage to

the insulation of conductors while pulling them through such pipes. Separate lengths of

conduits, etc., after they have been prepared my if required, be submitted for inspection

to the Engineer-in-charge before being fixed.

4.3. A5 Protection against dampness.- In order to minimize condensation or sweating inside the

tube, all outlets of conduit system shall be properly drained and ventilated, but in such a

manner as

to prevent the entry of insects as far as possible.

4.3. A6. Protection pf conduit against rust.- The outer surface of the conduit pipes, including all

bends, unions, tees, junction boxes, etc, forming part of the conduit system shall be

adequately protected against rust particularly when such system is exposed to weather.

In all cases no bare threaded portion of conduit pipe shall be allowed unless such bare

threaded portion is treated with anti-corrosive preservative or covered with approved

plastic compound.



Tirunelveli

166

4.3. A7 Fixing of conduit.- (a) Conduit pipes shall be fixed by heavy gauge saddles, secured to

suitable wood plugs or any other approved plugs with screws in an approved manner at an

interval of not more than one metre, but on either side of couplers or bends or similar

fittings, saddles shall be fixed at a distance of 30 cm from the centre of such fittings. The

saddle should not be less than 24 gauge for conduits up to 24 mm dia and not less than

20 gauge for larger diameter.

(b) When conduit pipes are to be laid along the trusses, steel joints, etc., the same shall

be secured by means of ordinary clips or girder clips as required by the Engineer-in-

Charge. Where it is not possible to drill holes in the truss m embers, suitable clamps

with bolts and nuts shall be used. The width and thickness of the ordinary clip or

girder clips and clamps shall not be less than as stated below:

For clamps or ordinary clips:

Sizes of conduit Width of Shaddle clip. Thickness of clip

19/20 mm 19 mm 20 SWG

20 mm, 19 mm 20 SWG

32 mm and above. 25 mm 18 SWG

Girder clips.- For all sizes of conduits, the size of clamping rod shall be 7 SWG dia.

4.3. A8 Bens in conduit.- All necessary bends in the system including diversions shall be done by

bending pipes; or by inserting suitable solid or inspection type normal bends, elbows or

similar fittings; or by fixing cast-iron inspection boxes whichever is more suitable. Conduit

fittings shall be avoided as far as possible on conduit system exposed to weather; where

necessary solid type fittings shall be used. Radius of such bends in conduit pipes shall be

not less than 7.5 cm. No length of conduit shall have more than the equivalent of four

quarter bends from outlet to outlet the bends at the outlets not being counted.

4.3. A9 Outlets.- All outlets for fittings switches, etc, shall be boxes of suitable metal or any other

approved outlet boxes for either surface mounting or flush mounting system, as required.

the switch or regulator box shall be made of metal on all sides except on the front. In the

case of cast iron boxes, wall thickness shall be at least 3 mm and in the case of welded

mild steel sheet boxes the wall thickness shall not be less than 18 gauge for boxes, upto

the size of 20 cm x 30 cm and above this size 16 gauge M.S. boxes shall be used. Expect

where otherwise stated at least 3 mm thick phenolic laminated sheets shall be fixed on the

front with aluminium alloy/brass/cadmium plated iron screws as approved by the

Engineer-in-charge. All switches except piano type switches, socket outlets and fan

regulators shall be fixed on wooden/metal strips which shall be screwed/welded to the

box.

The metal box shall be earthed.

4.3. A10 Painting of conduits and accessories.- After installation, all accessible surface of conduit

pipes fitting switch and regulator boxes etc., shall be painted in compliance with clauses

under Chapter 8- Painting.



Tirunelveli

167

4.3. A11 Conductors.- All conductors used in conduit wiring shall preferably be stranded. No single-

core cable of nominal cross-sectional area greater than 130 mm2 shall be enclosed along

in a conduit and used for alternating current.

4.3. A12. Erection and earthing of conduit.- The conduit of each circuit or section shall be

completed before conductors are drawn in. The entire system of conduit after erection

shall be test ed for mechanical and electrical continuity throughout and permanently

connected to earth conforming to the requirements specified under Chapter 6 – Earthing,

by means of special approved type earthing clamp efficiently fastened to conduit pipe in a

workman like manner for a perfect continuity between each wire and conduit. Gas or

water pipes shall not be used as earth medium. If conduit pipes are liable to mechanical

damage they shall be adequately protected. In a conduit system, pipe must be continuous

when passing through walls or floors.

4.3. A13. Metal conduit pipe not to be used as an earth-continuity conductor. – Metal conduit pipe

should not generally be used as an earth continuity conductor. A separate earth continuity

conductor of size not less than 14 SWG tinned copper bare wire shall be used as an earth

continuity conductor for earthing of metal outlet boxes and of appliances through 3 pin

plugs and sockets. This earth continuity conductor may be threaded inside the conduit

pipe or bound spirally outside on the conduit as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

4.3. B Recessed conduit wiring system

4.3. B1 General.- Recessed conduit wiring system shall comply with all the requirements for

surface conduit wiring system and in addition conform to the requirements specified in the

following clauses:

4.3. B2. The chase in the wall shall be neatly made and be ample dimensions to permit the conduit

to be fixed in the manner desired. In the case of buildings under construction chases shall

be provided in the wall, at the time of their construction. The conduits shall be buried in

the wall before plastering and shall be filled up neatly after erection of conduit. In case of

exposed brick/rubble masonry work, special care shall be taken to fix the conduit and

accessories in position along with the building work.

4.3. B.3 Conduits cast in Concrete slabs.- Where conduits are to be cast in concrete slabs, the

boxes and conduits are held in position by blocks and iron wire fastened to the reinforcing

bars. The concrete is then poured and tamped. For structural reasons these runs of

conduits are normally close to the bottom surface or near the central portion of the floor

slab. If a great number of conduits must be embedded it may be necessary to increase

the slab thickness. This refers of course to conduits being installed in a structural slab. In

many instances, the structural slab is covered with a concrete topping or fill in which the

conduit may be installed without affecting the integrity of the slab. In all cases, the local

civil Engineer-in-charge should be consulted. In any event the top of any conduit shall be

at least 19 mm below the finished floor surface in order to prevent cracking. When heavy

trunking is expected, this allowance should be increased to 38 mm minimum.

In general, the following rule should be observed:-



Tirunelveli

168

(a) conduits shall not have an outer diameter greater than one third of the slab thickness

as

measured at its thinnest point.

(b) Conduits, running parallel to each other shall be spaced not less than three times the

outer diameter of the largest conduit centre-to-centre.

(c) Conduits running parallel to beam axis shall not run above beams.

(d) Conduit crossings shall be as near to a right angle as possible.

(e) Minimum cover over conduits shall be 19 mm.

4.3. B4. Fixing of conduit in chase.- The conduit pipe shall be fixed by means of staples or by

means of saddles not more than 60 cm. apart. Fixing of standard bends or elbows shall be

avoided as far as practicable and all curves maintained by bending the conduit pipe itself

with a long radius which will permit easy drawing-in of conductors. All threaded joints of

conduit shall be treated with some approved preservative compound to secure protection

against rust.

4.3. B5. Inspection boxes.- Suitable inspection boxes shall be provided to permit periodical

inspection and to facilitate removal of wires. If necessary. These shall be mounted flush

with the wall. Suitable ventilating holes shall be provided in the inspection box covers.

4.3. B6 Types of accessories to be used.- All outlets, such as switches and wall sockets, may be

either of flush mounting type or of surface mounting type as required.

(a) Flush mounting type.- All flush mounting outlets shall be on cast-iron or mild steel

sheet boxes with a cover of approved insulating material. The switches and other

outlets shall be mounted on such boxes as would be approved. The metal box shall be

efficiently earthed with conduit by an approved means of earth attachment.

(b) Surface mounting type.- If surface mounting type outlet box is specified it shall be of

any approved insulating material and outlets mounted in an approved manner.

4.3. B7. To facilitate drawing of wires in the conduit, G.I. fish wire of 10 SWG shall be provided

along with laying of recessed conduit.

4.2.4 Non metallic conduit wiring system (PVC rigid conduits).

4.4.1. General.- Regid non metallic conduits are used for surfaced and recessed conduits

wiring in low and medium voltage installations.

4.4.2 Rigid non-metallic conduits shall conform to I.S. 2500 – 1973 (first revision) (Rigid non-

metallic conduits for electrical installations) and their fitting shall conform to IS. 3419-1965

(Fittings for rigid non-metallic conduit).



Tirunelveli

169

4.4.3 The non-metallic conduit shall be protected upto a height of 1.5 metres from floor against

mechanical damage.

4.4.4 Earth continuity conductor.- Where rigid non-metallic conduits are used in conjunction with

metal junction boxes and metal outlet boxes, an earth continuity wire shall be run within the

conduit and all such metallic boxes shall be earthed efficiently through the earth continuity

wire.

4.4.5 The exterior surfaces of the conduit shall be reasonably free from grooving and other defects.

the interior of the conduits shall be free from obstructions which might cause abrasion of

cables or which might interfere with the ready introduction or withdrawal of cables of

maximum size and number permitted to be enclosed by the conduit.

4.4.6 The ends of each length of conduit shall be cleanly cut or formed plane and shall be free from

burr.

4.4.7 Care should be taken while heating the conduit with a flame to avoid over heating which may

lead to blistering or cracking during the bending operations.

4.4.7 Otherwise the following relevant clauses in 2.4.3.A or 2.4.3. B as the case may be shall apply

4.2 A2; 2.4.3. A3; 2.4.3. A5; 2.4.3. A7; 2.4.3. A8; 2.4.3 A9; 2.4.3. B2; 2.4.3. B4; 2.4.3. B5;

2.4.3. B6 and 2.4.3. B7.

CHAPTER – 5

5 Specification for bus bar and bus bar chambers for medium voltage installations.

5.1 Bus bar chambers:

5.1.1 Bus bar chamber shall be fabricated with M.S. angles for frame work and covered all round

with sheet steel of thickness not less than 1.5 mm in a box form. It shall be provided with

detachable covers on all sides fitted with dust excluding gasket, secured with sufficient

numbers of cadmium plated iron screws to ensure that the covers are dust tight. Bus bar

chambers for bus bars of more than 90 cm. length shall have horizontal and vertical stiffeners

welded to the main frame.

Alternatively the bus bar chamber shall be made of sheet steel of thickness not less than 3

mm with detachable covers on all sides and dust excluding gasket. The joints shall be

continuous welded. The detachable cover shall be secured to the box with sufficient

number of cadmium plated iron screws to ensure dust tightness. This type of bus bar

chamber shall be restricted for bus bars up to 90 cm length.

Bus bar chambers of size up to 90 cm shall have detachable end covers so that the same

can be extended. Pilot lamp if, provided shall be housed in separate extended chamber

with insulated partition between the bus bar chamber and pilot lamp chamber.



Tirunelveli

170

5.1.2 The bus bar chamber shall be painted with a coat of primer red oxide paint and

finished with two coats of enamel paint of approved shade.

5.1.3 Bus bars.

5.1.3.1 Bus bars shall be made of copper, wrought aluminium alloy conforming to relevant

Indian Standards and shall be of sufficient cross section so that a current density of 1000

amps/sq. inch. (160 amp/sq. cm) in the case of copper and. 800 Amps/Sq. inch (130

amp/sq.mm) in the case of aluminium of aluminium alloy is not exceeded at nominal

current rating. the cross section of the neutral bus bar shall be the same as that of the

phase bus bar for bus bars of capacities up to 200 amps and for higher capacities the

neutral bus bar must not be less than half the cross section of that of phase bus bar. The

recommended sections of bus bars are given in the following table:-

Bus Bar Sections

Aluminium Copper

Recommended section Tabular

Current rating in

amps upto

Recommended

rectangular section in mm

Recommended dia

rectangular cross section in mm

Nominal dia in mm Nominal well

thickness in mm

100 25 X 4.5 (1” X 3/16)

23 x 6 (1” X 1”)

200 38 X 4.5 (1 ½” X 3 1/16”)

38 X 6 (1 ½” X ¼”)

300 38 X 6 (1 ½” X ¼”)

51 X 6 (2” X ¼”)

2.50 (1”)

3.38 (0.133”)

400 51 X 6 (2” X ¼”)

63 X 6 (2 ½” X ¼”)

32.0 (1 1/4)”)

3.56 (0.140”)

500 75 X 4.5 (3” X 3/16”)

76 X 6 (3” X ¼”)

32.0 (1 ¼”)

3.56 (0.140”)

600 76 X 6 (3” X ¼”)

102 X 6 (4” X ¼”)

38.0 (1 ½”)

3.68 (0.145”)

700 76 X 6 (3” X ¼”)

102 X 6 (4” X ¼”)

51.0 (2”)

3.91 (0.154”)

800 102 X 6 (4” X ¼”)

27 X 6 (5” X ¼”)

51.0 (2”)

3.91 (0.154”)

900 102 X 6 (4” X ¼”)

27 X 6 (5” X ¼”)

63.0 (2 ½”)

5.16 (0.230”)

5.1.4 Bus bar supports and attachments.

Supports.- Bus bars shall be firmly fixed o n supports constructed from a suitably insulated

material such as Phenolic laminated sheet. Alternatively bus bars shall be supported on

insulators of suitable length conforming to relevant Indian Standards. The supports shall

be sufficiently robust to effectively withstand electro mechanical stresses produced in the

event of short circuit.

5.1.4.1 Connections to Bus Bars.- (a) Connections to bus bars of ratings more than 200

amp shall be made with clamping arrangement with bolts and nuts and for bus bars of

smaller ratings, use of holes drilled into the bus bars may be made.

(b) The bolts and nuts used for connections to bus bars shall be of aluminium alloy, tinned

forged brass or galvanised iron. Suitable precaution shall be taken against heating due to

bimetallic contact.



Tirunelveli

171

(c) Further for tapping off connections from bu bars. VIR / PVC insulated wire may be

used for current capacities up to 100 amp. and for higher current capacities solid

conductors / strips suitably insulated with PVC sleeve / tape shall be used adopting

trunking arrangement.

5.4 Clearances.

5.4.2.1 The minimum clearance to be maintained for open and enclosed indoor air insulated bus bars /

electrically non exposed and working at system voltages up to 600 volts shall be as

follows:-

Between……………………………………………………….Min. clearances.

Phase to Earth…………………………………………….26 mm.

5.5.1 Bus bar markings.

5.5.1 The colours and letters (or symbols) for Bus Bars.- Main Bus bar connection and Auxiliary

wiring, etc., shall conform to relevant Indian Standards. A brief from IS: 375-1963 [ Marking

and arrangement for switchgear bus bars main connections and auxiliary wiring (Revised)

(With Amendment No. 1)] is given below for broad guide lines.

(a) For A.C. Bus Bars and Main connections:-

Bus bar and main connections.

Colour. Letter s

Symbols

(1) (2) (3)

(i) Three phase Red, Yellow, Blue R. Y. B

Two Phase Red, Blue R. B.

Single Phase Red R

(ii) Neutral connections Black N

(iii) Connection to earth Green E

(iv) Phase variable ( such as

connection to revisible motors)

Grey Gy

(b) for D.C

(i) Positive Red R or plus

(ii) Negative Blue B or minus

(iii) Neutral connection Black N

(iv) Connection to earth Green E

(v) Equalizer Yellow Y

(vi) Phase variable (such as in

connection to reversible motors)

Grey Grey or Gy.

Note:- In the wiring diagram, positive and negative should be indicated by ‘+’ and ‘-‘ respectively.

5.5.2. Phase sequence and polarity.- Bus bars and main connections, when marked shall be

marked in accordance with the following table to indicate the order in which the voltages

in phases reach their maximum values.

System As indicated by colours of letters. Phase sequence as indicated

vectorially

Three phase Red, Yellow, Blue R.Y.B



Tirunelveli

172

Two phase Red, Blue R.B.

5.6 Arrangement of busbars and main connections:

5.6.1.1 Busbars and main connections which are substantially in one plane shall be arranged in

order given as follows:-

(A) A.C System.- (1) The order of phase connections shall be Red, Yellow and Blue.

(ii) When the run of the conductors is horizontal. the red shall be on the top or on the left or

farthest away as viewed from the front.

(iii) When the run of the conductor is vertical the red shall be on the left or farthest away as

viewed from the front.

(iv) When the system has a neutral connection in the same phase as the p hase connections

the neutral shall occupy an outer position.

(v)Unless the neutral connections can be readily distinguished from the phase connections

the order shall be red, yellow, blue and black.

(B) D.C.: System. – The arrangement shall be as follows:-

1. When the run of the conductors is horizontal the red shall be on the top or on the left or

farthest away as viewed from the front.

2. When the run of the conductors is vertical, the red shall be on the left or f farthest away as

viewed from the front.

3. When the system is 3 wire with the conductors in the same plane the neutral shall occupy

the middle position/

CHAPTER - 6

6 Earthing:

6.1. General: The object of an earthing system is to provide as nearly as possible a system of

conductors at a uniform potential and as nearly zero or absolute earth potential as

possible. The purpose of this is to ensure that in general all parts of apparatus other than

live parts shall be at earth potential as well as to ensure that persons coming in contact

with it shall be at earth potential at all times.

System earthing: Earthing associated with current carrying conductor is normally essential

to the security of the system and is generally known as system earthing.

Equipment earthing: Earthing of non-current carrying metal work and conductor is

essential to the safety of human life, of animals and of property and it is generally known

as equipment earthing. For earthing of Anti-static flooring specifications-See 2.6.1.2

As far as possible all earth connections shall be visible for inspection and shall be carefully

made; if they are poorly made or inadequate the purpose for which they are intended, loss

of life and property or serious personal injury may result. Earthing shall conform to the

following specifications. For other details not covered in this specifications relevant Indian

Standards shall be referred; to.

6.1.1 Type of Earth Electrodes:



Tirunelveli

173

(a) Pipe Earth electrode.

(b) Plate earth electrode.

(c) Strip or conductor earth electrode.

6.1.2 Deleted

6.2 Selection of earth electrode.

6.1.2.1 G.I. pipe or G.I. plate earth Electrode shall be used except where it is

unavoidable to use copper plate earth electrode due to corrosive soil conditions for

direct current system or for large capacity substations.

6.1.2.2 Strip or conductor electrode is recommended for hard and rocky soils and in

locations where there are limitations to the use of pipe or plate earth electrode.

6.1.2.3 Where the soil is highly corrosive, the earth electrode shall be of copper.

where soil contains sulphur, copper electrode shall be adequately tinned.

6.1 Arrangement for earth electrode:

Pipe earth electrode: G.I. Pipe shall bf of medium class, 30/40 mm dia and 2.50 metres in

length. Galvanising of the pipe shall conform to relevant Indian Standards. G.I. pipe

electrodes shall be cut tapered at the bottom and provided with holes of 12 mm. dia drilled

not less than 7.5 cm from each other up to 2 m of length from bottom. The electrode shall be

buried in the ground vertically with its top not less than 20 cm. below ground level (details

shown in the drawing No.3)

6.3.1 Plate Earth Electrode: For plate electrodes minimum dimensions of the electrode shall be as

under:

(a) G.I. Plate Electrode – 60 cm x 60 cm x 6.30 cm thick.

(b) Copper plate electrode – cm x 60 cm x 3.15 mm thick. The electrode

shall be buried in ground with its faces electrical and top not less than

1.5 m below ground level materials shown in the drawing No.4.

6.3.1 Strip or conductor electrode:

(a) Strip electrodes shall not be less than 25 mm x 4 mm of galvanised iron

and 25 mm x 1.6 mm of copper. For conductor electrode the size of round

conductor shall be not less than 6 SWG of G.I. and 8 SWG of copper.

(b) The length of buried strip or conductor earth electrode shall be not less

than 15 m. This conductor length shall be increased if necessary on the

basis of the information available about soil resistance, so that the

required earth resistance is obtained.

(c) The electrode shall be buried not less than 0.5 m. deep in a trench either

single straight or circular or in a number of trenches radiating from a

single point.



Tirunelveli

174

(d) If conditions necessitate use of more than one strip or conductor

electrode, they shall be laid either in parallel trenches or in radial

trenches.

6.4 Method of installing watering arrangement.

6.4.1 In the case of plate earth electrodes a watering pipe of 19/20 mm dia of medium class G.I. pipe

may be provided and attached to the electrode. A funnel with mesh shall be provided on the top of

this pipe for watering the earth. In the case of pipe electrode a 40 mm X 20 mm reducer shall be

used for fixing the funnel. The watering funnel attachment shall be housed in masonory enclosure of

not less than 30 cm x 30 cm x 30 cm.

6.4.1.1 A case iron / M.S. frame with cover having locking arrangement shall be suitably

embedded in the masonory enclosure, or a cover of RCC slash of size 33.8 cm x 33.8 cm

and thickness 38/40 mm provided.

6.4.2 Location of each electrode.

6.4.2.1 Normally an earth electrode shall not be situated less than 1.5 m from any

building. Care shall be taken that the excavations for earth electrode may not affect the

column footings or foundation of the building; in such cases electrodes may be further

away from the buildings.

6.4.2.2 The location of earth electrode will be such earth electrode will be such where

the soil has reasonable change of remaining moist, as far as possible. Entrances,

Pavements and roads ways, are definitely avoided for locating the earth electrode.

6.4.3 Artificial treatment of soil.

6.4.3.1 In case there is no option of site and earth electrode resistance is high, the

earth electrode resistance shall be reduced by artificial chemical treatment of the soil. For

this pupose, the most commonly used substances are medium chloride (common salt),

calcium chloride, sodium carbonate, copper sulphate and salt mixed with soft coke or

charcoal in suitable proportion. But before any chemical treatment is appealed, possible

corrosive effect on the electrode materials and connections must be taken in to

consideration. When this treatment is resorted to, the electrode shall be surrounded by

charcoal / coke and salt as indicated in the attached drawing No.3 and 4. This treatment

of soil shall be specified in the schedule of work and in such cases, excavation for earth

electrode shall be as per dimensions indicated in the attached, drawings No.3 and 4.

6.4.4 Size of earthing lead.

6.4.4.1 Main Earthing Lead:-- The main earthing lead shall be of G.I. wire and G.I.

strip in the case of G.I. pipe earth electrode and G.I. Plate earth electrode and copper wire



Tirunelveli

175

and copper strip in the case of copper earth electrode. For all electrical installations

except sub-stations and generating stations, the earthing lead shall be not less than one

half of sectional area of that of the largest conductor to be protected but that a conductor

larger than 100 sq. mm nominal cross sectional area (2/0 SWG) in case of copper

conductor and 150 sq. mm in case of G.I. conductor need not be used. The minimum size

of main earth lead shall not be less than 8 SWG of copper or G.I. wire and 20 mm x 2 mm

in case of copper strip or 25 mm x 3 mm in case of G.I. strip.

Size of earth lead for sub stations / Generating stations:--

The recommended size of earth lead in case of generating station and sub-stations shall

be as given in Tables I and II under Part III.

6.4.4.2 Size of earth continuity conductor:- The nominal minimum cross sectional area of an earth

continuity conductor not contained within a cable or flexible cord shall be 14 SWG copper

or 12 SWG of G.I.

6.4.5 Method of connecting earth lead to earth electrode.

6.4.5.1 The earth lead should be connected to the earth electrode by means of lugs soldered or

crimped.

6.4.5.2 In the case of plate earth electrode the earthing lead shall be securely bolted to the plate

with two bolts, nuts, check nuts and washers. In the case of pipe earth electrode, it shall

be connected by means of a through bolt, nuts and washers. Alternatively a G.I. strip may

be clamped near the top end of the G.I. pipe electrode the strip being dished suitably at

the portion coming in contact with the G.I. pipe and the earth lead lug shall be securely

bolted to this strip with two bolts, nuts, check nuts and washers.

6.4.5.3 All materials used for connecting the earth lead with electrode shall be G.I. in case of G.I.

pipe and G.I. plate earth electrodes and of tinned brass in case of copper plate electrode.

6.4.5.4 The earthing lead shall be securely connected at the other end to the earth studs provided

on the main board / SDBS by means of soldering and lugs.

6.4.5.5 Loop earthing shall be provided for all mountings of main board and other metal clad

switches and distribution fuse boards with not less and 14 SWG copper or 12 SWG G.I. or

4 sq. mm. aluminium wire.

6.4.6 Protection of earthing lead.

6.4.6.1 The earthing lead from electrode onwards shall be suitably protected from mechanical injury

by a 15 mm dia G.I. pipe in case of wire and by 40 mm dia medium class G.I. pipe in case

of strip. Portion of this protection pipe within ground shall be buried at least 30 cm deep

(to be increased to 60 cm in case of road crossing and pavements). The portion within the

building shall be recessed in walls and floors to adequate depth.

6.4.7 Number of earth electrodes in Medium voltage Installations.



Tirunelveli

176

6.4.7.1 In medium voltage installations, where there are a number of motors or other equipment to

be earthed, at least a minimum of 2 numbers earth electrodes (interconnected with an

earth bus) should be provided for earth of the equipment. See also 2.6.12. below. The

number of electrodes has to be increased if lower earth circuit impedance is required. The

distance between two electrodes shall not be less than twice the length of the electrode.

The earth resistance of any single earth electrode should not normally exceed 5 ohms.

The earth resistances of a number rods or pipes connected together in parallel is

practically proportional to the reciprocal of the number of electrodes used.

6.4.8 Equipment and portions of installations which shall be earthed.

6.4.8.1 Except foe equipment provided with double insulation, all the non-current carrying metal parts

of the installation are to be earthed properly. All metal conduits trunking, cable sheaths,

switchgear, distribution fuse boards, lighting fittings and other parts made of metal shall

be bonded together and connected by means of two separate and distinct conductors to

an efficient earth electrode.

6.4.8.2 Earthing of metallic parts shall not be effected through any structural metal work houses the

installation. Where metallic parts of the installation are not required to be earthed and are

liable to become defective, such metallic parts shall be separated by durable non-

conducting material from any structural work.

6.4.8.3 The relevant portions of the Indian Electricity Rules i.e. Rules 32, 51, 61, 62, 67, 69, 88 (2)

and 90 shall apply (See Appendix A).

6.4.9 Earth circuit impedance.

6.4.9.1 In installations where the apparatus is protected by fuses the total earth

circuit impedance shall not be more than that obtained by the following graph.



Tirunelveli

177

IMPEDANCE OR RESISTANCE IN OHMS

(1) Curve A – total earth circuit impedance.

(2) Curve B – Resistance of consumer’s earth electrode (Assuming

sub-station electrode of equal resistance and 2 Ohms impedance in

remainder of circuit).

(3) In both cases a supply voltage of 240 V has been assumed.



Tirunelveli

178

PART – III

CHAPTER – 7

7 Medium voltage Main Switch Board.

7.1 The HV and MV switchgear rooms should be kept clean and tidy and should not be used as

a storage room or as a repair shop.

7.2 A minimum clearance of 1829 mm (6 feet) should be provided between HV and MV

switchgear, in case these are oil filled equipment, otherwise the standard clearance will

apply.

7.3 Danger notice should be affixed on the medium voltage switchgear panel. (Letter and

figures should be in red colour on which background).

7.4 Metallic parts of the medium voltage switchgear panel should be earthed by two separate

and distinct earth connections of proper size.

7.5 The space on sides and back of the MV switchgear panel should be 762 mm (30 inches) or

more in all cases of cable entries or bare connections at the rear. Spacing less than 229

mm (9 inches) may be permitted if there are no cable entries or bare connections at the

rear.

7.6 A clear space of 914 mm (3 feet) should be provided in front of the switch board.

7.7 A passage way clear to a height of 1829 mm (6 feet) should be provided on either end of

the switch board where the clearance at the back exceeds 762 mm (30 inches).

7.8 The control cables in the Medium Voltage cable trenches should be segregated and laid.

The MV cables trenches should be completely covered with non-inflammable slabs and

filled with dry sand.

7.9 Each outgoing distinct circuit from the switch board should be separately controlled by a

suitable linked switch fuse / fuse switch or circuit breaker of adequate capacity.

7.10 Identification mark for different circuits should be provided in the Medium Voltage

switchgear panel.

7.11 The exposed wiring in the Medium voltage switchgear room should be enclosed in metallic

conduits and the conduits earthed.

7.12 Four pole changeover switches of adequate capacity should be provided in the MV

switchgear panel to avoid paralleling of transformer supply and standby generated supply.



Tirunelveli

179

7.13 The lighting supply should be as far as possible taken as a separate feeder from the main

MV switch board and distributed therefrom to the factory, office, etc., through separate

sub-switch boards and distribution fuse boards.

7.14 Wherever this is not feasible, the lighting circuit may be taken from the sub-switch

board/main distribution fuse board of a particular section/hall, for feeding the lighting load

in that particular section/hall.

7.15 Tamil Nadu electricity Board’s specific permission should be obtained for the installation of

(squirrel cage) motors rated above 50 H.P. with D.O.L. stating.

7.16 The iron clad switches / cutouts should not be at the rear side of the switch board. The

switch cutouts and circuit breakers should be operated from the front of the switch board.

7.17 The MV bus bars at the MV main and sub switch boards should be marked with distinct

colour Red, Yellow and blue colours should be provided for the phase buses and black

colour for neutral bus.

7.18 The cables and wires should be provided with soldered lugs for connections at the switch

boards.

7.19 The joints in earthing conductors should be soldered or mechanically clamped.

7.20 Ends of conduits wherein the sires are enclosed should be provided with bushes.

7.21 Unused cable holes in the switch boards should be closed.

7.22 All switch fuse handles should not be above an operating height of 1.8268 Metres (6 feet)

from floor level.

7.23 Between bus bar chamber and the switch fuses, trunking arrangement is preferable to

conduit pipes.

7.24 Linked switch fuse of adequate capacity should be provided to control and protect the

circuit to any MV capacitor. Where the capacity exceeds 100 KVAR, a circuit breaker of

adequate capacity should be provided.

7.25 The exposed terminals of capacitors should be provided with two separate and distinct

connections with earth.

7.26 The metallic tank of the capacitor should be provided with two separate and distinct


7.27 The condenser banks should be erected with a working space of 762 mm (30 inches) on

the side of cable entry.



Tirunelveli

180

7.28 The condenser should be provided with automatic discharge on disconnection of supply.

7.29 Fire extinguishers suitable for electric fires and round bottom fire buckets filled with clean

dry sand conspicuously marked should be kept in easily accessible position near the

Medium Voltage switch gear room.

CHAPTER – 8

8 Generators – (High Voltage and Medium Voltage)

8.1 The frame of the Generator should be earthed by two separate and distinct connections

with earth. The earthing lead should be adequate size as per the table II annexed, to this

part.

8.2 The neutral of the Generator should be provided with an isolator.

8.3 The neutral of the Generator should be earthed by not less than two separate and distinct

connections with earth which should be after the isolator referred above. The earthing

lead should be copper and equivalent G.I. wire of half the section of the phase lead,

subject to a minimum of NO.8 SWG copper or its equivalent conductor. However, in case

of larger units with E/L protection the size of earth lead will be determined by the

maximum earth leakage setting available.

8.4 In case of High Voltage Generators (Voltage above 650 V), the neutral point should be

earthed by the two separate and distinct connections with earth each having its own

electrode.

8.5 The clear space between two generator sets should not be less than 1829 mm (6 feet).

8.6 The exposed wires near the Generator/Generator to switch boards should be enclosed in

metallic conduit and the conduit earthed.

8.7 A linked switch fuse or circuit breaker of adequate capacity should be provided for control

of generator supply.

8.8 The control panel for the Generator should be earthed with two separate and distinct


8.9 Generator panels should be made vermin-proof.

8.10 The side of generate panels should be provided with metallic covering.

8.11 The generator panel should be erected with a clearance of 762 mm on 3 sides and a clear

space of 914 mm (3 feet) in front of the panel.



Tirunelveli

181

8.12 With regard to the meter provided for generator for purposes of levy of electricity tax, the

following are to be provided.

1. Maximum Demand Indicator for KVC and KW Hts Meter;

2. Seal.

8.13 If more than one generator is provided, there should be individual breakers and paralleling

arrangement.

8.14 The consumer’s generator supply should under no circumstances be paralleled with the

supplier’s supply, with out specific sanction of Government. In the case of medium

voltage generators four pole change over switch shall be provided to comply with this

condition.

8.15 The cable trenches in the generator enclosure should be provided with non-inflammable

slabs and filled with sand.

8.16 Danger notice should be provided for the generator enclosure.

8.17 Fir buckets of round bottom with clean dry sand and fire extinguishers suitable for electric

fires should be kept in easily accessible position inside the generator enclosure.

8.18 First Aid boxes conspicuously marked and equipped should be provided and maintained in

the Generator enclosure.

8.19 All sundry and combustible materials within the Generator enclosure should be removed.

CHAPTER - 9

9 Medium Voltage Installation sub-Switch Boards and distribution Fuse Boards.

9.1 The location of the switch board should be carefully done in various factories. In chemical

factories it should not be near equipment which emit, corrosive fumes. In fertilizer and

other factories where there is dust, it should be in a place fee from dust. In factories with

furnaces it should be in a place not exposed to heat. To ensure safety and long life for

switchgear in factories where dust and fumes are present, a glass panelled, housing

should be provided. Flame-proof switch boards and controls should be used in locations

where products of explosive nature are made or stored (Places like Oxygen plants,

Petroleum Installations and chemical Factories).

9.2 The switch board should be easily accessible and should be kept free from dumping of

materials.



Tirunelveli

182

9.3.1. Sub Switch Boards and distribution Fuse Boards should be provided with adequate means

of control and isolation, by means of linked switches, on the incoming supply side, near

the boards. If, however, these sub switch boards and distribution fuse boards re in the

same rooms, separate incoming isolator for these boards need not be provided.

9.3.2. Standard type switch fuse board and distribution fuse should be erected with a clearance

of not less than 0.914 metres (3 feet ) in front of the switch board/ Distribution board and

with a clearance of not less than 0.762 metres (30 inches) at the rear and sides in case

there are cable entries and attachment at the rear of the switch board / D.B. or with a

clearance of not less than 0.229 metres (9 inches) in case there are no cable entries at the

rear side the switch board/distribution board to comply with rule 51(1) (c) of IEF ’56.

9.3.3. Switch fuses may be provided instead of isolators at the incoming side of such switch

boards and distribution fuse boards.

9.4. Each outgoing circuit from the distribution fuse board should be provided with cut-outs

control.

9.5.The distribution fuse boards are not permitted in trenches or in underground recess. These

should be erected above ground, on a wall stanchion at a convenient height from ground

level with adequate working space, for renewal of fuses.

9.6. The supply to the distribution fuse boards in the sections should not be looped or tied off, the

main cable.

9.7. The looping of conductors and ‘T’ joints in power wiring should be eliminated by providing

standard sub switch boards.

9.8. The supply to motors and other equipment should not be tapped off the bus bars in

distribution fuse boards. The supply should be taken through suitable cut-outs installed in

the distribution fuse boards.

9.9. The distribution fuse boards should be provided with two separate and distinct connections

with earth, of adequate size.

9.10. The exposed leads near the main distribution fuse boards and or sub distribution fuse boards

should be enclosed in metallic conduit and the conduit earthed. Each single phase and

three phase circuit for power land should be taken in separate conduits.

9.11. All the leads of every single phase circuit should be run in the same conduit and no joints

should be made in the cable inside the conduit.



Tirunelveli

183

9.12. Distribution Fuse Board should be with maximum of 12 ways and limited to 60 amps per way.

If higher current rating distribution fuse boards are used interlock arrangement, to isolate

supply to the distribution fuse board before renewing the fuses, should be provided.

9.13. One distribution fuse board should not feed another distribution fuse board. distribution fuse

boards should be fed from the main switch board or sub switch boards only. Circuits from

the distribution fuse boards to the motors / equipment should be the final circuits.

9.14. All switch handles should not be above an operation height of 1.829 Metres (6 feet ) from floor

level.

9.15. Between bus chamber and the switch, trunking arrangement is preferable to conduit pipes.

9.16. Lighting circuits should be kept separate and distinct from the power circuits. Motors should

not be connected to lighting distribution fuse boards. Separate distribution fuse boards for

lighting should be provided.

9.17. Main and sub distribution fuse boards in sections should be marked as power / lighting and the

circuit list provided with details of current rating and size of fuse element.

9.18. Danger notices should be affixed on all main and sub distribution fuse boards in the sections.

CHAPTER – 10

10.1 MV Installation – Motors and Equipment.

10.2 The supply to each motor should be from a standard switch board or distribution fuse

board with separate control for every circuit.

10.3 Supply to the motors should not be tapped from open wires run on the building walls or

ceilings. The tappings from bare or open wires should be eliminated by providing standard

distribution arrangement with control for each circuit of a standard overhead bus bar

trunking arrangement at a convenient height. The individual circuits should be enclosed in

metallic conduits and the conduits earthed.

10.4 Unarmoured cables and exposed wires should not be run in ducts, from the switch boards

/ distribution fuse boards to motors or equipment and should be enclosed in metallic

conduits and the conduits earthed.

10.5 Linked switch of adequate capacity or tripping desire to cut out supply on all three phase

should be provided for the motor / equipment, within a distance of 3.048 metres (10 feet)

from the motor / equipment, and in the same enclosure. However, built in switches of

equipment, can be permitted based on actual site location, accessibility etc.

10.6 Power Supply to Cranes.



Tirunelveli

184

10.6.1 The switch to cut out supply to a crane should be installed, at an accessible height from

ground.

10.6.2 The metal rails, on which the crane travels, should be electrically continuous and earthed.

The rails should be bended together and earthed at both ends.

10.6.3 Four core cable should be used for overhead traveling cranes and the 4th core should be

sued for earthing the cranes motors and not as neutral. The lighting circuit should be

supplied from a separate 400V / 230V or 400 / 240 V transformer.

10.6.4 For outdoor crane installations, subject to corrosion, suitable guards for earthing the

snapped trolley wires should be provided.

10.6.5 The supply to the trolley wire should be given at the end. In case a supply is given in

sections, it should be ensured that the joint is braced and made smooth as not to interfere

with the collector pulley. The collector pulley should be with proper groove to engage and

ensure good contact with the trolley, wire.

10.6.6 Switches and / or starters or motors / equipment should not be mounted on wooden

boards. Only sheet steel mounting or iron frame work should be used.

10.6.7 Wooden base should not be used for mounting the motors.

10.6.8 Open wiring for the motors / equipment is not permissible. The wiring should be enclosed

in metallic conduits and the conduits earthed.

10.9 Flexible metal Tubing:

10.9.1 The length of flexible metal tubing used for connection between the terminal boxes for

motors and starters, switches and motors should be restricted to a maximum of 120 cm.

10.9.2 The length of flexible metal tubing used for connection between switch and starter should

be restricted to a maximum of 60 cm.

10.9.3 The flexible tubing shall be efficiently bonded to the earth continuity wire.

10.10 Unarmoured tropodur / PVC cable used for open wiring to motors / equipment should be

enclosed in metallic conduits and the conduits earthed.

10.11 The control gears and motor frames should be provided with two separate and instinct

connections with earth. The size of earthing lead should be as per the table annexed.

10.12 The earthing for the control gear / motor / equipment with W.P. / VIR wires may be

permitted provided at could be tested for electrical and mechanical continuity.

10.13 V.I.R. or W.P. cables should not be used on the supply side of the portable or

transportable equipment. Only heavily insulated and adequately protected flexible cables

should be used.

10.14 Open plug sockets for portable equipment should be suitably covered.



Tirunelveli

185

10.15 Open fuse units mounted on wooden board is not permissible and should be replaced by

iron clad units mounted on sheet steel or iron frame work.

10.16 For three phase motors, plug should be of 4 pin, the fourth pin being for earth connection

which should first make connection when the plug is inserted.

10.17 Earth Electrodes.

10.17.1 Earth electrodes of sufficient numbers (minimum 2 Nos.) should be provided for earthing of

Medium Voltage equipment. See 2.6.10.1 in this connection.

10.17.2 Earth throughs and or cover slabs should be provided for the earth electrodes. Rusted

bolds and nuts should be replaced by G.I. or brass bolts and nuts. Rusted pipes should be

replaced by fresh pipes.

10.18 Cables should not be taken over furnaces. Paper insulated cable of Oil draining type

should not be carried over roof trusses as the oil will drain out at the cable end which is at

lower level.

10.19 For overhead bus bar trunking the main control to the bus bar should be capable of being

operated at an accessible height from ground level.

10.20 Danger notice should be provided for the control gear / motor / equipment.



Tirunelveli

186

SECTION 6 DRAWINGS



Tirunelveli

187

SECTION 7

BILL OF QUANTITIES



Tirunelveli

188

Note: (1) Item for which no rate or price has been entered in will not be paid for by the Employer when

executed and shall be deemed covered by the other rates and prices in the Bill of Quantities (refer: ITB Clause 13.2 and GCC Clause 43.3).

(2) Unit rates and prices shall be quoted by the bidder in Indian rupee [ITB Clause 14.1]. (3) Where there is a discrepancy between the rate in figures and words, the rates in words will govern.

[ITB Clause 27.1(a) ] 4) Where there is a discrepancy between the unit rate and the line item total resulting from multiplying

the unit rate by quantity, the unit rate quoted shall govern [ITB Clause 27.1 (b)].



Tirunelveli

189

SECTION 8

FORMS OF SECURITIES

i

Forms of Securities Acceptable forms of securities are annexed. Bidders should not complete the Performance and Advance Payment Security forms at this time. Only the successful Bidder will be required to provide Performance and Advance Payment Securities in accordance with one of the forms, or in a similar form acceptable to the Employer.

Annex A: Bid Security (Bank Guarantee)

Annex B: Performance Bank Guarantee

Annex B1: Performance Bank Guarantee for Unbalanced Items

Annex C: Deleted

Annex D: Bank Guarantee for Advance Payment



Tirunelveli

191

Annex A

BID SECURITY (BANK GUARANTEE) WHEREAS, _______________________ [name of Bidder] (hereinafter called "the Bidder") has submitted his Bid dated _______________________ [date] for the construction of _____________________________________ [name of Contract] (hereinafter called "the Bid"). KNOW ALL PEOPLE by these presents that We ______________________________ [name of bank] of ____________________________ [name of country] having our registered office at ___________________________________ (hereinafter called "the Bank") are bound unto ______________________________[name of Employer] (hereinafter called "the Employer") in the sum of ___________________

1 for which payment well and truly to be made to the said Employer the

Bank binds itself, his successors and assigns by these presents. SEALED with the Common Seal of the said Bank this _________ day of __________ 19____. THE CONDITIONS of this obligation are: (1) If after Bid opening the Bidder withdraws his bid during the period of Bid validity

specified in the Form of Bid; or (2) If the Bidder having been notified of the acceptance of his bid by the Employer

during the period of Bid validity: (a) fails or refuses to execute the Form of Agreement in accordance with the

Instructions to Bidders, if required; or (b) fails or refuses to furnish the Performance Security, in accordance with

the Instruction to Bidders; or (c) does not accept the correction of the Bid Price pursuant to Clause 27; we undertake to pay to the Employer up to the above amount upon receipt of his first written demand, without the Employer having to substantiate his demand, provided that in his demand the Employer will note that the amount claimed by him is due to him owing to the occurrence of one or any of the three conditions, specifying the occurred condition or conditions. This Guarantee will remain in force up to and including the date ____________________

2 days after

the deadline for submission of Bids as such deadline is stated in the Instructions to Bidders or as it may be extended by the Employer, notice of which extension(s) to the Bank is hereby waived. Any demand in respect of this guarantee should reach the Bank not later than the above date. DATE _______________ SIGNATURE OF THE BANK _________________________ WITNESS ____________ SEAL _______________________________________ _________________________________________________________________ [signature, name, and address] ____________________________ 1 The Bidder should insert the amount of the guarantee in words and figures denominated in Indian

Rupees. This figure should be the same as shown in Clause 16.1 of the Instructions to Bidders. 2 45 days after the end of the validity period of the Bid.



Tirunelveli

192

9 PERFORMANCE BANK GUARANTEE To: ______________________________________________ [name of Employer] _________________________________________ [address of Employer] WHEREAS _________________________ [name and address of Contractor] (hereinafter called "the Contractor") has undertaken, in pursuance of Contract No. _____ dated ________________ to execute __________________________ [name of Contract and brief description of Works] (hereinafter called "the Contract"); AND WHEREAS it has been stipulated by you in the said Contract that the Contractor shall furnish you with a Bank Guarantee by a recognized bank for the sum specified therein as security for compliance with his obligations in accordance with the Contract; AND WHEREAS we have agreed to give the Contractor such a Bank Guarantee; NOW THEREFORE we hereby affirm that we are the Guarantor and responsible to you, on behalf of the Contractor, up to a total of ____________________ [amount of guarantee] 1___________________________ [in words], such sum being payable in the types and proportions of

currencies in which the Contract Price is payable, and we undertake to pay you, upon your first written demand and without cavil or argument, any sum or sums within the limits of ____________________ [amount of guarantee]

1 as aforesaid without your needing to prove or to show grounds or reasons for

your demand for the sum specified therein. We hereby waive the necessity of your demanding the said debt from the Contractor before presenting us with the demand. We further agree that no change or addition to or other modification of the terms of the Contract or of the Works to be performed thereunder or of any of the Contract documents which may be made between you and the Contractor shall in any way release us from any liability under this guarantee, and we hereby waive notice of any such change, addition or modification. This guarantee shall be valid until ……… (i.e.) 28 days from the date of expiry of the Defects Liability Period. Signature and seal of the guarantor _____________________________ Name of Bank ____________________________________________ Address ____________________________________________ Date ____________________________________________ __________________

1 An amount shall be inserted by the Guarantor, representing the percentage of the Contract

Price specified in the Contract and denominated in Indian Rupees.



Tirunelveli

193

PERFORMANCE BANK GUARANTEE (for unbalanced items) To: ______________________________________________ [name of Employer] _________________________________________ [address of Employer] WHEREAS _________________________ [name and address of Contractor] (hereinafter called "the Contractor") has undertaken, in pursuance of Contract No. _____ dated ________________ to execute __________________________ [name of Contract and brief description of Works] (hereinafter called "the Contract"); AND WHEREAS it has been stipulated by you in the said Contract that the Contractor shall furnish you with a Bank Guarantee by a recognized bank for the sum specified therein as security for compliance with his obligations in accordance with the Contract; AND WHEREAS we have agreed to give the Contractor such a Bank Guarantee; NOW THEREFORE we hereby affirm that we are the Guarantor and responsible to you, on behalf of the Contractor, up to a total of ____________________ [amount of guarantee] 1___________________________ [in words], such sum being payable in the types and proportions of

currencies in which the Contract Price is payable, and we undertake to pay you, upon your first written demand and without cavil or argument, any sum or sums within the limits of ____________________ [amount of guarantee]

1 as aforesaid without your needing to prove or to show grounds or reasons for

your demand for the sum specified therein. We hereby waive the necessity of your demanding the said debt from the Contractor before presenting us with the demand. We further agree that no change or addition to or other modification of the terms of the Contract or of the Works to be performed thereunder or of any of the Contract documents which may be made between you and the Contractor shall in any way release us from any liability under this guarantee, and we hereby waive notice of any such change, addition or modification. This guarantee shall be valid until …….. (i.e.) 28 days from the date of issue of the certificate of completion of works. Signature and seal of the guarantor _____________________________ Name of Bank ____________________________________________ Address ____________________________________________ Date ____________________________________________ __________________

1 An amount shall be inserted by the Guarantor, representing additional security for unbalanced

Bids, if any and denominated in Indian Rupees.



Tirunelveli

194

BANK GUARANTEE FOR ADVANCE PAYMENT To: __________________________________________ [name of Employer] __________________________________________ [address of Employer] ___________________________________________[name of Contract] Gentlemen: In accordance with the provisions of the Conditions of Contract, sub clause 51.1 ("Advance Payment") of the above-mentioned Contract, ________________________________ [name and address of Contractor] (hereinafter called "the Contractor") shall deposit with __________________-______ [name of Employer] a bank guarantee to guarantee his proper and faithful performance under the said Clause of the Contract in an amount of _____________ [amount of guarantee] 1_________________________________ [in words].

We, the ____________________ [bank or financial institution], as instructed by the Contractor, agree unconditionally and irrevocably to guarantee as primary obligator and not as Surety merely, the payment to ____________________ [name of Employer] on his first demand without whatsoever right of objection on our part and without his first claim to the Contractor, in the amount not exceeding ____________________ [amount of guarantee]

1

__________________________________ [in words]. We further agree that no change or addition to or other modification of the terms of the Contract or of Works to be performed thereunder or of any of the Contract documents which may be made between _____________________ [name of Employer] and the Contractor, shall in any way release us from any liability under this guarantee, and we hereby waive notice of any such change, addition or modification. This guarantee shall remain valid and in full effect from the date of the advance payment under the Contract until _________________________ [name of Employer] receives full repayment of the same amount from the Contractor. Yours truly, Signature and seal: _______________________________ Name of Bank/Financial Institution: _________________ Address: _______________________________________ Date: ____________________ __________________________ 1 An amount shall be inserted by the bank representing the amount of the Advance Payment,

and denominated in Indian Rupees.